660677

JVC GY-HM660E Manual

182
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/192
Next page
.
HD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY-HM660U/GY-HM660E
GY-HM620U/GY-HM620E
INSTRUCTIONS
.
TIME CODE
The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement
without prior notice.
Please check the latest version of the INSTRUCTIONS from the following Mobile User Guide. You can
also download the PDF from the Mobile User Guide.
Mobile User Guide
When you are outside, you can refer to the instructions from your Android phone or iPhone.
http://manual3.jvckenwood.com/pro/mobile/global/
You can view the Mobile User Guide using the browser on your Android phone or iPhone.
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product.
Before operating this unit, please read the
instructions carefully to ensure the best
possible performance.
In this manual, each model number is
described without the last letter (U/E) which
means the shipping destination.
(U: for USA and Canada, E: for Europe)
Only “U” models (GY-HM660U/GY-HM620U)
have been evaluated by UL.
Please read the following before getting started:
For Customer Use:
Model No.
Serial No.
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the body.
Retain this information for future reference.
GY-HM660U/GY-HM620U
IM 1.00
B5A-1277-00
2
.
1.
Read these instructions.
2.
Keep these instructions.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
These are general IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS and certain items may not
apply to all appliances.
3.
FOR USA
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
CAN ICES-3 A / NMB-3 A
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as
power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
operate normally, or has been dropped.
3
Introduction
Safety Precautions
.
CAUTION
FOR USA AND CANADA
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with
arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a
risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of important
operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying
the appliance.
RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
.
This device complies with Part 15 of
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not
approved by JVC could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial
environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own
expense.
4
Introduction
.
POUR CANADA
RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION:
The mains plug shall remain readily
operable.
Remove the mains plug immediately if
the camera functions abnormally.
WARNING:
The battery pack, the camera with
battery installed, and the remote control
with battery installed should not be
exposed to excessive heat such as direct
sunlight, fire or the like.
ATTENTION:
POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION NE PAS
OUVRIR LE BOITER. AUCUNE
PIECE INTERIEURE N’EST A
REGLER PAR L’UTILISATEUR. SE
REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE
EN CAS DE PROBLEME.
ATTENTION
Le symbole de l’éclair à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’une “tension
dangereuse” non isolée dans
le boîtier du produit. Cette
tension est suffisante pour
provoquer l’électrocution de
personnes.
Le point d’exclamation à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’opérations
d’entretien importantes au
sujet desquelles des
renseignements se trouvent
dans le manuel
d’instructions.
Ces symboles ne sont
utilisés qu’aux Etats-Unis.
.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR
SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.
AVERTISSEMENT : POUR EVITER
LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU
D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS
EXPOSER L’APPAREIL A LA
PLUIE NI A L’HUMIDITE.
NOTES:
The rating plate and safety caution are
on the bottom and/or the back of the
main unit.
The serial number plate is on the
bottom of the unit.
The rating information and safety
caution of the AC adapter are on its
upper and lower sides.
REMARQUES :
La plaque d’identification et
l’avertissement de sécurité se trouvent
sous l’appareil et/ou au dos.
La plaque du numéro de série est
située sur la partie inférieure de
l’appareil.
Les informations d’identification et
l’avertissement de sécurité de
l’adaptateur secteur sont situés sur ses
côtés supérieur et inférieur.
Caution on Replaceable lithium
battery
The battery used in this device may
present a fire or chemical burn hazard if
mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat
above 100°C (212°F) or incinerate.
Replace battery with Panasonic, Sanyo,
Sony or Maxell CR2025.
Danger of explosion or risk of fire if the
battery is incorrectly replaced.
Dispose of used battery promptly.
Keep away from children.
Do not disassemble and do not dispose
of in fire.
5
Introduction
.
When the equipment is installed in a
cabinet or on a shelf, make sure that it
has sufficient space on all sides to allow
for ventilation (10 cm (3-15/16") or more
on both sides, on top and at the rear).
Do not block the ventilation holes.
(If the ventilation holes are blocked by a
newspaper, or cloth etc. the heat may not
be able to get out.)
No naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, should be placed on the
apparatus.
When discarding batteries,
environmental problems must be
considered and the local rules or laws
governing the disposal of these batteries
must be followed strictly.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and that no objects
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the apparatus.
Do not point the lens directly into the
sun. This can cause eye injuries, as well
as lead to the malfunctioning of internal
circuitry. There is also a risk of fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION!
The following notes concern possible
physical damage to this unit and to the
user.
Carrying or holding this unit by the LCD
monitor can result in dropping the unit,
or in a malfunction.
Do not use a tripod on unsteady or
unlevel surfaces. It could tip over,
causing serious damage to the unit.
CAUTION!
Connecting cables (Audio/Video, etc.) to
this unit and leaving it on top of the TV is
not recommended, as tripping on the
cables will cause the unit to fall, resulting
in damage.
.
When using the AC adapter in
areas other than the USA
The provided AC adapter features
automatic voltage selection in the AC
range from 110 V to 240 V.
USING HOUSEHOLD AC PLUG
ADAPTER
In case of connecting the unit’s power
cord to an AC wall outlet other than
American National Standard C73 series
type, use an AC plug adapter called a
“Siemens Plug” as shown.
For this AC plug adapter, please contact
the local dealers in your area.
Remove the AC adapter from the AC
wall outlet when not in use.
Do not leave dust or metal objects
adhered to the AC wall outlet or AC
adapter (power/DC plug).
Plug Adapter
6
Introduction
.
IMPORTANT (for owners in the U.K.)
Connection to the mains supply in
the United Kingdom.
DO NOT cut off the mains plug from
this equipment.
If the plug fitted is not suitable for the
power points in your home or the cable is
too short to reach a power point, then
obtain an appropriate safety approved
extension lead or contact the local
dealers in your area.
BE SURE to replace the fuse only with
an identical approved type, as originally
fitted, and to replace the fuse cover.
If nonetheless the mains plug is cut off
be sure to remove the fuse and dispose
of the plug immediately, to avoid possible
shock hazard by inadvertent connection
to the mains supply.
If this product is not supplied fitted with a
mains plug then follow the instructions
given below:
DO NOT make any connection to the
Larger Terminal coded E or Green.
The wires in the mains lead are coloured
in accordance with the following code:
If these colours do not correspond with
the terminal identifications of your plug,
connect as follows:
Blue wire to terminal coded N (Neutral)
or coloured black.
Brown wire to terminal coded L (Live) or
coloured Red.
If in doubt — consult a competent
electrician.
CAUTIONS:
To prevent shock, do not open the
cabinet. No user serviceable parts
inside.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
When you are not using the AC
adapter for a long period of time, it is
recommended that you disconnect the
power cord from AC outlet.
Blue to N
(Neutral) or Black
Brown to L (Live)
or Red
.
FOR EUROPE
This equipment is in conformity with the
provisions and protection requirements of
the corresponding European Directives.
This equipment is designed for professional
video appliances and can be used in the
following environments:
Controlled EMC environment (for
example, purpose-built broadcasting or
recording studio), and rural outdoors
environments.
In order to keep the best performance and
furthermore for electromagnetic
compatibility we recommend to use cables
not exceeding the following lengths:
The inrush current of this apparatus is
4.9 A.
Exclusive
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Coaxial
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Shielded
Cable
DC INPUT 1.8 m
1.4 m
1.2 m
3 m
2 m
3 m
2 m
1 m
1 m
3 m
USB Mini
AV OUT
HDMI
REMOTE
HD/SD SDI
AUX
TC
HEADPHONE
AUDIO INPUT 1/2
Port Cable Length
CAUTION:
Where there are strong electromagnetic
waves or magnetism, for example near a
radio or TV transmitter, transformer,
motor, etc., the picture and the sound
may be disturbed. In such case, please
keep the apparatus away from the
sources of the disturbance.
7
Introduction
.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user
may be required to take adequate
measures.
CAUTION:
To avoid electric
shock or damage to
the unit, first firmly
insert the small end
of the power cord into the AC Adapter
until it is no longer wobbly, and then plug
the larger end of the power cord in to an
AC outlet.
FOR EUROPEAN
Dear Customer
This apparatus is in conformance with
the valid European directives and
standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
European representative of
JVC KENWOOD Corporation is:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Konrad-Adenauer-Allee 1-11
61118 Bad Vilbel
GERMANY
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte
Kundin, dieses Gerät stimmt mit den
gültigen europäischen Richtlinien und
Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer
Verträglichkeit und elektrischer
Sicherheit überein.
Die europäische Vertretung für die
JVC KENWOOD Corporation ist:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Konrad-Adenauer-Allee 1-11
61118 Bad Vilbel
DEUTSCHLAND
.
The plastics packaging bags may cause
suffocation when they are covered over the
head. Tear them open, and keep them away
from the reach of infants and children by
ensuring that they are disposed of properly.
.
Battery Pack
The supplied battery pack is a lithium-ion
battery. Before using the supplied battery
pack or an optional battery pack, be sure
to read the following cautions:
To avoid hazards
... do not burn.
... do not short-circuit the
terminals. Keep it away
from metallic objects
when not in use.
When transporting, carry the battery in
a plastic bag.
... do not modify or disassemble.
... do not expose the battery to
temperatures exceeding 60°C (140°F),
as this may cause the battery to
overheat, explode or catch fire.
... use only specified chargers.
Terminals
To prevent damage and prolong
service life
... do not subject to unnecessary shock.
... charge within the temperature range
of 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F). Cooler
temperatures require longer charging
time, or in some cases stop charging
at all. Warmer temperatures prevent
complete charging, or in some cases
stop charging at all.
... store in a cool, dry place. Extended
exposure to high temperatures will
increase natural discharge and
shorten service life.
... keep a 30% battery level if the
battery pack is not to be used for a
long period of time.
... remove from charger or powered unit
when not in use, as some machines
use current even when switched off.
... do not drop or subject to strong
impact.
8
Introduction
.
Para Brasil
Informação sobre eliminação de
baterias
Este produto não deverá ser eliminado
como lixo doméstico em geral.
Devolva a bateria velha ao comerciante
ou para a rede autorizada, para que seja
devolvida ao fabricante ou importador.
A reciclagem e eliminação de lixo em
uma maneira adequada, ajudarão para
preservar recursos, prevenindo, ao
mesmo tempo, contra efeitos prejudiciais
sobre a nossa saúde e o meio ambiente.
o
Para Retirar a Bateria Recarregável
Pressione botão e puxe a bateria para fora.
.
9
Introduction
Contents
Introduction
Safety Precautions
............................................ 4
Contents .......................................................... 10
Main Features ................................................. 13
Precautions for Proper Use ............................. 15
Operation Modes ............................................. 18
Names of Parts ................................................ 20
Side Control Panel ....................................... 22
SD Slot ......................................................... 23
Rear Terminal .............................................. 23
LCD Monitor ................................................ 24
Lens Section ................................................ 25
Basic System Diagram .................................... 26
Preparations
Settings and Adjustments Before Use ............. 27
Adjusting the Grip Belt ................................. 27
Attaching an External Microphone ............... 27
Attaching the Tripod ..................................... 27
Attaching the Large Eyecup ......................... 27
Opening/Closing the Lens Cover ................. 28
Attaching/Detaching the Hood ..................... 28
Power Supply .................................................. 28
Using a Battery Pack .................................... 28
Using AC Power (DC IN Power) ................... 30
Power Status Display ...................................... 30
Turning On/Off the Power ................................ 31
Initial Settings .................................................. 32
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder .. 34
Display Screen ............................................. 34
Status Screen .............................................. 35
USB Mode Screen ....................................... 35
Remote Edit Mode Screen a ................... 35
Warning Display ........................................... 35
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder ...... 36
Adjusting the LCD Monitor ........................... 36
Adjusting the Viewfinder .............................. 37
Assignment of Functions to User Buttons ........ 38
Tally Lamp ....................................................... 38
SD Card ........................................................... 39
Usable Cards ............................................... 39
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards ................ 41
Restoring the SD Card ................................. 42
Clips Recorded to SD Cards ........................ 43
Operation Lock Feature ................................... 44
Shooting
Basic Shooting Procedures
............................. 45
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video
Format ............................................................. 46
Zoom Operation .............................................. 48
Focus Operation .............................................. 49
Adjusting the Focusing by Face Detection ...... 52
Adjusting the Brightness .................................. 53
Adjusting the Iris .............................................. 54
Setting the Gain ............................................... 55
Setting the Electronic Shutter .......................... 56
Setting the ND Filter ........................................ 58
Adjusting the White Balance ............................ 59
Adjusting the Camera Image ........................... 62
Using the Image Stabilizer ............................... 63
Audio Recording .............................................. 63
Monitoring Audio Sound During Recording Using a
Headphone ...................................................... 65
Time Code and User’s Bit ................................ 66
Setting Time Code Generator .......................... 67
Setting the User’s Bit ....................................... 69
Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera
......................................................................... 70
Setting Zebra Pattern ...................................... 71
Setting Spot Meter ........................................... 72
Acquiring Positioning Information by GPS a
......................................................................... 74
Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip
Review) ........................................................... 74
Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter Trig) ....... 75
Recording Simultaneously at Two Different
Definitions a ................................................ 76
Series Rec ....................................................... 76
Dual Rec .......................................................... 76
Backup Rec ..................................................... 78
Special Recording ........................................... 80
Pre Rec ........................................................ 80
Clip Continuous Rec .................................... 80
Frame Rec ................................................... 82
Interval Rec .................................................. 83
Variable Frame Rec ..................................... 84
Playback
Playing Recorded Clips ................................... 85
Thumbnail Screen ........................................ 85
Actions ......................................................... 87
Playing back ................................................ 88
Deleting Clips .................................................. 89
Appending/Deleting OK Mark .......................... 90
Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips ................................................................ 91
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly ............... 91
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively ........ 92
Trimming Recorded Clips ................................ 93
10
Introduction
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Basic Operations in Menu Screen ...................
94
Display and Description of the Menu Screen
..................................................................... 95
Text Input with Software Keyboard .............. 96
Menu Screen Hierarchical Chart ..................... 97
Camera Function Menu ................................... 98
User Switch Set Item .................................. 100
Camera Process Menu .................................. 102
Detail/Adjust Item ....................................... 105
White Balance Item .................................... 106
TC/UB Menu ................................................. 107
LCD/VF Menu ................................................ 108
Shooting Assist Item .................................. 108
Marker Settings Item .................................. 109
Display Settings Item ................................. 110
A/V Set Menu ................................................ 112
Video Set Item ........................................... 112
Audio Set Item ........................................... 113
System Menu ................................................ 115
Record Set Item ......................................... 117
Network/Settings Item a ........................ 122
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items
(Favorites Menu) ........................................... 127
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu ...... 128
Editing Favorites Menu .............................. 128
Display/Status Screen
Display Screen in Camera Mode ................... 131
Display Screen in Media Mode ...................... 136
Status Screen ................................................ 139
Camera Features
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode
Only) .............................................................. 140
Smoothening the Skin Color (Skin Detail
Function) ....................................................... 140
Color Bar Output ........................................... 140
Adjusting Color Matrix ................................... 141
Configuring Setup Files ................................. 142
Saving Setup Files ..................................... 143
Loading a Setup File .................................. 144
Deleting Setup Files ................................... 144
Connecting External Devices
Loading Clips to the PC
................................. 145
Connecting External Monitor ......................... 146
Connecting the Headphone ........................... 148
Connecting Wired Remote Control ................ 148
Connecting to the Network a
Functions of Network Connection a .......... 149
Preparing Network Connection a .............. 149
Operating Environment .............................. 149
Camera Setup for Network Connection ..... 150
Connecting via Wireless LAN .................... 150
Connecting via Wired LAN ......................... 152
Connecting via Cellular Adapter ................ 152
Importing Metadata a ............................... 153
Preparing Metadata ................................... 153
Configuring the Server for Downloading .... 153
Importing Metadata .................................... 154
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip a ......... 155
Configuring the FTP Server for Uploading . 155
Uploading Video Clip ................................. 155
FTP Resume Feature a ............................ 157
Connecting from a Web Browser a ........... 158
Editing Metadata a ................................... 159
Planning Metadata ..................................... 159
Clip Metadata ............................................ 160
Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser
a ............................................................... 162
View Remote Feature a ............................ 166
Operating Procedure ................................. 166
Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom ............. 167
Camera Control Function a ...................... 168
Changing the Settings via a Web Browser a
....................................................................... 170
Changing View Remote Function Settings . 171
Changing Connection Setup ...................... 171
Changing Metadata Server Settings .......... 172
Changing Clip Server Settings ................... 172
Changing Streaming Settings .................... 172
Managing the Network Connection Settings File
a ............................................................... 172
Saving the Connection Settings File .......... 173
Reading the Connection Settings File ........ 174
Deleting Connection Settings .................... 174
Performing Live Streaming a .................... 175
Setting Distribution ..................................... 176
Starting Distribution ................................... 176
Setting the FEC Matrix ............................... 177
11
Introduction
Others
Error Messages and Actions .........................
178
List of FTP Transfer Errors a ................. 179
List of Live Streaming Error Displays a . 181
Blinking of the Tally Lamp .......................... 181
Warning Tone ............................................ 182
Troubleshooting ............................................ 182
Specifications ................................................ 184
Index ............................................................. 187
Software License Agreement ........................ 189
Important Notice concerning the Software ..... 190
.
Content of this manual
Symbols used
Caution : Describes precautions concerning the
operation of this product.
Memo : Describes reference information, such as
functions and usage restrictions of this
product.
A
: Indicates the reference page numbers and
reference items.
a
: Feature available on
GY-HM660U/GY-HM660E only.
b
: Feature available on
GY-HM620U/GY-HM620E only.
Content of this manual
0
All rights reserved by JVC KENWOOD Corporation.
Unauthorized duplication or reprinting of this
manual, in whole or in part, is strictly prohibited.
0
Illustrated designs, specifications and other
contents of this manual are subject to change for
improvement without prior notice.
0
AVCHD Progressive and the AVCHD Progressive
logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and
Sony Corporation.
0
XDCAM EX is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
0
SDXC and SDHC logos are trademarks of SD-3C,
LLC.
0
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) and
1
are trademarks of HDMI Licensing,
LLC.
0
QuickTime, Final Cut Pro, iPhone, iPad, iPod touch,
iOS, Mac OS and Safari are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
0
Android, Google Chrome and Nexus are
trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google
Inc.
0
QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave
Incorporated.
0
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
0
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and Internet
Explorer are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
0
Surface is the trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
0
Mozilla and Firefox are either trademarks or
registered trademarks of Mozilla Foundation in the
United States and/or other countries.
0
The company name of Fontworks, Fontworks, and
the name of the fonts are registered trademarks of
Fontworks Inc.
0
Zixi and the Zixi logo are trademarks of Zixi LCC.
0
Other product and company names included in this
instruction manual are trademarks and/or
registered trademarks of their respective
companies. Marks such as ™ and ® have been
omitted in this manual.
12
Introduction
Main Features
F12 Sensitivity, High-performance 1/3-
inch Full HD 3CMOS Sensors
This camera recorder is equipped with three 1/3-
inch 2.07M pixels full HD CMOS sensors.
It delivers high image quality, high color resolution
through processing of individual R, G, B color
signals.
12-bit signal processing and the new DNR
technology removes dark current and optical shot
noise without losing S/N and high resolution,
thereby achieving high F12 sensitivity.
Fujinon 23x Zoom Lens
It ensures high magnification of 29 mm at wide
ends, and provides high sensitivity across all
regions with F1.6-3.0.
The
zoom ring with zoom ring pin enables zooming
from the wide end to the tele end in 90 degrees.
Focus and iris control are also possible using
separate rings.
Small, Lightweight, Stylish, and
Ergonomic Design
The camera recorder is only 2.5 kg a or 2.4 kg
b in operation mode.
It is light and easy to use. Its ergonomic design
takes into consideration portability and operability
and is easy on the hand during shooting.
JVC’s Proprietary FALCONBRID High-
Quality Imaging Engine
The FALCONBRID high-quality imaging engine
omits unnecessary processing through
incorporating camera processing and image
compression on a single chip. Images from
imaging devices are compressed and processed
without any loss thereby achieving high-quality
images.
MPEG2 and H.264 Codec
FALCONBRID allows users to select MPEG-2 and
AVCHD, the most commonly used codec for
professional video, as the recording format.
QuickTime (MPEG-2 HD/H.264 HD/
H.264 SD)/MP4 (MPEG-2 HD)/AVCHD
File Formats
Inheriting the concept of ProHD memory camera
recorders, this camera recorder can support
various file formats, such as AVCHD and
QuickTime (H.264 SD) files, in addition to
QuickTime (MPEG-2 HD/H.264 HD) files that can
be
directly edited on Apple Final Cut Pro and MP4
files that are most suitable for XDCAM EX
Nonlinear Editing Workflow.
Two SDHC/SDXC Card Slots for Dual,
Backup and Series Recording
The most common SDHC/SDXC card recording
system is used as the memory card.
This
ensures reliability and operation at low running
cost.
Various user friendly recording systems are also
available. These include dual recording of the
same file to two cards, and using REC/STBY to
break up video clips in one card while performing
backup recording to the other card.
Diverse Simultaneous Recording
Combinations (HD and SD, HD and
Proxy Video, etc.) a
This camera recorder comes with a convenient
proxy
video (960x540p, 480x270p MOV) recording
function for distribution over the network.
With the Dual Rec feature further enhanced, you
can now record videos in the HD quality on one
SDHC/SDXC card, while at the same time record
to the other card in the SD or proxy video quality.
Variable Frame Rec
Enables beautiful slow motion and quick motion
image recording such as overcrank and
undercrank.
SDI/HDMI Simultaneous Output
Equipped with both [HD/SD SDI] and [HDMI]
terminals as digital output.
Non-compressed full HD video signals and audio
signals can be output to the
[HD/SD SDI] and
[HDMI] terminals at the same time.
13
Introduction
Auto Focus/Optical Image Stabilizer
The camera recorder is equipped with a face
detection
auto focus function that covers the entire
screen.
It can switch to manual focus as well.
A built-in optical image stabilizer feature is also
available.
Professional Switch Layout and Various
Video Parameter Settings
Switches for Gain and White Balance are available
on the side panel to enable quick switching
according to the shooting scene.
Image parameters such as gamma and color
matrixes are also available in the menu for
adjusting preferred tones.
4-position ND Filter
This camera recorder incorporates three types of
ND filters.
Adjust the amount of light according to the
brightness during shooting by switching the 4-
position ND filter (OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64).
0.45-inch 1.22M Pixel Color Viewfinder,
3.5-inch 920K Pixel LCD Display
(Equipped with Focus Assist Function)
Built-in Stereo Microphone, 2-channel
XLR Audio Input (Microphone/Line
Switch, Phantom Power Supply) and
Mini Jack Input Terminal for Wireless
Microphone Receiver
This camera recorder is equipped with high-
performance analog circuits. With the wide
dynamic range, soft sounds and loud sounds can
be recorded without distortion compared to
previous models.
Pre Rec Function (Up to 15 Seconds)
and Interval Rec Function
Supports Wired Remote Control
35 Mbps High-quality Recording Mode
This camera recorder is equipped with a 35 Mbps
mode for the MPEG-2 (MOV, MP4, MXF) and H.
264
(MOV) file formats to support recording in high
image quality.
50 Mbps High-quality Recording Mode
This camera recorder comes with a 50 Mbps mode
in the H.264 format (1920x1080: MOV) to support
high-resolution video recording.
Built-in GPS a
This camera recorder is equipped with a GPS
function. Position information obtained from the
GPS
satellite can be recorded as metadata during
shooting.
Diverse Network Functions a
This camera recorder supports various operations
from
a network connected device, such as remote
control, viewing, editing of metadata, file transfer to
FTP server, and live streaming.
Also, with the “Zixi” cloud service supported, which
enables highly-reliable and stable data
transmission, “SMPTE ST2022-1/2” and “RTMP”
live streaming are possible.
Application Software Provided
The [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] application
software
is provided for you to copy recorded clips
to Windows or Macintosh computers and for
checking the video images. (For MP4 file format)
The disc provided with this camera recorder
comes with [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] and other
application software as well as their user guides.
* For details, refer to the user guides for each
application software.
14
Introduction
Precautions for Proper
Use
Storage and Usage Locations
o
Allowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use this unit within the allowable
temperature range of 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to
104°F) and a relative humidity of 30 % to 80 %.
Using this unit at a temperature or humidity
outside the allowable ranges could result not
only in malfunction but also serious impact on
the CMOS elements as small white spots may
be
generated. Please exercise care during use.
o
Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or
the colors may be incorrect if this unit is used
near a radio or television transmitting antenna,
in places where strong magnetic fields are
generated by transformers, motors, etc., or near
devices emitting radio waves, such as
transceivers or cellular phones.
o
Use of wireless microphone near this unit
When a wireless microphone or wireless
microphone tuner is used near this unit during
recording, the tuner could pick up noise.
o
Avoid using or placing this unit in the following
places.
0
Places subject to extreme heat or cold
0
Places with excessive dirt or dust
0
Places with high humidity or moisture
0
Places subject to smoke or vapor such as near
a cooking stove
0
Places subject to strong vibrations or unstable
surfaces
0
In a parked car under direct sunlight or near a
heater for long hours
o
Do not place this unit at places that are subject
to
radiation or X-rays, or where corrosive gases
occur.
o
Protect this unit from being splashed with water.
(Especially when shooting in the rain)
o
Protect this unit from getting wet when shooting
on a beach. In addition, salt and sand may
adhere to the body. Be sure to clean the unit after
use.
o
Protect this unit against penetration of dust
when using it in a place subject to sandy dust.
Transportation
o
Do
not drop or hit this unit against a hard object
when transporting.
Power Saving
o
When this unit is not in use, be sure to set the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)
] switch to
“OFF(CHG)” in order to reduce power
consumption.
Maintenance
o
Turn off the power before performing any
maintenance.
o
Wipe the external cabinet of the unit with a soft
cloth. Do not wipe the body with benzene or
thinner.
Doing so may cause the surface to melt
or turn cloudy. When it is extremely dirty, soak
the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent, wipe
the body with it, and then use a clean cloth to
remove the detergent.
Rechargeable Battery
o
Be sure to use only the specified batteries.
We do not guarantee the safety and
performance of this device if an unspecified
battery is used.
o
For details, refer to the “INSTRUCTIONS” of the
battery.
o
ATTENTION:
The product you have purchased
is powered by a rechargeable
battery that is recyclable.
Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for
information on how to recycle this
battery.
Regular Inspection (Maintenance)
o
Under normal environment, dust will
accumulate on the camera recorder when it is
used over a long period. Dust may enter the
camera
recorder especially if it is used outdoors.
This may affect the image and sound quality of
the camera recorder. Check and replace the fan
after every 9000 hours (suggested guideline).
You can check the usage time of the fan in
[System] B [System Information] B [Fan Hour].
(A P117 [ Fan Hour ] )
If the fan is used for more than 9000 hours
without replacement, “Fan Maintenance
Required” will be displayed every time you turn
on the power.
Encryption in Network Connection a
o
Wireless LAN connections make use of an
encryption function.
This encryption is designed for commercially-
sold equipment, and it cannot be altered.
15
Introduction
SDHC/SDXC Cards
o
SDHC/SDXC card is referred to as SD card in
this manual.
o
This camera recorder saves the recorded
images and audio sound on the SD card (sold
separately) in the card slot.
o
If
the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded. In
addition, the remaining space on the card may
not increase even when files are deleted using
a PC.
o
For details on the combinations of usable SD
card and format setting, refer to the following.
(A P39 [Usable Cards] )
* Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
Handling of SD Cards
o
The status indicator lights up in red when data
on the SD card is being accessed.
Do not remove the SD card during data access
(such
as recording, playback, or formatting). Do
not turn off the power or remove the battery and
AC adapter during access either.
o
Do not use or store the SD card in a place that
is subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
o
Do not place the SD card near locations that are
exposed to strong magnetic fields or radio
waves.
o
Inserting the SD card incorrectly may result in
damage of this unit or the SD card.
o
We are not liable for any accidental loss of data
stored on the SD card. Please back up any
important data.
o
Make use of the SD card within the prescribed
conditions of use.
Do not use it at the following locations.
Places that are subject to direct sunlight, high
humidity or corrosion, places near thermal
equipment, sandy or dusty places, or in a car
under the sun with the doors and windows
closed.
o
Do not bend or drop the SD card, or subject it to
strong impact or vibration.
o
Do not splash the SD card with water.
o
Do not dismantle or modify the SD card.
o
Do not touch the terminals with your hands or
with a metal object.
o
Do not allow dust, dirt, water, or foreign objects
to adhere to the terminals.
o
Do
not remove the labels or stick other labels or
stickers on the SD cards.
o
Do not use pencils or ballpoint pens to write on
the SD cards. Always use oil-based pens.
o
If you format (initialize) the SD card, all data
recorded on the card, including video data and
setup files, will be deleted.
o
You are recommended to use cards that are
formatted (initialized) on this camera recorder.
0
The SD card may be damaged if the camera
recorder is not operated correctly. Formatting
(Initializing) the SD card may allow it to operate
correctly.
0
SD cards that have been formatted (initialized)
on other cameras, computers or peripheral
equipment may not operate correctly. In this
case, format (initialize) the SD card on this
camera recorder.
o
If you want to wipe out all information by
completely erasing the data, we recommend
either using commercially available software
that is specially designed for that purpose, or by
physically destroying the SD card with a
hammer, etc. When formatting or erasing data
using the camera recorder, only the file
administration information is changed. The data
is not completely erased from the SD card.
o
Some commercially available SD cards may be
harder to be removed from this unit. Remove
them by hooking onto the groove on the cards.
0
It will be easier to remove the cards after several
times.
0
Do not stick any stickers on the cards.
.
Groove
o
The SD card may pop out when it is being
removed. Be careful not to lose the card.
GPS a
o
The GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites
are managed by the Department of State of the
U.S., and its precision may be altered
intentionally.
o
Perform
positioning at an unobstructed location
with a clear view that is not indoors or blocked
by trees.
o
The time needed for obtaining the position
information may be longer and variation may
also be larger depending on the surrounding
environment and time of day.
o
This camera recorder uses the WGS 84 World
Geodetic System.
o
Signal from GPS satellites may be interrupted by
communication signal from electronic devices
such as mobile phones.
16
Introduction
LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
o
The LCD monitor and viewfinder screen are
manufactured using high-precision technology.
Black
spots may appear on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen, or red, blue, and/or white
spots may not disappear. However, this is not a
malfunction and these spots are not recorded on
the SD card.
o
If you use this unit continuously for a long period
of time, the characters displayed in the
viewfinder may temporarily remain on the
screen. This is not recorded on the SD card.
They will not appear after you turn the power off
and then on again.
o
If you use this unit in a cold place, the images
may appear to lag on the screen, but this is not
a malfunction. Retained images are not
recorded on the SD card.
o
Do not press against the surface with force or
subject it to strong impact. Doing so may
damage or break the screens.
o
Noise may appear in the viewfinder when
switching between the live video and playback
images.
o
Due to the characteristic of the viewfinder
display device, colors may appear on the
images when you blink your eyes. It does not
affect the recorded images, SDI output, or HDMI
output.
License Notices
o
MPEG LA AVC
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR
OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT
RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE
AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
o
MPEG LA MPEG-2 Patent
ANY USE OF THIS UNIT IN ANY MANNER
OTHER THAN PERSONAL USE THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD
FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY
PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, LLC, 6312 S.
WHICH
LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG
LA, LLC, 6312 S. Fiddlers Green circle, Suite
400E, Greenwood Village, Colorado 80111
U.S.A.
Copyright
o
Any recordings made on this camera recorder
that are played back for profit or public preview
may infringe on the rights of the owner of the
recordings.
Do not use the recordings for purpose other than
personal enjoyment without prior consent from
the owner.
Others
o
Do not insert objects other than the memory card
into the card slot.
o
Do not block the vent on the unit.
Blocking of the vent causes internal heating and
may lead to burns and fires.
o
Do not turn off the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]
switch or remove the power cable during
recording or playback.
o
The camera recorder may not show stable
pictures
for a few seconds immediately after the
power is turned on, but this is not a malfunction.
o
When the video signal output terminals are not
in use, put on the covers to prevent damage to
the terminals.
o
Do not drop this unit or subject it to strong impact
or vibration as it is a precision equipment.
o
Optical performance of lens
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color
divergence phenomena (magnification
chromatic aberration) may occur at the
periphery of the image. This is not a camera
malfunction.
o
Noise may appear in the image when switching
modes.
o
If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will
deteriorate.
o
Use the supplied AC adapter as the power
supply. Do not use the supplied AC adapter on
other devices.
o
When
the connectors that come with connector
covers are not in use, put on the covers to
prevent damage to the connectors.
o
This camera recorder makes use of fonts by
Fontworks Inc.
o
This
camera recorder makes use of M+FONTS.
17
Introduction
Operation Modes
This camera recorder has four operation modes - Camera mode, Media mode, USB mode and Remote
Edit mode.
.
MODE
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
FOCUS ASSIST/1 OIS / 2 LOLUX / 3
CANCEL
TIME CODE
Playback
Button
Trimming Playback
Normal Playback
[CANCEL]/[MENU/THUMB] Button
FTP in Progress FTP in Progress
Exit FTP
Operation
(Successful)
Camera Input
*
* Selecting a mode other than the Metadata Edit mode via the web browser,
or selecting [Exit] on the [Remote Edit Mode] screen
Upon access via a web browser and selecting [Change] on the
[Change to Remote Edit Mode?] screen on the camera or the web browser
Connection to PC with
USB Cable
Press and hold [MODE]
[MODE]
Button
Press and hold [MODE]
[MODE] Button
Execute [FTP Upload]
Exit/Cancel FTP Operation (Successful/Failed/Stopped)
(Actions)
Execute [Delete Clips]
File Deletion in Progress
Exit/Cancel File Delete Operation (Successful/Failed/Stopped)
Trimming in Progress
Exit Trimming Operation
(Successful/Failed/Stopped)
[LOLUX/3] Button
Execute
[Trim This Clip]
Media Mode
Thumbnail Display
USB Connection (When the confirmation to change
to USB mode appears and [Change] is selected)
(USB Mass Storage Class)
USB Mode
Playback
Button
Connection disabled on PC
Camera Mode
Remote Edit Mode
Playback
GY-HM660 only
18
Introduction
Operation Mode Description
Camera Mode
0
This
is the camera shooting mode. The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode
when the power is turned on.
0
Camera images are output on the viewfinder and LCD monitor. When a recordable
SD card is inserted, the camera recorder enters the recording standby mode.
“STBY” appears on the operation mode display area of the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
0
Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.
Memo :
0
Playback
of SD card is not possible in Camera mode. However, you can check the
most recently recorded video clip.
(A P74 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review)] )
Media Mode
0
This mode allows you to play back or delete clips recorded on the SD card.
0
When
a playable SD card is inserted, the thumbnail or playback screen is displayed
on the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
0
Press the [MODE] selection button to enter Media mode when you are not shooting
in Camera mode. Once the camera recorder is in Media mode, thumbnails of the
selected media slot are displayed.
USB Mode
0
This mode allows you to connect to a PC and transfer the files on an SD card to
the PC.
0
When
the camera recorder is connected to a USB cable, the message “Change to
USB Mode?” appears.
Select [Change] and press the Set button to switch to USB mode.
(A
P145 [Loading Clips to the PC] )
0
In USB mode, the camera recorder is recognized by the connected PC as a
peripheral drive. (USB mass storage class only)
Disable the connection on the PC and remove the USB cable from the camera
recorder to switch to Camera mode.
(A P145 [Loading Clips to the PC] )
Memo :
0
When a USB cable is connected during recording, the message appears after
recording stops.
0
If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed
automatically, such as when playback stops.
0
Files on the PC cannot be written to the SD card.
Remote Edit
Mode a
0
This mode enables the list display and editing of the recorded clip data through
access to the clip list display page via a web browser on a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
0
When you access via a web browser on a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC,
“It
is necessary to change the camera mode to "Remote Edit Mode". Change the
mode.” appears on the web browser. Also, “Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is
displayed on the display screen of the camera unit.
Selecting [Change] on the camera recorder and pressing the Set button switches
to the Remote Edit mode, and enables display of the clip list and editing of the clip
metadata.
(A P
160 [ Clip Metadata ] )
(A P162 [Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser a] )
Memo :
0
If
you access via a web browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,
or PC while recording is in progress, the message appears after recording stops.
0
If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed
automatically, such as when playback stops.
19
Introduction
Names of Parts
.
SERVO MANUAL
ZOOM
REC
H
E
IJ
G
DACB
K
F
FIX VAR OFF
FOCUS ASSIST/1
OIS/2
LOLUX/3
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
FOCUS
ND FILTER
1/64
1/1
6
1/4
OFF
POWER
MARKER/6
ZEBRA/5
AE LOCK/4
SHUTTER
WHT BAL
CANCEL
PUSH
AU
TO
IRIS
GAIN
FULL AUTO
PUSH AUTO
PRESET
B
L
M
H
A
ON
OFF
ON
MANU
∞
MODE
OFF
(CHG)
SLOT
A/B
TIME CODE
AUTO
Bottom
A
Built-in Microphone
(A P
63 [Audio Recording] )
B
Tally Lamp
(A P38 [Tally Lamp] )
(A P181 [Blinking of the Tally Lamp] )
C
Microphone Holder
(A P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
D
Microphone Holder Lock Knob
(A P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
E
Shoe
For mounting separately sold lights and
accessories.
F
[FIX/VAR/OFF] Zoom Speed Switch
(A P48 [Zoom Operation] )
For switching the zoom speed of the zoom lever
a at the handle.
G
Accessory Mounting Screw Hole
H
Tripod Mounting Hole
(A P27 [Attaching the Tripod] )
I
[REC] Record Trigger Button
Starts/stops recording.
You can also change its function in the menu.
(A P100 [ Front REC ] )
Memo :
0
This button is interlocked with the [REC] button
R on
the grip and the [REC/HOLD] button Z at
the top of the handle.
J
[ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL
] Zoom Operation
Servo/Manual Switch
Set to “SERVO” when using the zoom lever at
the grip j or the zoom lever at the handle a.
(A P48 [Zoom Operation] )
K
Monitor Speaker
(A P88 [Audio Output during Playback] )
L
Viewfinder
(A P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
M
Visibility Adjustment Lever
(A P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
N
Eyecup
Prevents external light from entering the
viewfinder screen and cameraman’s vision.
(A P27 [Attaching the Large Eyecup] )
O
Battery
(A P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )
P
[x] Headphone Jack (Φ3.5 mm)
(A P65 [Monitoring Audio Sound During
Recording Using a Headphone] )
Q
[AUX] AUX Input Terminal (Φ3.5 mm)
For connecting to receiver such as wireless
microphone.
20
Introduction
.
AUX
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVICE
AV
A
BATT.RELEASE
POWER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
REC
HOST
W
T
REC
HOLD
IN
OUT
TC
L
M
N
O
d
R
S T
X
Za
b
c
Q
P
U
V
Y
W
R
[REC] Record Trigger Button
Starts/stops recording.
Memo :
0
This button is interlocked with the
[REC] button
I at the bottom of the lens and the [REC/
HOLD] button Z at the top of the handle.
S
[C.REVIEW/7
] Clip Review/User 7 Button
For checking the most recently captured
images.
(A P74 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
T
Zoom Lever at the Grip
To operate zoom servo with the zoom lever at
the grip, set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL]
switch 0 to “SERVO”.
(A P48 [Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip] )
U
[TC] TC Input/Output Terminal
(A P66 [Time Code and User’s Bit] )
V
[IN/OUT] TC IN/OUT Selection Switch
(A P70 [Synchronizing Time Code on
Another Camera] )
W
Hood Release Button
(A P28 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )
X
External Microphone Cable Clamp
(A P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
Y
[
INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Terminal 1, 2
(XLR 3-pin x 2)
(A P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
Z
[REC/HOLD] Record Trigger Button/Lock
Switch
Starts/stops recording.
Set the switch to [HOLD] to lock the [REC]
Trigger button.
Memo :
0
This button is interlocked with the [REC] button
R on the grip and the [REC] button I at the
bottom of the lens.
0
The [REC] button R on the grip and the [REC]
button I at the bottom of the lens will not be
locked.
a
Zoom lever at the Handle
(A P48 [Using the Zoom Lever at the
Handle] )
b
Shoulder Belt Mount (x2)
For mounting a shoulder belt (sold separately).
Caution :
0
Be sure to use a shoulder belt with the strength
to
withstand the weight of this camera recorder.
0
If the shoulder belt is not properly attached, the
camera recorder may fall and cause injuries.
Check the instruction manual provided with the
shoulder belt before using.
c
[POWER/CHG] Power/Charging Display Lamp
(A P
28 [Using a Battery Pack] )
d
[BATT. RELEASE] Battery Lock Release Button
(A P29 [Removing the Battery] )
21
Introduction
Side Control Panel
.
ND FILTER FOCUS
AE LEVEL
MANU
PUSH AUTO
MENU/THUMB
FOCUS ASSIST/1 OIS / 2 LOLUX / 3
1/64
1/16
1/4
OFF
PRESET
IRIS
GAIN
CANCEL
L
M
H
B
A
WHT BAL SHUTTER
FULL AUTO
MODE
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
ON
OFF
AE LOCK/4 ZEBRA/5 MARKER/6
PUSH AUTO
TIME CODE
AUTO
A
B
C
E
S R Q
O
N
MLKJ
T
D
P
H
I
U
F G
A
[FOCUS AUTO/MANU/
∞] Focus Switch
(A P49 [Focus Operation] )
B
[ND FILTER] ND Filter Switch
(A P58 [Setting the ND Filter] )
C
[PUSH AUTO] Focus Push Auto Button
(A P50 [One Push Auto Focus] )
D
[IRIS] Iris Auto/Manual Selection Button
(A P54 [Adjusting the Iris] )
E
[PUSH AUTO] Iris Push Auto Button
(A P54 [Adjusting the Iris] )
F
[GAIN] Gain Auto/Manual Selection Button / [L/
M/H] Sensitivity Selection Switch
(A P55 [Setting the Gain] )
G
[WHT BAL] White Balance Auto/Manual
Selection Button / [B/A/PRESET] Selection
Switch
(A P59 [Adjusting the White Balance] )
H
[SHUTTER] Shutter Speed Auto/Manual
Selection Button
(A P56 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
I
[y] One Push Auto White Balance Button
J
[FULL AUTO ON/OFF] Full Auto Switch
(A P53 [Adjusting the Brightness
Automatically] )
(A P61 [Automatic White Balance Mode
(FAW: Fulltime Auto White balance)] )
K
[AE LOCK/4] AE Lock/User 4 Button
When Gain, Iris, and Shutter are set to “AUTO”,
their respective values and the value of white
balance are locked when the [AE LOCK/4] button
is pressed.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
L
[ZEBRA/5]
Zebra/User 5 Button
(A P71 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
M
[MARKER/6] Marker/User 6 Button
This button toggles ON/OFF the marker, safety
zone, and center mark displays.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
N
[MODE] Camera/Media Mode Selection Button
(A P18 [Operation Modes] )
O
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] Lock Power ON/OFF
Switch
Turns ON/OFF the power.
0
Hold
down the lock button (blue) in the center
to toggle ON/OFF.
0
When the power is turning OFF, “P.OFF”
appears on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
0
Wait for 5 seconds or more to turn on the
power again.
P
Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button (R)
The function changes according to the
operation status of the camera recorder.
o
During menu operation (all modes)
(A P94 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Set Button (R)
:
Confirms menu items
and setting values
Cross-shaped Button
(JK)
:
Selects menu items
and setting values
o During Camera mode
Shutter operation:
Set Button (R)
:
Shutter ON/OFF
Cross-shaped Button
(JK)
:
Switches shutter
speed when shutter
is ON
Cross-Shaped Button
(HI)
:
AE level operation
Memo :
0
When [
Camera Function] B [AE LEVEL SW] is
set to “AE LEVEL/VFR”, the cross-shaped
button (HI) is used to set the number of frames
during Variable Frame Rec.
(A P
84 [Variable Frame Rec] )
(A P99 [ AE LEVEL SW ] )
Q
[LOLUX/3] Low-light Shooting/User 3 Button
For switching the low-light shooting mode ON
or OFF.
You
can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
22
Introduction
R
[OIS/2]
Optical Image Stabilizer/User 2 Button
For switching the image stabilizer feature mode
ON or OFF.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
S
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Focus Assist/User 1 Button
For switching the focus assist function ON or
OFF.
(A P51 [Focus Assist Function] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
T
[MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button
0
Displays the menu screen during Camera
mode.
0
Switches between [Main Menu
] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [MENU/
THUMB] button is pressed and held down
while the menu screen is displayed.
(A P
94 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
0
Displays the menu screen when the button
is pressed during thumbnail display in the
Media mode.
0
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail
screen when the button is pressed during
playback screen display in the Media mode.
U
[CANCEL
] Cancel Button
Cancels various settings and stops playback.
SD Slot
(A P
39 [SD Card] )
.
A
B
C
D
A
SD Card Cover
B
[SLOT A/B] Card Slot Selection Button
For switching the active card slot during
shooting and playback.
C
Card Slot B Status Indicator
D
Card Slot A Status Indicator
Rear Terminal
.
DEVICE
AV
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
POWER
/CHG
BATT .RELEASE
A
B
OPEN
CLOSE
HOST
AV
DEVICE
HOST
DC
REMOTE
C
D
B
A
E
F
G
A
[DEVICE] USB Mini Terminal
(A P145 [Loading Clips to the PC] )
B
[AV] AV Output Terminal
(A P146 [Connecting External Monitor] )
C
[HD/SD SDI] SDI Output Terminal (BNC)
(A P146 [Connecting External Monitor] )
D
[HDMI] HDMI Output Terminal
(A P146 [Connecting External Monitor] )
E
[HOST] USB Host Terminal a
For connecting an USB adapter according to
the intended purpose when you are connecting
the unit to a network.
(A P150 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
F
[REMOTE] Remote Terminal
(A P148 [Connecting Wired Remote Control] )
G
[DC] DC Input Terminal
Input terminal for DC 12 V power supply. For
connecting with the supplied AC adapter.
(A P30 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )
23
Introduction
LCD Monitor
.
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
CH1
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
AUTO
MANUAL
CH2
INPUT2
MONITOR
DISPLAY STATUS
INPUT1
PEAKINGLCD BRIGHT
CH2CH1
LINE
MIC
MIC
+48V
CH1
BOTH
CH2
B
C
H I
A
D
FG
E
JKL
N
M
A
LCD Monitor
(A P
36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
B
[MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button
0
Displays the menu screen during Camera
mode.
0
Switches between [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [MENU/
THUMB] button is pressed and held down
while the menu screen is displayed.
(A P
94 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
0
Displays the menu screen when the button
is pressed during thumbnail display in the
Media mode.
0
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail
screen when the button is pressed during
playback screen display in the Media mode.
C
LCD
Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button
(R)
The function changes according to the
operation status of the camera recorder.
0
During menu operation (all modes)
(A P94 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Set Button (R) : Confirms menu
items and setting
values
Cross-shaped Button
(JK)
: Selects menu
items and setting
values
0
During Camera mode
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(A
P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
D
[CANCEL] Cancel Button
Cancels various settings and stops playback.
E
[CH1/CH2] CH1/CH2 Recording Level
Adjustment Knob
(A P63 [Audio Recording] )
F
[LCD BRIGHT +/-
] LCD Display Brightness
Adjustment Button
(A P36 [Adjusting the Brightness] )
G
[PEAKING +/-] LCD/VF Contour Adjustment
Button
(A P37 [Adjusting the Contour (LCD)] )
(A P37 [Adjusting the Contour (Viewfinder)] )
H
[DISPLAY] Display Button
0
Press the [DISPLAY
] button to switch to the
display screen during normal screen display
(when the menu screen is not displayed).
(A P
34 [Display Screen] )
0
Switches between [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [DISPLAY]
button is pressed while the menu screen is
displayed.
(A P
94 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
I
[STATUS] Status Screen Display Button
Press the [STATUS] button to display the status
screen on the viewfinder and LCD monitor
during normal screen display (when the menu
screen is not displayed).
(A P35 [Status Screen] )
J
[MONITOR]/[+/-] Audio Monitor Selection
Switch/Volume Adjustment Button
Switches the audio monitor and adjusts the
monitor speaker/headphone.
(A P65 [Monitoring Audio Sound During
Recording Using a Headphone] )
K
[INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Signal Selection
Switch
(A P63 [Audio Recording] )
L
[CH2] CH2 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
Select the audio input terminal to record to CH2.
(A P63 [Audio Recording] )
M
[CH1] CH1 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
(A P63 [Audio Recording] )
N
[CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] CH1/CH2 Audio
Recording Mode Switch
(A P64 [Adjusting Audio Recording Level] )
24
Introduction
Lens Section
.
E
CD
A
B
A
Filter Built-In Screw
0
Transparent or UV filter for lens protection,
or filters for various effects can be installed.
0
Installable filter types:
Φ72mmP0.75
Memo :
0
Remove
the lens hood when installing the filter.
(A P28 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )
B
Lens Cover Open/Close Switch
(A P28
[Opening/Closing the Lens Cover] )
C
Focus Ring
(A P49 [Focus Operation] )
D
Zoom Ring
(A P48 [Zoom Operation] )
To operate zoom with this ring, set the [ZOOM
SERVO/MANUAL] switch to “MANUAL”.
E
Iris Ring
(A P54 [Adjusting the Iris] )
To operate auto iris, press the [IRIS] button on
the side control panel.
(a mark appears on the screen)
25
Introduction
Basic System Diagram
.
Wireless Microphone Receiver
RCA pin
AV Cable
HDMI Cable
Carrying Case
Tripod
SDHC/SDXC
Memory Card
SDHC/SDXC
Card Reader
USB Cable
Battery
AC Adapter
Remote Control Unit
Non-linear Editing
System
GY-HM660/GY-HM620
Microphone
Monitor
Monitor
SDI Cable BNC
Earphone
Shoulder Belt
GY-HM660/GY-HM620
Network Adapter
GY-HM660 only
Standard Package
[HOST][AUX]
[INPUT1]/
[INPUT2]
[TC]
[SDI OUT]
[HDMI]
[AV]
[x]
26
Introduction
Settings and Adjustments
Before Use
.
Adjusting the Grip Belt
Open the pad and adjust the position of the grip belt
accordingly.
.
AUX
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVICE
AV
A
BAT
T.RELEA
SE
POWER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
REC
HOST
Caution :
0
If
the grip is loose, the camera recorder may fall
off resulting in injuries or malfunction.
Attaching an External Microphone
You can attach a separately sold microphone to the
microphone holder.
.
4
5
1, 3
2
1
Turn the knob on the microphone holder
counterclockwise to loosen and open the
microphone holder.
2
Place the microphone in the microphone
holder.
3
Turn the knob on the microphone holder
clockwise to secure the microphone.
4
Connect the microphone cable to the
[INPUT1]
or [INPUT2] terminal.
5
Pin the microphone cable to the clamp.
6
Perform the settings for the microphone
correctly.
(A P
63 [Audio Recording] )
Attaching the Tripod
Use the screw hole at the bottom of this camera
recorder.
(3/8×16UNC, 1/4×20UNC)
Use the screw hole that suits the tripod.
To prevent the camera recorder from falling off,
which may result in injuries or damages, read the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the tripod to be used and
make sure that it is securely attached.
.
o Bottom
Caution :
0
If the camera recorder exceeds the weight limit
of the tripod, do not mount it on the tripod.
0
Use the tripod on a stable surface.
0
To prevent the camera recorder from falling,
attach securely using the rotation prevention
hole.
0
Use
screws with screw length 5 mm and below.
Attaching the Large Eyecup
0
Attach the large eyecup (supplied) to prevent
external light from entering the viewfinder
screen and cameraman’s vision.
0
Align and attach to the groove of the eyecup
mounted on the camera recorder.
0
The large eyecup can be attached in any
direction.
.
Large Eyecup (supplied)
Eyecup
Memo :
0
Do not remove the eyecup that is premounted
on the camera recorder.
27
Preparations
Opening/Closing the Lens Cover
Use the lens cover open/close switch to open or
close the lens cover.
Before shooting, open the lens cover.
When
this camera recorder is not in use, close the
lens cover to protect the lens.
.
Caution :
0
Do not press against the lens cover with force.
Doing so may damage the lens or the cover.
Attaching/Detaching the Hood
Attaching the Hood
Align the markings on the camera recorder and
hood;
turn the hood in the direction of the arrow until
it is locked.
.
Detaching the Hood
0
Remove the hood when attaching a filter,
teleconverter
or wide converter to the front of the
lens.
0
While pressing the hood release button, turn the
hood in the direction of the arrow (anti-
clockwise) to remove it.
.
Power Supply
To use this camera recorder, you can attach a
battery pack or connect an AC adapter to it.
(A P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )
(A P30 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )
Caution :
0
Set the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to
“OFF(CHG)” before changing the power supply
that operates this camera recorder.
Using a Battery Pack
Charging the Battery
Charge the battery immediately after purchase or
when the battery power is running low.
*
The battery is not charged when purchased.
.
1
2
3
4
4
POWER
/CHG
MODE
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
28
Preparations
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.
2
Attach the supplied battery.
Slide it in until you hear a click.
3
Connect the supplied AC adapter to the
[DC]
terminal.
Open the cover of the [DC]
terminal and connect
as shown in the diagram.
4
Connect the AC adapter to a power outlet.
0
The [POWER/CHG] lamp blinks during
charging and will go out after charging is
complete.
0
Remove the AC adapter after charging is
complete.
Memo :
0
Blinking of the [POWER/CHG] lamp during
charging indicates the charge level.
[POWER/CHG] Lamp
Charge Level
Orange blinking
(4 times per second)
Less than 25 %
Orange blinking
(3 times per second)
Less than 50 %
Orange blinking
(2 times per second)
Less than 75 %
Orange blinking
(1 time per second)
Less than 100 %
Light goes out Fully charged
0
You can charge the battery even when operating
the camera recorder using the AC adapter.
Removing the Battery
.
1
2
MODE
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.
2
While pressing and holding the [BATT.
RELEASE
] button, push up and remove the
battery in the direction of the arrow.
Caution :
0
Do not remove the battery when the [POWER
ON/OFF(CHG)
] switch is “ON”.
0
Do not insert or remove the DC cable when the
battery is in use.
0
Leaving the camera recorder unused with the
battery inside will deplete the battery power
even if you set the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]
switch to “OFF(CHG)”. Remove the battery if
you are not using the camera recorder.
Estimated Charging and Continuous
Operating Times
o Charging Time (supplied SSL-JVC50 battery
pack)
Approx. 4 hrs
* When the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is set
to “OFF(CHG)”
Memo :
0
If
you charge the battery immediately after using
while the battery is still warm, it may not be fully
charged.
0
For details, refer to the “INSTRUCTIONS” of the
battery.
o Continuous Operating Time (supplied SSL-
JVC50 battery pack)
Approx. 3 hrs a
Approx. 3 hrs 20 mins b
Memo :
0
Actual
operating times may differ depending on
the age of the battery, charging condition, and
operating environment.
0
Operating time is shortened in cold
environment.
0
The operating time may shorten when power
zoom is used, accessories are connected, or
when the LCD monitor is frequently used.
0
For purchase of spare batteries and battery
charger,
please contact the local dealers in your
area.
Precautions for Batteries
0
Store the battery in a cool and dry place when
not in use. Do not expose the battery to high
temperatures (such as in a car under direct
sunlight). Failure to do so not only shortens the
battery life but also damages the battery.
0
If the operating time shortens drastically even
after charging, the battery may be reaching the
end of its life. Replace the battery with a new
one.
29
Preparations
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)
Use the supplied AC adapter to operate the camera
recorder with AC power.
.
1
MODE
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
2
1
Connect the DC cable of the AC adapter to
the [DC]
terminal of the camera recorder.
0
Check that the power switch of the camera
recorder is set to “OFF(CHG)
”.
0
Open the cover of the [
DC] terminal and
connect as shown in the diagram.
2
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “ON”.
Power will be supplied to the camera recorder.
Caution :
0
Do not insert or remove the DC cable during
recording.
0
Do not use power supply of high voltage
fluctuation, containing noise such as ripple, or
with insufficient capacity.
Charging the Built-In Battery
0
The date/time and time code data are stored
using the built-in rechargeable battery.
0
When power is connected to the camera
recorder, the built-in battery always gets
charged. When the power is disconnected, the
battery gradually discharges.
0
The battery will be totally discharged if left
unused
for 3 months and the date/time and time
code data will be reset. When this happens, set
the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “ON” to
display the [Initial Setting] screen, then set the
date/time.
(A P32
[Initial Settings] )
Power Status Display
Viewfinder Screen and LCD Monitor
The power status is displayed on the display and
menu screens.
Display Description
B 7.4V
B 100min
C 30%
4 RES
Currently powered by a battery.
When the battery power runs out,
the battery mark appears hollow,
and “RES” (yellow) is displayed.
Memo :
0
You can set the display using
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings
]
B [Battery].
(A
P111 [ Battery ] )
F
Acquisition of battery information
may fail if a genuine battery is not
used.
T
An error has occurred during
battery charging; the charging
function
is not working or charging
has been interrupted.
Memo :
0
If
the error appears, turn off the
power and remove the battery
then reinsert the battery and
turn the power on again.
G
Currently powered by an AC
adapter.
P
Q
R
S
Camera recorder battery charging
in progress.
(A P
111 [Details on charging
condition] )
Memo :
0
If
the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold
separately) is not used, the battery mark which
indicates the battery level may not appear.
0
Operating a device connected to the [HOST]
terminal may disable the charging function. a
Display Screen
(A P131 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
(A P136 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )
.
100min
50min
282min
P13000K
1/100
F1.6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 : 56
Jan 1 2,2016
00: 00:00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20 10 0
30
Preparations
Menu Screen
(A P
95 [Display and Description of the Menu
Screen] )
.
Warnings by Lamp and Warning Tone
Warning status is indicated by tally lamp and
warning tone.
0
The tally lamp blinks.
0
The warning tone is output from the monitor
speaker or [x] terminal.
Memo :
0
You can specify whether to turn on the warning
tone
as well as setting the volume in [A/V Set] B
[Audio Set] B [Alarm Level].
(A P115
[ Alarm Level ] )
0
If
you continue to use the camera recorder while
the power warning is displayed, the camera
recorder will stop automatically when the battery
or supplied voltage from the AC adapter
becomes lower.
Caution :
0
The remaining battery power and time are
displayed as they are from the battery
information.
Accurate data may not be displayed
depending on the battery condition. Replace the
battery as soon as possible when the remaining
battery power and time are low.
Turning On/Off the Power
Turning On the Power
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “ON”.
The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode
and is ready for shooting.
Memo :
0
The
camera recorder always start up in Camera
mode when the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]
switch is set to “ON”. Use the [MODE] button at
the side of the camera recorder to switch mode.
(A P
18 [Operation Modes] )
.
MODE
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
Turning Off the Power
Sets the camera recorder to the recording standby
or stop mode.
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.
2
Remove the battery and the power to the
[DC]
terminal (when not in use for a long
time).
Auto Power Off function
When [System] B [Auto Power Off] is set to
“On”,
the power turns off automatically when the camera
recorder is not operated for 5 minutes or longer
while running on battery.
(A P116 [ Auto Power Off ] )
Memo :
0
When both the battery and AC adapter are
connected, power from the AC adapter
connection will be used. As such, the
[Auto
Power Off] function will not have any effect.
Caution :
0
Do not set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)
] switch
to “OFF(CHG)” during recording. Check that the
operation mode display is “STBY” or “STOP”
before you turn off the power.
0
If you have mistakenly set the
[POWER ON/
OFF(CHG)] switch to “OFF(CHG)” during
recording, wait for 5 seconds or more before you
turn on the power again.
0
When turning off the power, first set the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)
] switch of the camera
recorder to “OFF(CHG)”. Do not remove the
battery or turn off the AC power while the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is set to “ON”.
31
Preparations
Initial Settings
When
the power is first turned on, the Initial Setting
screen for performing the initial settings in the
camera recorder appears.
Set the date/time of the built-in clock in the [Initial
Setting] screen.
All operations are disabled until initial settings are
complete.
.
MODE
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
Memo :
0
It
is recommended to use the AC adapter as the
power supply.
0
Be sure to close the lens cover.
1
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “ON”.
A language selection screen appears.
0
For U models
.
0
For E models
.
Memo :
0
The menus and messages on the screen of the
LCD monitor or viewfinder are displayed in the
selected language.
2
Select a language using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The Initial Setting screen appears.
.
3
Ensure that the lens cover is closed, and
press the Set button (R).
0
Self-diagnosis starts.
0
A progress bar appears, and “Complete
Diagnosis
” appears when the diagnosis is
complete.
.
Memo :
0
It takes about 6 minutes to complete the
diagnosis.
During the diagnosis, do not operate
or turn off the camera recorder.
32
Preparations
4
Press the Set button (R) after confirming
the exit screen.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears.
0
For U models
.
0
For E models
.
Memo :
0
The
[Initial Setting] screen appears when the
power is turned on for the first time and when the
power is turned on after the built-in battery is fully
discharged.
0
The configured date/time data is saved in the
built-in
rechargeable battery even if the power is
turned off.
5
Set the time zone and date/time.
A
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
B
Change the values with the cross-shaped
button (JK).
6
Press the Set button (R) after setting is
complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
Memo :
0
The
configured date/time data can be displayed
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder and be
recorded to the SD card.
0
The value of the year can be set in the range of
“2000” to “2099”.
Changing the Time after Initial Setting
Setting the Date/Time
(A P
117 [ Date/Time ] )
1
Select [System] B [Date/Time
].
The [Date/Time] screen appears.
2
Set the date and time.
A
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
B
Change the values with the cross-shaped
button (JK).
3
Press the Set button (R) after setting is
complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
Changing the Display Style
You can change the display style of the date/time
on the menu.
Setting the Date Display (Date Style)
(A P
111 [ Date Style ] )
The date display can be changed in [LCD/VF] B
[Display Settings] B [Date Style].
Setting the Time Display (Time Style)
(A P
111 [ Time Style ] )
The time display can be changed in [LCD/VF] B
[Display Settings] B [Time Style].
Date/Time Display in Each Operation
Mode
During Camera mode:
Date/time of the built-in clock is displayed.
During Media mode:
Shooting date/time of the clip being played back is
displayed.
33
Preparations
Displays on the LCD
Monitor and Viewfinder
You can display the camera status, media
information, zebra pattern, and various markers in
the
video image on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen during shooting.
Memo :
0
When [Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [
Video Set]
B [Display On TV] is set to “On”, the display
screen and menu screen are also displayed in
the video image from the video signal output
terminal.
(A P
112 [ Display On TV ] )
Display Screen
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Camera Mode
(A P131
[Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
0
The display switches between three screen
types with every press of the [DISPLAY] button.
(Display 0 B 1 B 2 B 0)
0
Press the
[STATUS] button to switch to the
status screen.
.
Display 2 screen
Display 1 screen
Display 0 screen
100min
50min
282min
P13000K
1/100
F1.6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
12 :34 : 56
Jan 12,2016
00: 00:00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
P13000K
1/100
F1.6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
12 :34 : 56
Jan 12,2016
00: 00:00.00
40 30 20 10
0
5 . 6 f t
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Media Mode
(A P
136 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )
0
This is the screen display during clip playback in
Media Mode.
0
The display switches between three screen
types with every press of the [DISPLAY] button.
(Display 0 B 1 B 2 B 0)
.
1000/ 2000
12 :34 : 56
Jan 12,2016
00: 00:00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20 10 0
1000/ 2000
282min
12 :34 : 56
Jan 1 2,2016
00: 00:00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20 10 0
1000/ 2000
x5
SELECT
x5
INFO
Display 2 screen
Display 1 screen
Display 0 screen
34
Preparations
Status Screen
0
This screen allows you to check the current
settings.
0
To display the status screen, press the
[STATUS
] button in the normal screen.
0
The status display differs according to the
operation mode (two types).
(A P18
[Operation Modes] )
0
Press the [STATUS] button to switch to the
display screen.
0
Press
the [MENU/THUMB] button at each status
screen (other than the [Camera 1]/[Camera 2]
screen) to enter the setting screen.
0
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to switch
screens as follows:
.
* These are screen examples of GY-HM660. The
contents
displayed are different depending on the
model and settings.
USB Mode Screen
This screen displays the USB mode.
.
Remote Edit Mode Screen a
This is a mode for accessing the page for editing
the metadata that is recorded in a clip via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
(A P160
[ Clip Metadata ] )
.
Warning Display
Warning display is displayed in the display screen
(Camera mode, Media mode).
(A P
178 [Error Messages and Actions] )
.
P13000K
1/100
F1.6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 : 56
Jan 12,2016
00:00: 00.00
4030 20
10
0
Warning Display Area
35
Preparations
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
and Viewfinder
You can monitor video images on this camera
recorder using the viewfinder, LCD monitor, or
both.
.
DISPLAY
Normal LCD
Inverted
LCD
Displays on the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder Screen (VF)
When [LCD/VF] B [
LCD + VF] is set to “Off”
(A P108
[ LCD + VF ] )
LCD Monitor Status LCD Display VF Display
LCD closed Normal LCD OFF ON
Inverted LCD ON OFF *
LCD opened Normal LCD ON OFF *
Inverted LCD ON OFF *
* Turns on when [LCD/VF] B [
LCD + VF] is set to
“On”.
Memo :
0
Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds
to turn ON/OFF the LCD monitor.
0
The function to switch between LCD monitor and
viewfinder displays by pressing the [DISPLAY]
button can be canceled by opening/closing or
rotating the LCD monitor.
0
The viewfinder screen is always displayed when
[LCD/VF]
B
[LCD + VF] is set to “On”.
0
You can display both the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screens at the same time by setting
[LCD/VF]
B
[LCD + VF] to “On”.
(A P108 [ LCD + VF ] )
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
.
2
1
PEAKINGLCD BRIGHT
3
Tilt 90 degrees
downward
Tilt 180 degrees
upward
1
Open the LCD cover.
2
Incline the LCD monitor to a position that
enables easy viewing.
Rotate the LCD monitor to adjust the angle.
0
While the LCD monitor is open, you can
rotate it 180 degrees upward or 90 degrees
downward.
0
Rotating the LCD monitor 180 degrees
upward enables you to see the screen from
the
lens side. To display the image when it is
viewed from the opposite direction (mirror
image), perform setting as follows.
Set [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [LCD
Mirror] to “Mirror” B Set button (R)
(A P
108 [ LCD Mirror ] )
3
Adjust the brightness, contour, and
contrast of the LCD monitor.
You can change the angle and brightness of the
LCD
monitor according to your usage condition.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [LCD BRIGHT +/－] button to adjust the
brightness of the LCD monitor.
0
The
[+] button brightens the monitor and the
[－] button darkens it.
0
Press
the [+] and [－] buttons simultaneously
to return to standard settings.
0
During adjustment, the brightness level is
displayed on the LCD monitor.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 64
4030 20 10 0
LCD BRIGHT
-10
36
Preparations
Adjusting the Contour
Use the [PEAKING +/－] button to adjust the
contour of the LCD monitor.
(The contour of the viewfinder screen will also
be adjusted at the same time.)
0
The
[+] button increases contour correction
and the [－] button decreases contour
correction.
0
Press
the [+] and [－] buttons simultaneously
to return to standard settings.
0
During adjustment, the contour level is
displayed on the LCD monitor.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 64
4030 20 10 0
PEAKING
0
Adjusting the Contrast
Use the [LCD Contrast] menu to adjust the
contrast of the LCD monitor.
0
Adjust using [
Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B
[LCD Contrast].
0
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: +10 to -10] (Default value:
0)
Adjusting the Viewfinder
You can change the brightness and peaking of the
viewfinder screen according to your usage
conditions.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
.
PEAKING
1
2
Caution :
0
A high-definition viewfinder is used on this
camera
recorder in order to provide an accurate
focusing environment. Due to the characteristic
of the display device, colors may appear on the
images when you blink your eyes. This is not a
malfunction. It does not affect the recorded
images, SDI output, AV output, or HDMI output.
1
Incline the viewfinder vertically to a
position that enables easy viewing.
2
Turn the visibility adjustment lever to
adjust the visibility.
Turn the visibility adjustment lever to sharpen
the image on the viewfinder screen.
3
Adjust the brightness, contour, and
contrast of the viewfinder screen.
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [VF Bright
] menu to adjust the
brightness of the viewfinder screen.
0
Adjust
using [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [VF
Bright].
0
Increasing the value increases the
brightness. [Setting Values: +10 to -10]
(Default value: 0)
Adjusting the Contour
Use the [PEAKING +/-] button to adjust the
contour of the viewfinder screen.
The contour of the LCD monitor will also be
adjusted at the same time.
(A
P37 [Adjusting the Contour] )
Memo :
0
When [Main
Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [LCD + VF] is
set to “Off”, operate after switching to the
viewfinder display by pressing the [DISPLAY]
button for 2 seconds or longer.
Adjusting the Contrast
Use the [VF Contrast
] menu to adjust the
contrast of the viewfinder screen.
0
Adjust
using [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [VF
Contrast].
0
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: +10 to -10] (Default value:
0)
37
Preparations
Displaying in Black and White
You can display the viewfinder screen in black
and white.
0
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [VF Color] item
B Press Set button (R) B Select
“Off” B
Press Set button (R).
(A P
108 [ VF Color ] )
Assignment of Functions
to User Buttons
You can assign functions to the following buttons
and use them as user buttons.
By
assigning functions to the buttons, the usability
of the camera recorder can be enhanced.
Perform settings in the menu items corresponding
to each button.
Button Menu Item
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button [USER1]
[OIS/2] Button [USER2]
[LOLUX/3] Button [USER3]
[AE LOCK/4] Button [USER4]
[ZEBRA/5] Button [USER5]
[MARKER/6] Button [USER6]
[C.REVIEW/7] Button [USER7]
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (J) [LCD KEY▲]
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (K) [LCD KEY▼]
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (H) [LCD KEY◀]
LCD Cross-Shaped Button (I) [LCD KEY▶]
.
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
AE LOCK/4 ZEBRA/5 MARKER/6
FOCUS ASSIST/1 OIS / 2 LOLUX / 3
TIME CODE
C.REVIEW/7
1
Assign functions to the buttons from the
menu.
Set items in [Main Menu] B [Camera
Function
] B [User Switch Set] B [USER1]-
[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD
KEY▼], [LCD KEY◀].
(A P100 [User Switch Set Item] )
Memo :
0
Operations of the user buttons are interlocked
with the menu settings.
0
When the menu screen is displayed, these
buttons
function as the menu operation buttons.
(A P
94 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Tally Lamp
This is the indicator lamp for recording and
warning.
The operation changes according to the menu
settings.
The lamp blinks when the battery or remaining
space on the SD card is low. (Camera mode only)
*
Set using [Main Menu] B [System] B [Tally
Lamp].
(A P116 [ Tally Lamp ] )
.
TIME CODE
Menu Setting Tally Lamp Off On
Functional
information
Warning -
J
Caution -
o
Recording status Recording -
R
Special recording * -
R
R
:
Lights up
J
:
Blinks four times in 1 second
o
:
Blinks once in 1 second
*
Paused state during special recording ([Clip
Continuous]).
(A P80 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
Memo :
0
Blinking takes priority over lighting up.
38
Preparations
SD Card
This camera recorder saves the recorded images
and audio sound on the SD card (sold separately)
in the card slot.
Usable Cards
Use a Class 6/10 SD card.
Memo :
0
Depending on the recording format, SD card
with Class 4 or higher performance can also be
used.
(A P
46 [Selecting System Definition, File
Format and Video Format] )
0
To use an SDHC card, set
[4GB File
Spanning(SDXC)] to “On”.
(A P
121 [ 4GB File Spanning(SDXC) ] )
Caution :
0
Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
Estimated Recordable Time of SD Cards
The estimated recordable time is only a guide.
Differences may occur depending on the SD card
in use and the battery condition.
(A P
118 [WResolution a, Resolution b] )
(A P119 [ Y Resolution a ] )
(A P118 [WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit
Rate b] )
(A P119 [ Y Frame & Bit Rate a ] )
QuickTime/MP4/MXF
MPEG2/HD
SP HQ
720p 1080i 720p/1080i/1080p
4 GB 22 17 12
8 GB 45 35 25
16 GB 90 70 50
32 GB 180 140 100
64 GB
(SDXC)
360 280 200
128 GB
(SDXC)
720 560 400
(Unit: minute)
AVCHD
HQ HQ SP LP EP
1080p 1080i
4 GB 16 19 25 46 82
8 GB 33 39 50 95 168
16 GB 67 78 100 190 336
32 GB 135 156 200 380 672
64 GB
(SDXC)
270 312 400 760 1344
128 GB
(SDXC)
540 624 800 1520 2688
(Unit: minute)
QuickTime
H.264/HD H.264/SD H.264/Web
XHQ UHQ - HQ LP
1080i/1080p 480i/576i 960p 480p
4 GB 9 12 47 130 285
8 GB 18 25 95 270 580
16 GB 36 50 190 540 1160
32 GB 72 100 380 1080 2320
64 GB
(SDXC)
145 200 760 2160 4720
128 GB
(SDXC)
290 400 1520 4320 9440
(Unit: minute)
Memo :
0
If
the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded.
0
The number of clips that can be recorded to one
SD card on this camera recorder for each file
format is restricted.
Up to 600 clips can be recorded for the
“QuickTime” file format and 4000 clips for the
“AVCHD” file format. When the maximum
number of clips is reached, the remaining space
is displayed as “0 min” regardless of the
estimated recordable time, and no further
recording can be made.
Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card
A
Slide the write-protect switch upward to enable
writing or deleting.
B
Slide the write-protect switch downward to
prevent writing or deleting. (Images in the card
are protected.)
.
AB
Write/Delete Enabled Write/Delete Disabled
Write-Protect Switch
39
Preparations
Inserting an SD Card
This camera recorder comes with two card slots
(Slot A and B) for video/audio recording and
playback.
.
1
2
3
1
A
B
2
1
Open the SD card cover.
2
Insert an SD card with the notched corner
pointing up.
The status indicator of the card slot to which the
card was inserted lights up in red.
3
Close the SD card cover.
Card Slot Status Indicator
The following table shows the respective states of
slot A and B.
Lamp Slot Status
Lights up in
red
The inserted SD card is being
accessed. (writing/reading data)
Do not turn off the power of the
camera
recorder or remove the SD
card.
Lights up in
green
On standby. The inserted SD card
can be used for recording or
playback.
Light goes out
0
SD card is not inserted.
0
An unusable card is inserted.
0
An SD card is inserted but a
different slot is selected.
Removing the SD Card
1
Check that the SD card to be removed is not
being accessed (status indicator of the
card slot lights up in red).
2
Open the SD card cover.
3
Push the SD card and remove it from the
slot.
4
Close the SD card cover.
Memo :
0
When both slots are inserted with usable SD
cards, the previously selected slot is used.
Caution :
0
Data may be lost if you turn off the power of the
camera
recorder or remove the SD card when it
is being accessed. All data recorded on the
card, including the file that is being accessed,
may be corrupted. Be sure to check whether the
status indicator is lit in green or turned off before
you turn off the power or remove the SD card.
0
If you mistakenly remove the card when it is
being accessed, reinsert the card only after the
status indicator goes off.
0
The SD card may not be recognized if you insert
and remove the card within a short time. When
this happens, remove the card and wait for a few
seconds before you reinsert.
40
Preparations
Switching the SD cards
When both card slots are inserted with SD cards,
you can use the
[SLOT A/B] button to switch the
card to use.
When the memory on an SD card is full during
recording, data recording automatically switches to
the other card.
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
SLOT
A/B
Memo :
0
The [SLOT A/B] button is disabled during
recording or playback. Cards will not be
switched even if you press the button.
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards
When the following cards are inserted, [!FORMAT]
appears at the remaining media display area.
Format the card using the camera recorder menu.
0
Unformatted SD cards
0
SD cards formatted under different
specifications
* For
details of the menu operation, refer to “[Basic
Operations in Menu Screen] (A P 94)”.
Caution :
0
Be sure to format the SD card on this camera
recorder.
SD cards formatted on a PC and other
peripheral equipment cannot be used on this
camera recorder.
0
[!RESTORE]
appears at the remaining media
display area when an SD card that requires
restoring is inserted.
1
Select [System] B [Media] B [Format
Media]
.
(A P
115 [ Format Media ] )
2
Select the slot of the SD card to be
formatted and press the Set button (R).
.
2
3
The status of the selected SD card appears.
4
Select [Format] and press the Set button
(R).
.
4
5
Formatting starts.
.
41
Preparations
6
Formatting is complete.
When formatting is complete, “
Complete” appears
and the camera recorder returns to the [Format
Media] screen.
Memo :
0
During formatting, menu operation is
unavailable but you can start recording.
However, this is only available when a
recordable SD card is inserted in the other slot.
0
Formatting
cannot be performed in the following
cases.
0
Recording is in progress on the SD card to be
formatted.
0
SD card is not inserted.
0
Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (z
is displayed).
Caution :
0
If you format the SD card, all data recorded on
the card, including video data and setup files,
will be deleted.
Restoring the SD Card
It is necessary to restore the SD card if an
abnormality occurs to the data in the card due to
some reasons.
Memo :
0
[!RESTORE] appears at the remaining media
display area when an SD card that requires
restoring is inserted.
1
Select [System] B [Media] B [Restore
Media]
.
(A P
115 [ Restore Media ] )
2
Select the SD card to be restored and press
the Set button (R).
.
2
3
Restoring starts.
.
4
Restoring is complete.
0
When restoring is complete, “Complete
”
appears and the camera recorder returns to the
[Restore Media] screen.
0
When no media that requires restoring is
inserted, the camera recorder returns to the
[
Media] menu screen.
Caution :
0
[Restore Media] can only be selected in Camera
mode. However, it cannot be selected while the
camera recorder is recording. Select [Restore
Media] in Camera mode when the camera
recorder is not recording.
0
[Restore
Media] does not restore the SD card to
its original states completely. If restoring fails,
replace or format the SD card. Take note that
formatting erases all the information inside the
SD card.
0
Restoring cannot be performed in the following
cases.
0
Camera recorder is recording in progress.
0
SD card is not inserted.
0
Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (z
is displayed).
42
Preparations
Clips Recorded to SD Cards
Folders in the SD Card
Images recorded are sorted into the respective
folders according to the menu settings below.
*
Select which folder to record to from the menu.
(A P121 [ Recording in DCIM Folder ] )
o
a
System
WFormat/
YFormat
Record Folder
HD QuickTime
(MPEG2)
DCIM or PRIVATE/JVC/
CQAV*
MP4(MPEG2) PRIVATE/JVC/BPAV
MXF(MPEG2) PRIVATE/JVC/CMAV
HD/Web AVCHD PRIVATE/AVCHD
HD/SD/Web
QuickTime(H.264)
DCIM or PRIVATE/JVC/
CQAVC*
o
b
System Format Record Folder
HD QuickTime
(MPEG2)
DCIM or PRIVATE/JVC/
CQAV*
MP4(MPEG2) PRIVATE/JVC/BPAV
AVCHD PRIVATE/AVCHD
HD/SD
QuickTime(H.264)
DCIM or PRIVATE/JVC/
CQAVC*
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to “
HD+Web”, web files
(MOV format) will be recorded in the [DCIM]
folder. a
0
By formatting (initializing) the SD card from the
[Format Media] menu on the camera recorder,
folders required for recording in the current
[System] settings will be generated.
0
When the [
System] settings and
[QuickTime(MPEG2)] settings are changed,
folders required for recording in those settings
will be automatically generated.
Caution :
0
When
a clip inside the folder is moved or deleted
using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac),
recording to the SD card may fail if formatting
(initializing) of the card is not performed.
Clip (Recorded Data) and Clip Name
0
When recording is stopped, the images, audio
and accompanying data which are recorded
from start to stop are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
0
An 8-character clip name is automatically
generated for the recorded clip.
(“Clip Name Prefix
” + “Clip Number”)
0
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format
] B [WFormat] is set to
“AVCHD”, the clip name generated consists of
only the Clip Number (5-digit number).
(A P118 [WFormat a, Format b] )
Example: In the case of QuickTime/MP4
.
ABCG0001
This is set to “xxxG” (“xxx” denotes the last 3
digits of the serial number) by default.
Clip Name Prefix (any four alphanumeric characters)
The Clip Number can be reset in
the menu.*
A number in automatic
ascending order is assigned in
the recording order.
Clip Number
* [Clip Set] B [Reset Clip Number]
(A P
122 [ Reset Clip Number ] )
Memo :
0
Before recording starts, you can set any
characters for the clip name prefix by using
[Main
Menu] B [System] B [Record Set] B [Clip
Set] B [Clip Name Prefix].
(A P122
[ Clip Name Prefix ] )
0
Changes cannot be made after recording.
Recorded Clips
0
The
recorded materials may be split into several
files but they can be played back continuously
on the camera recorder.
0
Clips may be recorded across the two SD cards
in card slots A and B depending on the recording
time of the clip.
0
When copying videos in MP4 file format to a
HDD using a PC, it is recommended to use [JVC
ProHD Clip Manager Software], which is found
in the supplied disc, to maintain continuity.
Caution :
0
A clip recorded across several cards cannot be
played
back continuously. Continuous playback
is only possible when the recording is made on
one card.
43
Preparations
Operation Lock Feature
You can use this feature to prevent erroneous
camera operation.
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
1
While in the Camera mode (when the
display screen appears), press and hold
the [CANCEL]
button for 5 seconds or
longer.
0
The operation lock turns on, and an
operation lock icon (r) appears on the
display screen.
.
P 13000K 1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
00:00: 00.00
40 30 20 10
0
0
Press the
[CANCEL] button again for 5
seconds or longer to turn off the operation
lock.
Memo :
0
The operation lock feature is only valid in the
Camera mode.
(A P18
[Operation Modes] )
0
The power turns off and the operation lock is
disengaged.
0
The [CANCEL] button on the LCD monitor
section cannot be used to turn on/off (“On/Off”)
the operation lock feature.
0
The following remote operations are possible
even when the operation lock feature is turned
on (“On
”).
0
Remote operation from the wired remote
control
connected to the [REMOTE] terminal.
0
Remote operation of the camera through
access via a browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
Operation lock does not apply to the following
buttons and switches.
0
[
POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
0
[ND FILTER] switch
0
TC [IN/OUT]
selection switch
0
All switches inside the LCD monitor door
(however, the operation of the [CH1/CH2]
adjustment knob will be locked.)
0
Focus ring
0
Zoom
lever at the grip/Zoom lever at the handle/
Zoom ring at the lens section
0
[ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch
0
[FIX/VAR/OFF
] zoom speed switch
0
Iris ring
0
[REC]
button (at the top of the handle, on the grip
and at the bottom of the lens)
Memo :
0
The operation lock will also not apply to the
[REC
] button at the bottom of the lens if [Camera
Function] B [User Switch Set] B [Front REC] is
set to “Rec”.
44
Preparations
Basic Shooting
Procedures
Preparations
.
3
1
MODE
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
4
2
4
1
Supply battery or AC adapter power to the
camera recorder.
(A P
28 [Power Supply] )
2
Insert an SD card.
(A P
39 [SD Card] )
3
Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the center of
the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to set to
“ON”. The camera recorder starts up in Camera
mode and is ready for recording.
4
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
(A P
36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
Shooting
1
Configure the video and audio input
settings.
You have to configure video settings such as
brightness adjustment (iris, gain, shutter) and
white balance adjustment in order to start
shooting. You also have to adjust the audio
input settings and audio recording level for
audio recording.
0
Adjusting the Brightness
(A P53
[Adjusting the Brightness] )
0
Adjusting the White Balance
(A P59 [Adjusting the White Balance] )
0
Adjusting Audio Input Settings and
Recording Level
(A P63 [Audio Recording] )
2
Press the [REC
] button to start recording to
the SD card.
This camera recorder has three [REC]
buttons.
Any of the [REC] buttons can be used to start/
stop recording by default.
The tally lamp lights up in red during recording.
0
Zoom Operation
(A P48
[Zoom Operation] )
0
Adjusting the Focus
(A P49 [Focus Operation] )
Memo :
0
If
both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the factory default, pressing the [REC] button
starts recording only to the media in the selected
slot.
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Slot Mode] is set to “Dual”, recording can be
performed simultaneously to the cards in both
the slots.
(A P
76 [Dual Rec] )
0
The tally lamp can be turned off in [System] B
[Tally Lamp].
(A P
116 [ Tally Lamp ] )
3
Check the most recently captured images.
0
Press the [C.REVIEW/7
] button on the lens
to activate the Clip Review function. The
most recently captured images are played
back on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen.
0
After playback, the camera recorder returns
to standby mode (STBY).
(A P74
[Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
Memo :
0
[Clip Review] is assigned to [C.REVIEW/7]
button in factory default.
0
[Clip
Review] can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(A
P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
45
Shooting
Selecting System
Definition,
File Format and
Video Format
You can select the resolution of the recorded
videos (HD, SD, or Web), file format for recording/
playback, and the video recording format on this
camera recorder.
Memo :
0
Make a selection in
[Main Menu] B [Record
Format].
Selecting a System Definition
The following definitions are available for selection.
0
HD:
Records in HD (High Definition) quality.
0
SD:
Records in SD (Standard Definition) quality.
0
Web a :
Records in resolution (1440x1080, 960x540,
720x480,
720x576, or 480x270) suitable for web
distribution
You can select a definition for the recorded images
from the following items under [System].
0
HD:
Records in HD quality for both slots A and B.
0
SD:
Records in SD quality for both slots A and B.
0
HD+SD a :
Records in HD quality for slot A, and SD quality
for slot B.
(A P76 [Recording Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions a] )
0
HD+Web a :
Records in HD quality for slot A, and Web quality
for slot B.
(A P76
[Recording Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions a] )
Selecting a File Format
Select a file format in [WFormat]/[YFormat] a or
[Format
] b.
The following file formats are available for
selection.
0
QuickTime(MPEG2):
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
0
MP4(MPEG2):
MP4 file format
0
MXF(MPEG2) a :
MXF (material exchange format)
0
AVCHD:
AVCHD file format
0
QuickTime(H.264):
QuickTime format (.MOV)
Memo :
0
“MXF(MPEG2)” is not available for selection in
the GY-HM620 series. b
0
The
available options vary as follows depending
on the [System] setting.
o
a
0
When “HD”, “HD+SD”, or “HD+Web
” is set,
the options for slot A are:
QuickTime(MPEG2), MP4(MPEG2),
MXF(MPEG2), AVCHD, QuickTime(H.264)
0
When “SD
” or “HD+SD” is set, the available
option for slot B is:
QuickTime(H.264)
0
When “HD+Web” is set, the available option
for slot B is:
QuickTime(H.264), AVCHD
o
b
0
For
“HD”:
QuickTime(MPEG2), MP4(MPEG2),
AVCHD,QuickTime(H.264)
0
For “SD”:
QuickTime(H.264)
Selecting a Video Format
0
Select
a [Record Format] from the list of formats.
The selectable [WFrame & Bit Rate]/[YFrame &
Bit Rate] changes according to the settings of
[System], [WFormat], and [WResolution].
0
The recording bit rate (video) is 50 Mbps in
“XHQ”, 35 Mbps VBR in “UHQ” and “HQ”, and
18.3 Mbps (25 Mbps in the case of 1080i) CBR
in “SP
”.
0
The
recording bit rate (system rate) is as follows
when [WFormat]/[YFormat] a or [Format]
b is set to “AVCHD”.
0
“HQ” (60p/50p): 28 Mbps VBR
0
“HQ
” (60i/50i): 24 Mbps VBR
0
“SP
”: 18 Mbps VBR
0
“LP
”: 9 Mbps VBR
0
“EP
”: 5 Mbps VBR
46
Shooting
List of Formats
The following is a list of file formats and video
formats that can be selected on this camera
recorder.
o
When
[System] is set to “HD”, “HD+SD”, or “HD
+Web”, the options for slot A a are:
When [System] is set to “HD” b :
Record Format System
Format
Resolution
Frame & Bit
Rate
HD HD
+SD
HD
+Web
MP4
(MPEG2)
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
MXF
(MPEG2)
a
MP4
(MPEG2)
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
b
1920x
1080
60i (HQ),
30p (HQ)
P P P
50i (HQ),
25p (HQ),
24p (HQ)
P
-
P
1440x
1080
60i (HQ),
60i (SP) (*1)
P P P
50i (HQ),
50i (SP) (*1)
P
-
P
1280x
720
60p (HQ),
30p (HQ),
60p (SP) (*1)
P P P
50p (HQ),
25p (HQ),
24p (HQ),
50p (SP) (*1)
P
-
P
AVCHD
(*2)
1920x
1080
60p (HQ),
50p (HQ)
P
- -
60i (HQ),
60i (SP)
P P P
50i (HQ),
50i (SP)
P
-
P
1440x
1080
60i (LP),
60i (EP)
P P P
50i (LP),
50i (EP)
P
-
P
QuickTime
(H.264)
1920x
1080
60p (XHQ),
50p (XHQ)
P
- -
60i (XHQ),
30p (XHQ),
60i (UHQ),
30p (UHQ)
P P P
50i (XHQ),
25p (XHQ),
24p (XHQ),
50i (UHQ),
25p (UHQ),
24p (UHQ)
P
-
P
*1 HDV compatible
*2
Recordable using Class 4
Memo :
0
When the MXF file is set to
“1280x720”, only
“60p(HQ)” or “50p(HQ)” is selectable. a
0
MXF file cannot be selected. b
o
When [System] is set to
“SD” or “HD+SD”, the
options for slot B a are:
When [System] is set to “SD” b :
The video format is fixed as follows according to
the model.
Record Format
Remarks
Format Resolution Frame &
Bit Rate
QuickTime
(H.264)
720 x 480 60i
(U model)
Recordable
using Class 4
720 x 576 50i
(E model)
o
Options for slot B when [System] is set to
“HD
+Web” a :
Record Format
Remarks
Format Resolution Frame &
Bit Rate
QuickTime
(H.264)
480x270 30p(LP) Recordable
using Class 4
25p(LP)
24p(LP)
960 x 540 30p(HQ)
25p(HQ)
24p(HQ)
AVCHD
1440 x
1080
60i(LP)
60i(EP)
50i(LP)
50i(EP)
Memo :
0
[Frame & Bit Rate] is fixed depending on the
[Frame & Bit Rate] setting for slot A.
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos
Select an SD video aspect ratio when [System] is
set to “SD” or “HD+SD” a.
You can select “16:9” or “4:3”.
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”,
aspect ratio is fixed at “16:9”. a
47
Shooting
Setting the Record Format Menu
1
Display the [Main Menu] B [
Record
Format] menu.
2
Set each of the items.
3
After setting is complete for all items, press
the [
FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
0
The recording format is switched.
0
A “Please Wait...
” message appears on the
screen during switching.
Zoom Operation
Adjusts the angle of view.
Zoom ratio: 1x to 23x (optical zoom only)
Zooming can be operated using any of the three
levers/rings below.
0
Zoom Lever at the Grip
0
Zoom Lever at the Handle
0
Zoom Ring at the Lens Section:
Functions as a zoom ring when the
[ZOOM
SERVO/MANUAL] switch is set to “MANUAL”.
.
W
T
REC
HOLD
REC
FIX VAR OFF
SERV O MANUAL
ZOOM
Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip
1
Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to
“
SERVO”.
2
Press the zoom lever to zoom.
0
The zoom speed changes according to the
extent the zoom lever is being pushed.
0
Zooms into wide angle and increases the
angle of view when
“W” is pressed.
0
Zooms into telephoto and decreases the
angle of view when
“T” is pressed.
0
A zoom bar appears during zoom operation
.
12 .5/ 30 f
ps
ps
P 13000K
P 13000K
1/100
1/100
F1.6
F1.6
0dB
0dB
AE+6
AE+6
ND 1/64
ND 1/64
12:34:56
12:34:56
Jan 12,2016
Jan 12,2016
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
5.
5.6 f t
12 .5/ 30 f
ps
ps
P 13000K
P 13000K
1/100
1/100
F1.6
F1.6
0dB
0dB
AE+6
AE+6
ND 1/64
ND 1/64
12:34:56
12:34:56
Jan 12,2016
Jan 12,2016
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
5.
5.6 f t
Using the Zoom Lever at the Handle
1
Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to
“SERVO”.
2
Set the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch
to “FIX”
or “VAR”.
Memo :
0
Setting to “FIX” will allow the zoom operation to
move
at the speed set in [Handle Zoom Speed].
0
Set the zoom speed using
[Main Menu] B
[Camera Function] B [Handle Zoom Speed].
(A
P99 [ Handle Zoom Speed ] )
0
Setting to “VAR” will change the zoom speed
according to the pressure applied on the lever.
3
Press the zoom lever at the handle to zoom.
Memo :
0
When
the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch is
set to “OFF”, the zoom lever at the handle
section cannot be used.
48
Shooting
Using Zoom Ring at the Lens Section
1
Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to
“
MANUAL”.
You can adjust the preferred angle of view by
turning the zoom ring.
Saving/Recalling Current Zoom
Position (Preset Zoom)
This allows you to register up to three zoom
positions.
1
Assign the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset
Zoom2
”, or “Preset Zoom3” function to any
of the user buttons.
(A P
38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
(A P100 [USER1 to USER7, LCD KEY▲, LCD
KEY▶, LCD KEY▼, LCD KEY◀] )
2
Save the current zoom position.
0
Press any of the buttons assigned with the
“Preset Zoom1
”, “Preset Zoom2”, or “Preset
Zoom3” function for more than 1 second.
0
The current zoom position will be stored.
3
Recall the stored zoom position.
0
Press any of the buttons assigned with the
“Preset Zoom1
”, “Preset Zoom2”, or “Preset
Zoom3” function and release within 1
second.
0
The camera recorder zooms to the stored
zoom position.
Memo :
0
To recall the stored zoom position, set the
[ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL
] switch to “SERVO”.
0
Set the speed for shifting to the preset zoom
position and the rate of change for starting and
stopping the preset zoom operation in
[Main
Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Preset Zoom1]
to [Preset Zoom3].
(A P101
[Preset Zoom1, Preset Zoom2, Preset
Zoom3] )
0
Operating other zoom maneuvers during a
zoom position recall will cancel the recall.
Focus Operation
Adjusting Focus Manually
.
FOCUS
MANU
PUSH AUTO
FOCUS ASSIST/1
TIME CODE
AUTO
1
Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to
“MANU
”.
The manual focus icon d appears on the
screen.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00:00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
Memo :
0
If [Main Menu]
B
[LCD/VF]
B
[Display Settings]
B
[Focus] is set to “Off”, the
d
icon will not appear.
(A P110 [ Focus ] )
2
Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
Memo :
0
Using the Focus Assist or Expanded Focus
function makes it easier to focus.
(A P51
[Focus Assist Function] )
(A P51 [Expanded Focus Function] )
0
Pressing the [FOCUS AUTO] button in the
Manual Focus mode activates the One-push
Auto Focus mode, while holding down the
[FOCUS AUTO] button activates the Push Auto
Focus mode.
(A P
50 [One Push Auto Focus] )
(A P50 [Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)] )
49
Shooting
Adjusting Focus Automatically
Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to
“AUTO”.
The auto focus icon e
appears on the screen.
Memo :
0
If [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [AF
Assist]
is set to “Area” or “Far/Near”, you can turn
the focus ring to shift the auto focus point while
in the automatic focus adjustment mode.
(A P99
[ AF Assist ] )
0
If [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display
Settings] B [Focus] is set to “Off”, the auto focus
icon will not appear.
(A P110
[ Focus ] )
One Push Auto Focus
While in the Manual Focus mode, pressing the
[PUSH AUTO] button (within 1 minute) makes the
camera recorder focus on the center of the frame
automatically.
Memo :
0
Face detection does not work during One Push
Auto Focus.
0
AF Assist does not function.
0
When the operation is complete, the camera
recorder returns to the Manual Focus mode
automatically.
0
One Push Auto Focus functions with emphasis
on the focusing speed. This function is not
suitable during recording.
Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)
0
The camera recorder will shift to Auto Focus
mode temporarily and automatically adjusts
focus
when the [PUSH AUTO] button is pressed
during shooting in Manual Focus mode.
0
Release the
[PUSH AUTO] button to return to
Manual Focus mode.
Memo :
0
Face detection does not work during Push Auto
Focus.
Adjusting Focus on Far Objects
Slide the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to “∞”.
0
The ∞
icon is displayed.
0
Release your finger to return to Manual Focus
mode.
AF Assist Function
To shift the auto focus point during Auto Focus
(AF), you can turn the focus ring to set the point to
the left, center, right, or near and far directions.
0
Set [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [AF
Assist].
0
Far/Near:
This option allows you to shift the auto focus
point
to near and far directions by turning the
focus ring during AF.
Focus is automatically adjusted to a focus
point near the position where the focus ring
stops turning.
0
Area:
Selecting this option displays the
icon in
the area.
Turning
the focus ring during AF displays the
focus area on the left, center, and right side
for about 2 seconds. Turning the focus ring
within 2 seconds allows you to move the
orange frame to select the focus area.
After selecting the area, focus is
automatically adjusted to a focus point near
the selected area.
.
P 13000K 1/ 100
F1. 6
0
dB
00: 00:00. 00
4030 20
10
0
* The icons ( , , and ) change in
conjunction with the orange frame in the focus
area.
Memo :
0
When [Face Detect] is set, “Area” is not
selectable.
50
Shooting
Focus Assist Function
0
When
the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button is pressed
during shooting, the focused area is displayed
in color. This enables easy and accurate
focusing.
0
Select
the color (blue, red or green) in the menu.
Memo :
0
When [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF
] B [Shooting
Assist] B [Focus Assist] B [Type] is set to
“ACCU-Focus”, the depth of field becomes
shallower to enable easier focusing.
(A P108
[ Focus Assist ] )
0
The “ACCU-Focus” function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
0
Select
the display color in [Main Menu] B [LCD/
VF] B [Shooting Assist] B [Focus Assist] B
[Color].
(A P
109 [ Color ] )
0
If you use the zebra function and the Focus
Assist function at the same time, it may be
difficult to see the effect of the Focus Assist. In
this case, turn off the zebra function.
Setting Focus Assist Function to a User Button
You can assign the “Focus
Assist” function to a user
button.
(A P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Expanded Focus Function
Magnifies the image at the center. Doing so
enables precise focus to be established easily.
1
Assign the “Expanded Focus” function to
any of the user buttons.
(A P
38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
(A P100 [USER1 to USER7, LCD KEY▲, LCD
KEY▶, LCD KEY▼, LCD KEY◀] )
2
Press the user button that is assigned with
the “Expanded Focus”
function.
0
“EXPANDED
” (yellow color) appears on the
screen, and the center part of the image is
enlarged.
0
Pressing the user button again restores the
image to the original size.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
12 :34 :56
Jan 24 , 2012
00: 00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
EXPANDED
EXPANDED
EXPANDED
EXPANDED
Memo :
0
To
set the operation when the button is pressed,
go to [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [User
Switch Set] B [Expanded Focus].
(A P102
[ Expanded Focus ] )
0
This function can be used together with the
Focus Assist function.
0
The
magnification ratio varies with the format of
the record signals.
0
Magnifying an image does not alter the size of
the recorded image.
0
This function is unavailable when [Main Menu]
B [System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format]
B [System] is set to “SD”.
51
Shooting
Adjusting the Focusing by
Face Detection
This function detects human faces and
automatically adjusts focus during Auto Focus.
It can also track moving objects.
When several faces are detected, you can select
one to focus on.
Memo :
0
This function can also adjust the brightness
automatically
according to the brightness of the
face detected.
(A P101 [ Face Detect ] )
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
1
Assign the “Face
Detect” function to any of
the user buttons.
(A P
38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
2
Focus the camera recorder on a person and
press
the user button that is assigned with
“Face Detect”.
0
When Face detection is enabled, the face
detection icon (q) appears.
0
When [
Main Menu] B [Camera Function]
B [User Switch Set] B [Face Detect] is set
to “AF”, “q e” appears.
0
When [Main Menu
] B [Camera Function]
B [User Switch Set] B [Face Detect] is set
to “AF&AE”, “q AE±0” appears.
0
If
you select the person nearest to the center
of the screen, an orange frame will appear
on his face.
0
Focus will be automatically adjusted for the
selected person.
.
Detection Frame (Orange)
AE 
Memo :
0
If the detection frame does not appear, make
sure that the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/
∞]
selection switch has been set to “AUTO”. And if
[Face Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, set one or more
of the items (Gain, Iris and Electronic Shutter) to
the automatic adjustment mode.
(A P53
[Adjusting the Brightness
Automatically] )
(A P54 [Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment)
Mode] )
(A P55 [Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic
Gain Adjustment)] )
(A P58 [Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)] )
52
Shooting
Selecting Specific Person from Several
Persons
1
Hold down the user button that is assigned
with
“Face Detect”.
0
The camera recorder will enter face
selection mode and the face detection icon
(q) will blink.
0
An orange frame will appear on the face of
the person nearest to the center of the
screen.
Blue frames will appear on the faces
of others.
.
Detection Frame (Blue)
Detection Frame (Orange)
Blinking
2
Select a specific person.
0
Use the cross-shaped button (HIJK) to
select a person.
0
An orange frame will appear on the face of
the selected person and focus will be
automatically adjusted.
.
Detection Frame (Blue)
Detection Frame (Orange)
3
Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
person for face detection.
Memo :
0
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the
selection.
0
You
can specify the detection sensitivity and the
operation speed after losing sight of the face
using [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[User Switch Set] B [Face Detect] B [Sensitivity]
and [Hysteresis].
(A P101
[ Sensitivity ] )
(A P101 [ Hysteresis ] )
Adjusting the Brightness
Adjust the brightness using Iris, Gain, Shutter
speed and ND filter according to the brightness of
the object.
Adjusting the Brightness Automatically
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”, Iris,
Gain,
Shutter speed and ND filter are automatically
adjusted according to the brightness of the object
to maintain optimum brightness.
.
AE L
EVEL
PUSH A
UTO
FULL AUTO
ON
OFF
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
GAIN
CANCEL
WHT BAL SHUTTER
AE LOCK/4
Memo :
0
You can use the cross-shaped button (HI) on
the side of the camera recorder to set the target
level (brighter/darker) to maintain optimum
brightness during automatic adjustment.
(A P98 [ AE Level ] )
0
The convergence speed of the automatic
adjustment for gain, shutter and iris can be set
in the menu.
(A P98 [ AE Speed ] )
0
If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and
Shutter) have been set to “Auto”, the value of the
corresponding items when the user button that
is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed can be fixed.
(A P
101 [ AE Lock ] )
Adjusting the Brightness Manually
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “OFF”,
some or all of the items (Iris, Gain and Shutter
Speed) can be manually adjusted.
(A P
54 [Adjusting the Iris] )
(A P55 [Setting the Gain] )
(A P56 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
Memo :
0
If Iris, Gain and Shutter Speed are manually
adjusted, the [AE Level
] setting is temporarily
disabled.
53
Shooting
Adjusting the Iris
You
can adjust the aperture of the lens iris manually
or automatically according to the brightness of the
object.
.
IRIS
PUSH AUTO
Manual Iris (Manual Adjustment) Mode
The aperture value (F-number) of the lens can be
set manually.
1
Press the [IRIS
] button to set to the Manual
Iris mode.
The a icon on the screen disappears.
2
Turn the iris ring on the lens to adjust the
iris manually.
The open F-number of the aperture varies
according to the zoom position.
Wide [W] end
:
F1.6
Tele [T] end
:
F3.0
F-number Description
Decrease The subject appears brighter.
The focused range becomes
sharper, while the background is
blurred to produce a soft image.
Increase The subject appears darker.
Background of image becomes
focused as well.
Memo :
0
Pressing the [PUSH AUTO
] button during
Manual Iris mode activates One Push Auto Iris
mode. And holding down the [PUSH AUTO]
button activates Push Auto Iris mode.
Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment) Mode
Press the [IRIS] button
to set to the Auto Iris mode.
The iris is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the object.
The a icon appears on the screen.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00: 00:00.00
40 30 20
10
0
5 . 6 f t
Memo :
0
Set the
[FULL AUTO] switch on the camera
recorder to “ON” to enter Auto Iris mode
(automatic adjustment mode). The iris is
automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the object.
In this case, the [IRIS] switch on the camera
recorder is disabled.
0
The iris open/close limit can be set in
[Main
Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Auto Iris Limit
(OPEN)]/[Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)] during Auto
Iris.
(A P
99 [ Auto Iris Limit (OPEN) ] )
(A P99 [ Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE) ] )
0
You can use the cross-shaped button (HI) on
the side control panel to set the target level
(brighter/darker) of the auto iris.
(A P98 [ AE Level ] )
0
The convergence speed of the auto iris can be
set in the menu.
(A P98
[ AE Speed ] )
One Push Auto Iris
When the camera recorder is in Manual Iris mode,
press the [PUSH AUTO] button to adjust the iris
according to the brightness of the object.
Push Auto Iris
When the camera recorder is in Manual Iris mode,
hold down the [PUSH AUTO] button to change to
Auto Iris mode temporarily. The iris will be
automatically
adjusted according to the brightness
of the object.
About the Iris F-number
Blurry effects due to “small aperture diffraction”
may occur when the diameter of the iris becomes
too small. When this phenomenon occurs, the F-
number on the screen turns gray to warn you that
the diffraction F-number of the iris has been
exceeded.
You
are recommended to make appropriate use of
ND filters to prevent the F-number from turning
gray.
54
Shooting
Setting the Gain
This
function electrically boosts the light sensitivity
when there is insufficient illumination on the object.
You can set the gain of the video amplifier
according to the brightness of the object. Select the
setting mode according to your shooting
conditions.
.
GAIN
L
M
H
FULL AUTO
ON
OFF
Manual Gain Mode (Manual Gain
Switching)
1
Press the [GAIN] button to set to the Manual
Gain mode.
0
The a icon on the screen disappears.
0
Use the [L/M/H
] switch to set the gain of the
selected video amplifier.
0
The default positions of the switch are as
follows.
[L] : 0dB
[M]
: 6dB
[H] : 12dB
Memo :
0
You
can change the gain value of each position
in the menu. Increasing the sensitivity causes
the screen to appear grainier.
(A P99 [GAIN L, GAIN M, GAIN H] )
Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic Gain
Adjustment)
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “ON”.
The a icon appears on the screen.
Memo :
0
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera
recorder to
“ON” to enter the Automatic Gain
mode ([AGC] fixed). The gain of the video
amplifier is automatically set according to the
brightness of the object.
In this case, the [GAIN] switch on the camera
recorder is disabled.
Memo :
0
The upper limit of the gain setting value during
AGC operation can be set in
[Main Menu] B
[Camera Function] B [AGC Limit].
(A P99
[ AGC Limit ] )
55
Shooting
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
You can change the shutter speed (time for each
shooting frame) using the electronic shutter
function. Electronic shutter can be adjusted
manually or automatically.
Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter
Switching)
1
Press the [SHUTTER] button to set to the
Manual Shutter mode.
0
The a icon on the screen disappears.
0
Use the Set button (R) to switch between the
shutter modes and the cross-shaped button
(JK) to switch between the speeds.
.
AE LEVEL
PUSH
AUT
O
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
GAIN
CANCEL
WHT BAL SHUTTER
FULL AUTO
ON
OFF
Switching Shutter Mode
Press the Set button (center of the cross-shaped
button) to turn ON/OFF the shutter.
Memo :
0
When
the shutter is ON, “Step” or “Variable” may
be selected in [Camera Function] B [Shutter].
“Step” is the factory default.
(A P98
[ Shutter ] )
Switching Shutter Speed
When shutter is ON, use the cross-shaped button
(JK)
to set the shutter speed. Shutter speed differs
according to the video format and variable frame
rate settings.
Memo :
0
To
display Shutter in angle (DEG), set [WFrame
& Bit Rate] to “24p(UHQ)”, “24p(HQ)” or
“25p(HQ)”, and set [Shutter] in [LCD/VF] B
[Display Settings] to “DEG”.
(A P
118 [WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit
Rate b] )
(A P111 [ Shutter ] )
During Modes Other Than Variable Frame Rec
.
720/60p
720/30p
1080/60p
1080/60i
1080/30p
720/50p
720/25p
1080/50p
1080/50i
1080/25p
720/24p
1080/24p
J ON
^^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/500 1/500
1/120
1/100
1/120
1/60
1/100 1/100 1/50
1/60 1/50 1/48
1/30 1/25 1/24
1/15 1/12.5 1/12
K
1/7.5 1/6.25 1/6
J ON
~
1/60.13 1/50.09 1/48.09
~
K
1/30.07 1/25.05 1/24.05
OFF 1/60 1/50 1/48
1/10227
1/10843
1/54
1/10000 1/10000
1/250 1/250
1/120
1/1000 1/1000
1/2000 1/2000
1/4000 1/4000
(Lower limit)
Default values
(Upper limit)
(Standard)
(Variable)
(Step)
Resolution/
Frame &
Bit Rate
Shutter
Memo :
0
The operations of the cross-shaped button
(JK) and Set button (R) are disabled in the
following cases.
0
During clip preview
0
During display of the USB switching
confirmation screen
0
During display of the formatting confirmation
screen
0
When selecting a face using face detection
0
When
selecting a photometry area with [Spot
Meter] set to “Manual”
56
Shooting
During Variable Frame Rec
.
720/30p, 720/24p, 1080/30p, 1080/24p
60, 30, 15 54, 27 50, 25 48, 24, 12, 6 45, 22.5 40, 20, 10 36, 18 32, 2
J
ON
^^^ ^ ^ ^ ^
1/10000
^^^ ^ ^ ^
1/10000 1/4000
^^^ ^ ^
1/10000 1/4000 1/2000
^^^ ^
1/10000 1/4000 1/2000 1/1000
^^^
1/10000 1/4000 1/2000 1/1000 1/500
^^
1/10000 1/4000 1/2000 1/1000 1/500 1/250
^
1/10000 1/4000 1/2000 1/1000 1/500 1/250
1/120
1/10000 1/4000 1/2000 1/1000 1/500 1/250
1/120
1/100
1/4000 1/2000 1/1000 1/500 1/250
1/120
1/100 1/60
1/2000 1/1000 1/500 1/250
1/120
1/100 1/60 1/54
1/1000 1/500 1/250
1/120
1/100 1/60 1/54 1/50
1/500 1/250
1/120
1/100 1/60 1/54 1/50 1/48
1/250
1/120
1/100 1/60 1/54 1/50 1/48 1/45
1/120
1/100 1/60 1/54 1/50 1/48 1/45 1/40
1/100 1/60 1/54 1/50 1/48 1/45 1/40 1/36
1/60 1/54 1/50 1/48 1/45 1/40 1/36 1/32
1/30 1/27 1/25 1/24 1/22.5 1/20 1/18 1/16
K
1/15 1/13.5 1/12.5 1/12 1/11.25 1/10 1/9 1/8
1/7.5 1/6.75 1/6.25 1/6 1/5.625 1/5 1/4.5 1/4
J ON
1/10227
1/10843
1/10227
1/10843
1/10227
1/10843
~
K 1/60.13 1/54.10 1/50.09 1/48.09 1/45.07 1/40.07 1/36.05 1/32.04
23/163/104/154/184/105/145/106/1FFO
(Lower limit)
(Upper limit)
(Standard)
(Variable)
(Step)
Resolution/
Frame & Bit Rate
Shutter
Frame Rate
.
1080/25p
720/25p
50, 25, 12.5 48, 24, 6 45, 22.5 40, 20, 10 36, 18 32, 2
J
ON
^^^^^
1/10000
^^^^
1/10000 1/4000
^^^
1/10000 1/4000 1/2000
^^
1/10000 1/4000 1/2000 1/1000
^
1/10000 1/4000 1/2000 1/1000 1/500
1/10000 1/4000 1/2000 1/1000 1/500 1/250
1/4000 1/2000 1/1000 1/500 1/250
1/120
1/2000 1/1000 1/500 1/250
1/120
1/100
1/1000 1/500 1/250
1/120
1/100 1/50
1/500 1/250
1/120
1/100 1/50 1/48
1/250
1/120
1/100 1/50 1/48 1/45
1/120
1/100 1/50 1/48 1/45 1/40
1/100 1/50 1/48 1/45 1/40 1/36
1/50 1/48 1/45 1/40 1/36 1/32
1/25 1/24 1/22.5 1/20 1/18 1/16
K
1/12.5 1/12 1/11.25 1/10 1/9 1/8
1/6.25 1/6 1/5.625 1/5 1/4.5 1/4
J
ON
1/10227
1/10843
1/10227
1/10843
1/10227
1/10843
~
K
1/50.09 1/48.09 1/45.07 1/40.07 1/36.05 1/32.04
23/163/104/154/184/105/1FFO
(Lower limit)
(Upper limit)
(Standard)
(Variable)
(Step)
Resolution/
Frame & Bit Rate
Shutter
Frame Rate
57
Shooting
Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)
1
Press the [SHUTTER] button or set the
[
FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter
Automatic Shutter mode.
0
The a icon appears on the screen.
0
The camera recorder enters the Automatic
Shutter mode. The shutter speed is
automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the object.
Memo :
0
Switching of shutter speed with the cross-
shaped button (JK) and switching of shutter
mode with the Set button (R) are disabled.
0
You can set the controllable range for the
Automatic Shutter in [Main Menu] B [Camera
Function
] B [EEI Limit].
(A P
99 [ EEI Limit ] )
Setting the ND Filter
Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the
appropriate range.
Switch according to the brightness of the object.
When the position on the switch is changed, the
selected
position of the ND filter is displayed on the
LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
(Display 2 screen)
Memo :
0
When [
Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display
Settings] B [ND Filter] is set to “Off”, the position
of the ND filter will not be displayed.
(A P
110 [ ND Filter ] )
.
ND FILTER
1/64
1/16
1/4
OFF
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00:00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
ND 1 / 64
Memo :
0
It
is recommended to use the ND filter to set the
lens aperture to less than F8.
ND Filter Warning Display
In order to adjust the amount of light when you are
shooting
at a relatively bright location, the diameter
of the iris may become extremely small, causing
blurry effects to occur as a result.
This phenomenon is known as “small aperture
diffraction”. You can make appropriate use of ND
filters to prevent it from occurring.
This unit displays an ND filter warning when
necessary to prompt you to select an appropriate
ND filter.
1
Set [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display
Settings
] B [ND Filter] to “On+Assist”.
(A
P110 [ ND Filter ] )
2
When the iris diameter becomes too small
while adjusting the light intensity, or when
an ND filter is used in a dimly-lit location,
the ND filter display starts blinking.
58
Shooting
Adjusting the White
Balance
Adjust the white balance according to the color
temperature of the lighting. You can select the
adjustment mode according to the shooting
conditions.
As the color of the light (color temperature) varies
according to the light source, it is necessary to
readjust the white balance when the main light
source illuminating the subject changes.
.
FULL AUTO
ON
OFF
PRESET
B
A
WHT BAL SHUTTER
Manual White Balance Mode (Manual
Switching)
1
Press the [WHT BAL] button to set to
Manual White Balance mode.
0
You can select the white balance with the
[WHT BAL B/A/PRESET
] selection switch.
0
Use the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET
] selection
switch to select “PRESET” (preset mode),
“A” (memory A mode), or “B” (memory B
mode).
0
The
value assigned to the switch appears on
the screen.
Memo :
0
This is fixed at
“FAW” when the [FULL AUTO]
switch of the camera recorder is set to “ON”.
Preset Mode (PRESET)
0
Two different color temperature settings are
registered on this camera recorder. You can
switch between them using the [y] button.
(Default setting: “3200K
” 1 “5600K”)
0
Press the [y] button to switch to a different
color temperature.
(“Preset Temp.
” 1 “Alternative Temp.”)
1
Set the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] switch to
“
PRESET”.
2
Press the [y] button.
Setting the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.]
Values
You can change both the color temperature
settings in the Preset mode in the menu.
1
Open the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.]
menu.
0
Select [Main Menu]
B
[Camera Process]
B
[White Balance]
B
[Preset Temp.] and
[Alternative Temp.], and press the Set button
(
R
).
0
The Color Temperature setting screen
appears.
.
Color Temperature
Detailed Selection
Screen
Color Temperature Selection Screen
2
Select the color temperature.
0
When selecting from a setting value (Color
Temperature Selection screen), use the
cross-shaped
button (JK) to select the color
temperature.
[Setting Values: 7500K, 6500K, 5600K,
5200K, 4800K, 4200K, R3200K, 3000K,
2800K]
0
To select detailed values (Color
Temperature Detailed Selection screen)
0
Press the cross-shaped button (I) to
display the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
0
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to
select a color temperature.
[Setting Values: 2300K to 15000K (in
100K increments)]
59
Shooting
Memo :
0
Use the cross-shaped button (I) to switch
between the Color Temperature Selection
screen and the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
0
If [White
Balance] has been assigned to the user
button, pressing the assigned user button will
display the Color Temperature Selection
screen.
(A P
38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode
(B)
0
Set to the white balance saved in Memory A or
Memory B.
0
When the [
WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch is set to “A” or “B”, press the [y] button
to execute white balance. The white balance will
be automatically adjusted and the adjusted
value will be saved in Memory A or Memory B.
1
Prepare the camera recorder.
A
Set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “ON”.
B
Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto mode.
C
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2
Set the [ND FILTER] switch according to the
lighting.
(A P58 [Setting the ND Filter] )
3
Set the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch to “A” or “B”.
4
Locate a place with similar lighting conditions
as the object to be shot, place a white object
near the center of the screen and zoom in to
fill the screen with white.
5
Press the [
y
] (Auto White Balance) button.
0
The white detection frame appears when Auto
White Balance is activated. Fill the frame with
white completely.
0
While Auto White Balance is starting up,
“A<
y
>” or “B<
y
>” appears on the screen.
(
y
mark appears blinking)
0
After the correct white balance is obtained, an
estimated value of the current color
temperature is displayed.
.
100min
50min
282min
A
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00: 00:00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20 10 0
100min
50min
282min
A
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00: 00:00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20 10 0
3700K
Result Display
[AWB] Activating
White Detection
Frame
Blinking
Caution :
0
Do not use highly reflective objects, such as
metals. Doing so may result in improper white
balance adjustment.
0
The Auto White Balance function cannot provide
optimum white balance with an object outside the
adjustment range, for example when it contains
only a single color or not enough white color.
Error Message
If the Auto White Balance adjustment is not
correctly completed, one of the following
messages will appear for about 3 seconds.
Message Status
Auto White　* NG:
Object
(*A or B)
Displayed when there is not
enough white color on the
object, or when the color
temperature is not suitable.
Use
another white object and
adjust the white balance
again.
Auto White * Error:
Low Light
(*A or B)
Displayed when the lighting is
dark. Increase the lighting
and adjust the white balance
again.
Auto White * Error:
Over Light
(*A or B)
Excessive illumination.
Displayed
when the lighting is
too bright. Decrease the
lighting and adjust the white
balance again.
60
Shooting
White Paint Adjustment
You can fine-tune the white balance saved in
Memory A or Memory B.
1
Select [Main Menu] B [
Camera Process] B
[White Balance] B [AWB Paint] and press
the Set button (R).
The White Paint Adjustment screen appears.
.
1
2
Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
.
3
Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
.
B Value
R Value
Memo :
0
Selecting [y]
will usually clear the White Paint
Adjustment value. But when [Main Menu] B
[Camera Process] B [White Balance] B [Clear
Paint After AWB] is set to “Off”, values will not
be cleared even when [y] is selected.
(A P106
[ Clear Paint After AWB ] )
0
If [White Balance] has been assigned to the user
button, pressing the assigned user button will
display the AWB Paint Adjustment screen.
(A P
38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Automatic White Balance Mode (FAW:
Fulltime Auto White balance)
0
Press the
[WHT BAL] button on the side control
panel to enter into Automatic White Balance
mode.
0
“<FAW>” appears on the screen.
0
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera
recorder to “ON
” to enter Automatic White
Balance mode. An appropriate white balance is
automatically adjusted according to the color
temperature of the lighting on the object.
0
White balance switching with the
[WHT BAL
B/A/PRESET] selection switch is disabled.
.
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00: 00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
FAW
FAW
Caution :
0
The accuracy of
[FAW] is inferior to that of Auto
White Balance.
0
When the power of the camera recorder is
turned
on with the [FAW] mode selected, it takes
about 15 seconds for the colors to stabilize.
Memo :
0
When [Main Menu]
B
[Camera Function]
B
[User
Switch Set]
B
[AE Lock] is set to “AE/WB”, the
white balance when the user button that is
assigned [AE Lock] is pressed can be fixed.
(A P101 [ AE Lock ] )
0
If [White
Balance] has been assigned to the user
button, pressing the assigned user button will
display the FAW Paint Adjustment screen.
(A P
38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
61
Shooting
FAW Paint Adjustment
You can fine-adjust the white balance that was
automatically adjusted.
1
Select [Main Menu] B [
Camera Process] B
[White Balance] B [FAW Paint] and press
the Set button (R).
The FAW Paint Adjustment screen appears.
.
1
2
Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
.
3
Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
.
B Value
R Value
Adjusting the Camera
Image
The picture quality of the camera can be set using
the [Camera Process
] menu.
As the adjustments are shown on the screen, you
can adjust the values while checking the picture
quality on the camera.
0
[
Detail]
0
[Master Black]
0
[Black Toe
]
0
[Knee]
0
[White Clip
]
0
[Gamma
]
0
[WDR]
0
[White Balance
]
0
[Color Matrix
]
0
[Color Gain
]
0
[Reverse Picture]
0
[Shooting Mode
]
Memo :
0
For details of the respective items, see the
[Camera Process
] menu.
(A P102
[Camera Process Menu] )
62
Shooting
Using the Image Stabilizer
Reduces blurring of images due to camera shake.
1
Check whether the image stabilizer feature
is turned ON or OFF.
If the image stabilizer icon (i/j) does not
appear on the screen display, the image
stabilizer function is OFF.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00:00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
2
Press the [OIS/2] button to turn ON the
image stabilizer feature (when image
stabilizer feature is OFF).
The image stabilizer feature switches between
ON and OFF with every press of the [OIS/2
]
button.
0
OFF:
Use
this setting when the camera recorder is
secured, such as when using a tripod.
0
ON:
Reduces blurring of images due to camera
shake.
Memo :
0
Select [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[OIS
] B [Level] to set the correction level.
(A P98
[ Level ] )
0
Correction by this feature may not be sufficient
when camera shake is too strong.
0
“OIS” is assigned to [OIS/2] button in factory
default.
0
“OIS” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(A P
38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
Audio Recording
You
can record audio from the two channels (CH1/
CH2) in synchronization with video images on this
camera recorder.
Select from the four options below to record the
audio.
0
Built-in Microphone
0
Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
0
Microphone connected to
[INPUT1] terminal
0
Microphone connected to
[INPUT2] terminal
.
FULL AUTO
ON
OFF
CH1
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
AUTO
MANUAL
CH2
INPUT2INPUT1
PEAKINGLCD BRIGHT
CH2CH1
LINE
MIC
MIC
+48V
INPUT2
INPUT1
AUX
POWER
/CHG
Selecting Audio to Be Recorded in Each
Channel
Select the audio to be recorded in CH1/CH2.
- Switch Setting Connected Devices
CH1 INT
0
Built-in Microphone
0
Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
INPUT1 Microphone connected to
[INPUT1
] terminal
CH2 INT
0
Built-in Microphone
0
Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
INPUT1 Microphone connected to
[INPUT1
] terminal
INPUT2 Microphone connected to
[INPUT2] terminal
Memo :
0
When “INT” is set, the built-in microphone is
disabled if a microphone is connected to the
[AUX]
terminal; audio from the microphone
connected to the [AUX] is recorded.
0
When “INT” is selected, set the reference input
level in
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set]
B [Int. Mic Gain]/[AUX Gain].
(A P
113 [ Int. Mic Gain ] )
(A P113 [ AUX Gain ] )
63
Shooting
Setting Input Channel to [INPUT1]/[INPUT2]
Select
the audio to input to [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]
terminals with the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode
switch.
Setting Description
[LINE] Use this setting when connecting to
an audio device or other equipment.
The reference input level is +4 dBu.
[MIC] Use this setting when connecting to
a dynamic microphone.
[MIC+48V] Use this setting when connecting to
a microphone (phantom
microphone) that requires a +48 V
power supply.
Memo :
0
When “MIC” or “MIC+48V” is selected, set the
reference input level in [Main Menu
] B [A/V
Set] B [Audio Set] B [Input1 Mic Ref.]/[Input2
Mic Ref.].
(A P113
[ Input1 Mic Ref. ] )
(A P113 [ Input2 Mic Ref. ] )
Caution :
0
When
connecting a device that does not require
a +48 V power supply, make sure that it is not
set to the “MIC+48V” position.
0
When the [
INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode switch is
set to “MIC”, make sure that a microphone is
connected to the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal. If
you increase the recording level when a
microphone is not connected, noise from the
input terminal may be recorded.
0
When a microphone is not connected to the
[INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal, set the
[INPUT1]/
[INPUT2] mode switch to “LINE” or adjust the
volume with the [CH1]/[CH2] recording level
adjustment knob.
Adjusting Audio Recording Level
You can select to adjust the audio recording levels
for the two channels (CH1/CH2) manually or
automatically.
.
FULL AUTO
ON
OFF
CH1
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
AUTO
MANUAL
CH2
L
C
CH2CH1
Manual Adjustment Mode (Manual
Adjustment)
0
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch on
the camera recorder to
“MANUAL” to enter the
manual adjustment mode, and use the [CH1]/
[CH2] recording level adjustment knob to set the
recording level.
0
You can adjust the level manually during the
recording, recording standby, and stop modes.
o Setting Input Channel to
“INPUT1”/“INPUT2”
1
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch to
“MANUAL” for the
channel to be adjusted manually.
2
Turn the corresponding [CH1]/[CH2]
recording level adjustment knob to adjust
the level.
When [Audio Set] B [Limiter
] is set to “Off”,
adjust such that the audio level meter does not
light up at -2 dB even for loud sounds.
(A P113 [ Limiter ] )
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00: 00:00.00
40 30 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
4030 20 10 0
-2dB
64
Shooting
o Setting
Input Channel to “INT” for Both [CH1] and
[CH2]
1
Set the [CH1 AUTO/MANUAL] selection
switch to
“MANUAL”.
2
Turn the [CH1] recording level adjustment
knob to adjust the level.
When the built-in microphone and the [AUX]
input terminal are used, the recording levels of
[CH1
] and [CH2] are interlocked.
This is also effective when the [CH1 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch is set to [CH2].
Memo :
0
Select [Limiter], [AGC Response], [AGC Mode],
or [Int. Mic Separation] in the menu to set the
recording audio.
0
If [Limiter] is set to other than “Off”, the limiter
operates according to the value set.
(A P
113 [ Limiter ] )
0
For the reference level to be recorded to an SD
card, set [Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio
Set] B [Ref. Level] to “-20dB”, “-18dB”, or
“-12dB”. (common for CH1/CH2)
(A P
113 [ Ref. Level ] )
0
The operations of the [CH2] recording level
adjustment knob and [CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch are disabled.
Automatic Adjustment Mode
0
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection
switch to “AUTO” or the [FULL AUTO] switch to
“ON” to enter Automatic Adjustment mode. The
audio recording level is set automatically
according to the input level.
0
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”,
mode switching with the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch is disabled.
Memo :
0
When
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B
[Limiter] is set to “Off” while in the automatic
adjustment mode, the limiter operates at
-5 dBFS.
0
If [Limiter] is set to other than
“Off”, the limiter
operates according to the value set.
(A
P113 [ Limiter ] )
0
When [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Audio On FULL
AUTO] is set to “SW Set”, you can switch the
audio recording mode with the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch on the
camera recorder even if the [FULL AUTO]
switch is set to “ON”.
(A P
115 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )
Monitoring Audio Sound
During Recording Using a
Headphone
You can check the recorded audio using
headphone.
.
AUX
MONITOR
CH1
BOTH
CH2
3
1
2
1
Connect the headphone.
2
Select the channel to monitor with the
[MONITOR
] selection switch.
Setting Description
[CH1] Outputs the audio recorded in [CH1].
[BOTH] Outputs the audio recorded in
[CH1/CH2].
[CH2] Outputs the audio recorded in [CH2].
3
Use the [MONITOR +/-] button
to adjust the
monitor volume.
Memo :
0
Audio during recording is not output from the
monitor speaker.
0
Warning tone is output when there is an
abnormality
in the camera recorder or when the
battery is low.
(A P182 [Warning Tone] )
Selecting Audio Output Method When the
[MONITOR] Selection Switch Is Set to “BOTH”
When a stereo type earphone jack is connected,
perform the following setting to output stereo
sound.
1
Set the [MONITOR] selection switch to
“BOTH”.
2
Set [Main Menu] B [
A/V Set] B [Audio Set]
B [Monitor] to “Stereo”.
(A P
115 [ Monitor ] )
Memo :
0
You can set the volume of the warning tone in
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Alarm
Level]. (“Off”/“Low”/“Middle”/“High”)
(A P
115 [ Alarm Level ] )
65
Shooting
Time Code and User’s Bit
Time
code and user’s bit data are recorded with the
video in this camera recorder.
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording. (Display screen)
Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording.
The
display differs according to the menu settings.
1
Set [Main Menu]
B
[LCD/VF]
B
[Display
Settings]
B
[TC/UB] to settings other than
“Off”.
(A P111 [ TC/UB ] )
When “TC” or “UB” is selected, time code or
user’s bit data is displayed respectively on the
display screen.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 64
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00: 00:00.00
40 30 20
10
0
5 . 6 f t
00:00:00.00
FF EE DD 20
Memo :
0
Values recorded on the SD card is displayed in
Media mode.
Time Code Operation Mode
Set the time code operation in [Main Menu
] B [TC/
UB] B [TC Generator].
(A P107 [ TC Generator ] )
Setting Description
Free Run(Ext) This mode synchronizes another
camera recorder connected to the
[TC] terminal. The time code
operates in the run mode at all
times regardless of the recording
status.
It continues to run even when the
power of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Free Run The time code operates in the run
mode
at all times regardless of the
recording status.
It continues to run even when the
power of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Rec Run The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. It
continues
to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD
card is not replaced. If the SD card
is removed and recording is made
on another card, time code will be
recorded on the new card from
where it was left off in the previous
card.
Regen The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. When the
SD card is replaced, the last time
code recorded on the card is read
and
recorded on a new card so that
the time code continues in running
order.
(A P67 [Setting Time Code] )
Memo :
0
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame
”,
“Interval Rec” or “Frame Rec”, and [TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, Rec Run is activated.
0
When [
Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [WFormat]/[YFormat] is
set to “AVCHD”, Pre Rec enters Free Run mode.
(A
P118 [WFormat a, Format b] )
(A P119 [ Y Format a ] )
66
Shooting
Setting Time Code
Generator
Presetting the Time Code
Time code and user’s bit data generated from the
internal time code generator are recorded.
This section describes how to set
[TC/UB] B [TC
Preset].
(A P107 [ TC Preset ] )
Memo :
0
When [Main Menu
] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [Frame & Bit Rate] is set
to “50p”, “50i”, “25p”, or “24p”, “Drop” cannot be
selected.
(A P
118 [WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit
Rate b] )
0
You
can configure the setting without accessing
the [TC/UB] menu screen.
(A P
68 [Setting Time Code without Opening
the Menu] )
Required Settings Before Preset
1
Set [TC/UB] B [
TC Generator] to “Rec
Run” or “Free Run”.
(A P
107 [ TC Generator ] )
0
[Rec Run]:
Preset data in the time code generator
operates in run mode during recording
mode. Set this when recording continuous
time code in connecting frames.
0
[Free Run]:
Time
code starts to operate in run mode from
the preset time in the time code generator.
2
Select the framing mode for the time code
generator
(only when the frame rate setting
is “60” or “30”).
Set using [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [Drop
Frame].
(A P
107 [ Drop Frame ] )
0
[Drop]:
Sets
the run mode of the time code generator
to drop frame mode. Use this setting when
placing emphasis on the recording time.
0
[
Non Drop]:
Sets the run mode of the time code generator
to non-drop frame mode. Use this setting
when placing emphasis on the number of
frames.
Memo :
Drop frame/non-drop frame mode
0
When the frame rate setting in
[Main Menu] B
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[Frame & Bit Rate] is “60p”, “60i”, or “30p”, the
actual number of frames per second is
approximately 59.94 (29.97). However, the time
code processing standard is “60p”, “60i”, or
“30p” frames. To make up for the frame number
discrepancy, the drop frame mode (Drop) drops
the 00 frame and 01 frame every minute except
for minutes that are multiples of 10. However, in
the case of “60p”, the 00, 01, 02 and 03 frame
are dropped.
0
The
non-drop frame mode (Non Drop) does not
drop frames and ignores the discrepancy with
the actual time.
Setting Time Code
.
OIS / 2 LOLUX / 3
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
67
Shooting
1
Select [Main Menu] B [
TC/UB] B [TC
Preset] and press the Set button (R).
(A P
107 [ TC Preset ] )
The [TC Preset] screen appears.
.
1
Memo :
0
When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”,
the parameter is displayed as “Regen”
and cannot be selected.
(A P
107 [ TC Generator ] )
2
Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
.
During drop frame
During non-drop
frame
Cursor
Memo :
0
Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the time digit (left).
3
Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
0
The time code is set and the screen returns
to [TC/UB].
0
To cancel the setting, press the
[CANCEL]
button.
4
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
Setting Time Code without Opening the
Menu
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1 OIS / 2
TIME CODE
Memo :
0
Settings
cannot be made in the following cases.
0
[TC/UB] B [TC Generator] has been set to
“Regen”.
0
Menu screen is displayed.
0
The camera recorder is not in the Camera
mode.
Setting Time Code
1
Set [TC/UB] B [
TC Generator] to settings
other than “Regen”.
(A P
107 [ TC Generator ] )
2
Hold down the [MENU/THUMB] button and
press the
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The [TC Preset] setting screen appears.
.
During drop frame
During non-drop frame
Cursor
3
Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
Memo :
0
Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the time digit (left).
68
Shooting
4
Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
0
The time code is set and the screen returns
to the normal screen.
0
To cancel the setting, press the
[CANCEL]
button.
Caution :
0
When
the camera recorder is switched to Media
mode during editing, editing will be canceled
and the screen will close.
0
When editing the time code, operation of the
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] and [OIS/2] buttons that are
configured in [Main Menu] B [Camera
Function] B [User Switch Set] is disabled. The
[OIS/2] button functions as the number reset
button.
(A P
100 [User Switch Set Item] )
Recording Time Code in Continuation of
the Recorded Time Code on SD Card
This camera recorder is equipped with the time
code reader.
1
Set [TC/UB] B [
TC Generator] to “Regen”.
0
When the camera recorder enters from
recording
standby mode to recording mode,
it reads the time code already recorded on
the SD card and records the new time code
in continuation of that value.
0
The same data as the user’s bit already
recorded on the SD card is recorded.
Memo :
0
When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator
] is set to
“Regen”, the framing mode of the time code
follows the settings in [TC/UB] B [Drop Frame]
instead of the clip settings.
(A P107
[ Drop Frame ] )
Setting the User’s Bit
You can add the date, time or an 8-digit
hexadecimal number as the user’s bit to the
recorded image.
.
OIS / 2 LOLUX / 3
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
Selecting a Recording Mode
Recording date/time information to the user’s
bit
1
Set [Main Menu] B [
TC/UB] B [UB Mode] to
“Date” or “Time”, and press the Set button
(R).
(A P
107 [ UB Mode ] )
The date or time information is recorded to the
user’s bit.
Memo :
0
When “Date
” or “Time” is set, [Preset] appears
as “-” and cannot be set.
0
“Time
” is displayed in the 24-hour format.
Presetting the User’s Bit
Recording arbitrary information (8-digit
hexadecimal) to the user’s bit
69
Shooting
1
Set [Main Menu] B [
TC/UB] B [UB Mode] to
“Preset”, and press the Set button (R).
(A P
107 [ UB Mode ] )
The [UB Mode] setting screen appears.
.
1
Memo :
0
When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”,
the parameter is displayed as “Regen”
and cannot be selected.
(A P
107 [ TC Generator ] )
2
Select [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B “Preset
”
and press the Set button (R).
The [Preset] setting screen appears.
3
Use the cross-shaped button (HI)
to place
the cursor at the item to set, then use the
cross-shaped button (JK) to change the
values.
Numbers between 0 and 9 or alphabets
between A and F can be specified for the user’s
bit.
.
Cursor
Memo :
0
Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the left.
4
Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
0
The user’s bit is set and the screen returns
to [TC/UB]
.
0
To cancel the setting, press the
[CANCEL]
button.
5
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
Synchronizing Time Code
on Another Camera
This
camera recorder is equipped with a time code
input/output terminal ([TC] terminal).
Connect another camera recorder to the [TC]
terminal and synchronize to the time code.
1
Connect the [TC] terminal of the master
device with the
[TC] terminal of the slave
device.
Set the [TC
IN/OUT] switch of the master device
to “OUT”, and the [TC IN/OUT] switch of the
slave device to “IN”.
.
AUX
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVICE
AV
A
BATT.RE L EASE
POWER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
REC
HOST
AUX
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVICE
AV
A
BATT.RELEASE
POWER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
REC
HOST
IN
OUT
TC
IN
OUT
TC
[IN]
Slave Device
(This Camera Recorder)
[OUT]
Master Device
70
Shooting
Settings and Operation of the Camera
Recorder
1
Set to Camera mode.
(A P
18 [Operation Modes] )
2
Set [TC/UB] B [TC Generator
] as follows.
0
Slave device:
Select “Free Run(Ext)
”.
0
Master device:
Select “Free Run
”.
3
Set LCD monitor or viewfinder to Display 1
screen.
4
Set the master device and run the time
code.
0
When the built-in time code generator is
synchronized with the external time code
data input, the Z icon on Display 1 screen
lights up.
0
When
time code is not synchronized or time
code input is not available, the Z icon goes
out.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /6 4
12 :34 :56
Jan 24,2012
00:00: 00.00
40 30 20
10
0
5 . 6 f t
Memo :
0
The built-in time code generator will continue
operation even when the master device is
disconnected after synchronization.
0
User’s
bit will become data in the master device.
0
While the [TC] terminal is connected, the time
code may be out of synchronization when the
[A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [HDMI/SDI Out]
setting of the Master device and Slave device is
being changed.
(A P112
[ HDMI/SDI Out ] )
Setting Zebra Pattern
When the luminance level range for displaying
zebra patterns is specified, diagonal lines (zebra
pattern) are displayed at areas with the specified
luminance levels during shooting.
.
AE L
EVE
L
PUSH AUTO
ZEBRA/5
1
Set the zebra display pattern.
Select the display pattern in [LCD/VF] B
[Shooting Assist] B [Zebra].
2
Specify the brightness (luminance) level
range for displaying zebra pattern.
Specify the upper and lower limits of the
luminance level in
[LCD/VF] B [Shooting
Assist] B [Zebra] B [Top] and [Bottom].
Item Settings Options
Top Upper luminance
limit for displaying
[Zebra]
5% - 100%, Over
(in
5 % increments)
Bottom Lower luminance
limit for displaying
[Zebra]
0% - 100% (in 5 %
increments)
3
Display the zebra pattern.
Press the [ZEBRA/5]
button to display the zebra
pattern in the specified range.
.
During zebra pattern display, (zebra icon)
is displayed on the display screen in Camera
mode.
Memo :
0
“Zebra” is assigned to
[ZEBRA/5] button in
factory default.
0
“Zebra” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(A P38
[Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
71
Shooting
Setting Spot Meter
The brightness of the object during shooting is
displayed.
This function is useful when setting video or stage
lighting or when specifying camera exposure.
A
cursor indicating the location and the brightness
(%) of that location are displayed in the images
shown on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
0
Zebra patterns display the brightness of output
video signals.
(A P71
[Setting Zebra Pattern] )
0
This function allows you to check the brightness
of input images from the lens without depending
on image processing such as gamma curve. The
dynamic range of the camera recorder is 400 %
and a brightness range of 0 % to 400 % and
above is displayed.
Memo :
0
Spot
meter may not be consistent with the zebra
display range. When [Camera Process] B
[Gamma] is set to “Cinema”, the 100IRE output
is not consistent with the 100 % display.
When an object of more than 400 % luminance
is detected, it is displayed as “400 %”.
(A
P103 [ Gamma ] )
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
1
Select one of the following from [Main
Menu
] B [Camera Function] B [User Switch
Set] B [Spot Meter].
(A P100
[ Spot Meter ] )
Item Settings
Color of Frame
Indicating the
Position
Max & Min
Displays the
brightness (%)
and positions of
the brightest and
darkest areas in
the screen.
Frames may also
be stopped at the
current positions.
0
Max: Green
0
Min: Yellow
Max Displays the
brightness (%)
and
position of the
brightest area in
the screen.
Frames may also
be stopped at the
current positions.
Green
Min Displays the
brightness (%)
and
position of the
darkest area in the
screen. Frame
may also be
stopped at the
current positions.
Yellow
Manual Displays the
brightness (%) of
the specified
position.
Green
(Blinks in green
when
specifying
the position)
2
Assign the “Spot Meter” function to any of
the user buttons.
(A P
38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
3
Press the user button that is assigned with
“Spot Meter
”.
The operation switches as below when the
button is pressed.
72
Shooting
When [Max & Min]/[Max]/[Min] is selected
A
The cursors appear according to the setting
when the button is pressed.
Green and yellow frames appear, and the
brightness levels of these areas are displayed.
.
P 13000K
P 13000K
1/100
1/100
F1.6
F1.6
0dB
0dB
AE+6
AE+6
ND 1/64
ND 1/64
12:34:56
12:34:56
Jan 12,2016
Jan 12,2016
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
5.
5.6 f t
100min
100min
50min
50min
282min
282min
(Yellow)
Cursor
(Green)
Cursor
Brightness Indication
B
Hold down the button in the state in A, the
positions of the brightest (Max) and darkest
(Min) areas in the screen are automatically
detected with regard to the changes of the
object, and the brightness level of these areas
are displayed.
.
P 13000K
P 13000K
1/100
1/100
F1.6
F1.6
0dB
0dB
AE+6
AE+6
ND 1/64
ND 1/64
12:34:56
12:34:56
Jan 12,2016
Jan 12,2016
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
5.
5.6 f t
100min
100min
50min
50min
282min
282min
(Min: Yellow)
Cursor
(Max: Green)
Cursor
Brightness Indication
C
Pressing the button in the state in B stops the
automatic position detection. The frames are
fixed at the stopped positions and the
brightness levels are displayed.
D
By pressing the button, the cursors and
brightness indication disappear.
.
P 13000K
P 13000K
1/100
1/100
F1.6
F1.6
0dB
0dB
AE+6
AE+6
ND 1/64
ND 1/64
12:34:56
12:34:56
Jan 12,2016
Jan 12,2016
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
5.
5.6 f t
100min
100min
50min
50min
282min
282min
When [Manual] is selected
A
The brightness of the cursor position is
displayed when the button is pressed.
.
P 13000K
P 13000K
1/100
1/100
F1.6
F1.6
0dB
0dB
AE+6
AE+6
ND 1/64
ND 1/64
12:34:56
12:34:56
Jan 12,2016
Jan 12,2016
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
5.
5.6 f t
100min
100min
50min
50min
282min
282min
Cursor (Green)
Brightness
Indication
B
By pressing the button, the cursors and
brightness indication disappear.
.
P 13000K
P 13000K
1/100
1/100
F1.6
F1.6
0dB
0dB
AE+6
AE+6
ND 1/64
ND 1/64
12:34:56
12:34:56
Jan 12,2016
Jan 12,2016
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
5.
5.6 f t
100min
100min
50min
50min
282min
282min
C
Hold
down the button in the state in A or B, the
cursor blinks in green.
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button
(JKHI) to specify the position to display the
brightness.
When you decide on the position, press the Set
button (R) to confirm.
.
P 13000K
P 13000K
1/100
1/100
F1.6
F1.6
0dB
0dB
AE+6
AE+6
ND 1/64
ND 1/64
12:34:56
12:34:56
Jan 12,2016
Jan 12,2016
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
5.
5.6 f t
100min
100min
50min
50min
282min
282min
(Blinks in green)
Cursor
Brightness Indication
D
Frames are fixed at the stopped positions and
the brightness is displayed.
Memo :
0
When moving the cursor position,
[Shutter]/[AE
Level] control is disabled.
0
When
the brightness is 0 % in the entire screen,
the frame is fixed in the center.
0
If the cursor is outside the “4:3” range, changing
[Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set] B
[Record Format] B [SD Aspect] from “16:9” to
“4:3” restores the cursor to the default position.
(A
P119 [ SD Aspect ] )
73
Shooting
Acquiring Positioning
Information by GPS a
This camera recorder comes with a built-in GPS
function. The GPS function is able to record the
positioning information.
During
playback, you can also display the recorded
information on the playback screen.
(A P88 [Playing back] )
1
Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [GPS]
to
“On”.
0
Positioning starts when the H icon on the
display screen starts blinking.
0
After positioning is complete, the H icon
switches to a solid light and records the
positioning information during shooting.
0
The icon that appears on the screen
changes
according to the condition of signal
reception from the GPS satellite.
0
The GPS function is able to record the
positioning information. However, the date/
time information (atomic clock) can be
recorded only when [Format] is set to
“AVCHD” on the slot to record to.
.
0
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
12 :34 :56
Jan 1 2,2016
00: 00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
Display
Reception
Status
Positioning Status
.
(Yellow)
[GPS] is set to
“On”, but signal
cannot be
received
GPS signal cannot
be received. UTC
and positioning
information cannot
be obtained.
.
(Blink)
GPS search in
progress
UTC information
can be obtained,
but not positioning
information.
.
GPS reception
in progress
(signal strength:
weak)
Receiving weak
GPS signal. UTC
and positioning
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
.
GPS reception
in progress
(signal strength:
medium)
Receiving GPS
signal. UTC and
positioning
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
Display
Reception
Status
Positioning Status
.
GPS reception
in progress
(signal strength:
strong)
Receiving strong
GPS signal. UTC
and positioning
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
(No
display)
GPS function is
turned off
The [GPS] item is
set to “Off”.
Memo :
0
If positioning cannot be performed after waiting
for several minutes, this means GPS reception
is poor, and there is difficulty in receiving data.
Move to an open place with no obstructions.
Otherwise,
GPS information will not be recorded
when shooting is performed.
0
Signal may not be received depending on
circumstances such as locations that are
indoors or surrounded by tall buildings, or the
geographical conditions.
Precision error may occur in the position
information depending on the conditions of
reception.
0
Even when positioning is in progress,
information may be disrupted depending on the
condition of signal reception.
Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately
(Clip Review)
You can check (review) the last recorded video clip
on the screen.
However, the video clip cannot be played back if
the settings of the camera recorder are different
from the video format (Resolution/Frame & Bit
Rate/SD Aspect) of the clip.
(A P118
[WResolution a, Resolution b] )
(A P119 [ Y Resolution a ] )
(A P118 [WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit
Rate b] )
(A P119 [ Y Frame & Bit Rate a ] )
(A P119 [ SD Aspect ] )
Memo :
0
To
use this function, assign “Clip Review” to any
of the user buttons. “Clip Review” is assigned to
[C.REVIEW/7] button in factory default.
0
“Clip
Review” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(A P38
[Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
74
Shooting
.
AUX
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVICE
AV
A
BATT.RE L EA S E
POWER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
REC
HOST
C.REVIEW/7
1
Press the button assigned with the “Clip
Review” function during standby (“STBY”
is displayed).
Playback of the configured section starts.
Memo :
0
The video clip is played back according to the
setting in [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[User Switch Set
] B [Clip Review]. By default
setting (Last 5sec), the last 5 seconds of the clip
is played back.
(A P100
[ Clip Review ] )
0
When playback is complete, the camera
recorder exits Clip Review and returns to
“STBY” (recording standby) mode.
Caution :
0
During Clip Review, only the
[CANCEL] and
[REC] buttons are enabled.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel clip review
and return to “STBY” (recording standby) mode.
Press the [REC] button to cancel clip review and
enter recording mode. It will take some time to
start recording after the button is pressed.
0
When the last clip is less than 5 seconds, the
whole clip is played back.
0
Only
video clips in the currently selected slot can
be reviewed.
0
When there are no clips in the selected slot, Clip
Review function is disabled.
0
Clip Review is unavailable when Clip
Continuous Rec is paused (“STBYC”, yellow
text). To operate Clip Review, use the
[CANCEL]
button to set to “STBYC” (white text)
first.
(A P
80 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
0
Clip Review is unavailable when the camera
recorder
is connected to an external equipment
and the equipment is in recording state.
0
Clip Review is unavailable when operating View
Remote via network connection. a
(A P166 [View Remote Feature a] )
0
Clip Review does not function during live
streaming. a
0
Clip Review does not function while the record
trigger is in the REC state.
Splitting the Clips Freely
(Clip Cutter Trig)
You
can split the clips freely without having to stop
recording during shooting.
1
Assign the “Clip Cutter Trig” function to
any of the user buttons.
(A P
38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
2
Press the user button that is assigned with
“Clip Cutter Trig
” during shooting.
A clip cut icon (Q) appears on the display
screen for 3 seconds, and the clip is split.
.
P 13000K 1/ 100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE
+
6
40 30 20 10
0
ND 1/ 64
12 :34 :56
Jan 24 , 2012
00:00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
Memo :
0
Clips cannot be split again for a few seconds
after the operation is performed.
0
This item cannot be used when
[Slot Mode] is
set to “Backup”.
0
Available only when
[System] is set to “HD” or
“SD”.
(A P78
[Backup Rec] )
0
This item cannot be used when [Rec Mode] is
set to a value other than “Normal” or “Pre Rec”.
(A P
120 [ Rec Mode ] )
0
The split clips are recorded seamlessly without
interruptions in the video.
75
Shooting
Recording
Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions a
By
setting [System] to “HD+SD” or “HD+Web”, you
can record simultaneously at two different
definitions.
0
When HD+SD is selected:
Records a high-definition (HD) file to slot A and
a standard definition (SD) file to slot B at the
same time.
0
When HD+Web is selected:
Records a high-definition (HD) file to slot A and
a
low bit-rate web file to slot B at the same time.
Web files can be used as a proxy file for the HD
file.
Memo :
0
If
a recordable SD card is inserted into only one
of the slots, files will only be recorded to that slot.
0
The [Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.
0
Clip Cutter Trig is disabled.
0
[Slot Mode
] cannot be selected.
0
Clip Review can only be performed for slot A.
(“No Media
” appears if there is no card in slot A
while a card is inserted into slot B.)
0
Playback of web files is only possible from slot
B when “HD+Web
” is selected.
Series Rec
0
Series Rec mode is specified in the factory
default.
([Main
Menu] B [System] B [Record Set] B [Slot
Mode] is set to “Series”.)
(A P120
[ Slot Mode ] )
0
If both the slots are loaded with recordable
cards, pressing the [REC] button starts
recording only to the media in the selected slot.
When the remaining space in the selected
media runs out, recording continues by
automatically activating the media in the other
slot.
0
There is no indication on the display screen
when the Series Rec mode is set.
Dual Rec
0
If
both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the Dual Rec mode ([Slot Mode] is set to
“Dual”), pressing the [REC] button starts
recording simultaneously to the media in both
the slots.
0
The
clips recorded to the media in both the slots
are identical, and two clips of the same content
can be created only on this camera recorder.
(A P120 [ Slot Mode ] )
.
AUX
INPU
T2
INPU
T1
DEVICE
AV
A
BATT.RELEASE
POWER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
REC
HOST
REC
REC
HOLD
REC
A
B
Setting to Dual Rec Mode
1
Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Slot Mode] to “Dual”.
(A
P120 [ Slot Mode ] )
“DUAL” appears on the display screen.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /6 4
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
DUAL
76
Shooting
2
Start recording.
0
Insert recordable media in both slots, and
press the [REC] button.
0
In
the Dual Rec mode, recording to the media
in both slots starts at the same time.
0
Both the card slot marks turn red, and the
status indicators of both the card slots also
light up in red.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /6 4
12 :34 :56
Jan 24,2012
00:00: 00.00
40 30 20
10
0
5 . 6 f t
100min
50min
REC
Lit in red
3
Stop recording.
0
Press the [REC] button again.
0
Recording to both slots stops, and both the
card slot marks turn white.
0
The same clips are recorded to both cards.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /6 4
12 :34 :56
Jan 24,2012
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
100min
50min
White
Memo :
0
During
recording in the Dual Rec mode, both the
card slot marks light up in red.
0
During recording in the Dual Rec mode to two
cards with a different amount of remaining
space, if the space of one card runs out,
recording to both slots will stop automatically.
After recording stops, recording automatically
resumes for the card with remaining space.
Although the clips are separated in this case, the
clips can be seamlessly joined by arranging
them on the timeline of the editing software since
they are recorded seamlessly.
0
If the last clip on the cards that are inserted in the
two slots are different from each other, and the
time code operating mode is set to “Regen”, the
Regen mode for the selected card slot will be
enabled in the next recording.
Caution :
0
To
perform recording in the Dual Rec mode, it is
recommended that you start recording by
making use of two cards with the same capacity
and from the formatted state.
0
You can combine the use of the Dual Rec mode
with a special recording mode. While in the Dual
Rec mode, you can also set [Rec Mode] to
“Normal”, “Pre Rec”, “Interval Rec”, “Frame
Rec”, or “Variable Frame”.
(A P80
[Special Recording] )
0
When both slots are inserted with recordable
cards, the Dual Rec (simultaneous recording)
operation can be performed. If a recordable
media is only inserted in one of the slots, you can
also start recording with one card.
0
In the Dual Rec mode, continuous recording by
switching from one slot to another cannot be
performed. Continuous recording will not be
performed if a recordable media is inserted in a
slot after recording to the other slot has started.
0
When recording to one slot is in progress with
the recorder set to the Dual Rec mode, inserting
a recordable media to the other slot does not
enable the Dual Rec operation. To perform the
Dual Rec operation, stop recording temporarily
(excluding pausing recording in the Clip
Continuous Rec mode), and start again.
0
When one of the cards is accidentally removed
while recording is in progress in the Dual Rec
mode, recording to the card in the other slot will
continue. However, repair of the accidentally
removed card by the recovery function may fail.
0
If an error occurs on one of the cards while
recording is in progress in the Dual Rec mode,
recording of the erroneous card stops, while that
of the other card continues.
0
Operations on clips recorded in the Dual Rec
mode, such as clip deletion in the Media mode
or appending of OK marks, can only be
performed on the card in the selected slot.
77
Shooting
Backup Rec
0
The Backup Rec mode allows you to make use
of the media in slot B for backup recording by
controlling
the starting and stopping of recording
in slot B without using the [REC] button.
0
Start
or stop the recording using [Main Menu] B
[System] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode] B
[Backup Rec] or press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(A P
120 [ Slot Mode ] )
(A P100 [User Switch Set Item] )
.
Slot B
Slot A
Clip 3
Clip 2
Clip 1
Clip 2
Slot B stops
recording
Slot A stops
recording
Slot A starts
recording
Slot B starts
recording
Memo :
0
During the Backup Rec mode (when [Slot
Mode] is set to
“Backup”), you can control
recording to the 2 slots at different timings, and
backup recording can only be performed on this
camera recorder.
(A P
120 [ Slot Mode ] )
0
You can record without worrying about missing
the important scenes by setting slot B to be
always recording (backup recording) and using
the [REC] button to start/stop recording of only
the required scenes in slot A.
0
It is recommended to use a media with high
capacity in slot B.
1
Set [Main Menu] B [
System] B [Record
Set] B [Slot Mode] to “Backup”.
(A P
120 [ Slot Mode ] )
“BACKUP” appears on the display screen.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /6 4
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00:00: 00.00
5 . 6 f t
4030 20 10 0
BACKUP
2
Start backup recording. (Backup recording
into slot B)
0
Select “REC” in [Main Menu] B [System] B
[
Record Set] B [Slot Mode] B [Backup
Rec] and press the Set button (R).
(A P120
[ Slot Mode ] )
0
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(A
P100 [User Switch Set Item] )
0
Backup recording into slot B starts. (The
characters
“BACKUP” appear in red.)
0
The card slot mark of slot B turns red
(selected state), and the status indicator of
slot B also blinks in red.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /6 4
12 :34 :56
Jan 24,2012
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
100min
50min
100min
50min
Red (selected)
Red
78
Shooting
3
Start normal recording (normal recording
into slot A)
0
Press any of the
[REC] buttons.
0
Recording into the media in slot A starts.
(The characters “RREC” appear in red.)
0
The
card icon of slot A turns red (unselected
state), and the status indicator of slot A blinks
in red.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /6 4
12 :34 :56
Jan 24,2012
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
100min
50min
100min
50min
Red (not selected)
4
Stop normal recording.
0
Press any of the
[REC] buttons again.
0
Recording to slot A stops, and the card slot
mark
of slot A turns white (unselected state).
0
The characters “RREC” (red) changes back
to “STBY” (white).
0
The status indicator of slot A goes out.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /6 4
12 :34 :56
Jan 24,2012
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
100min
50min
100min
50min
White (not selected)
5
Stop backup recording.
0
Select
[STBY] in [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Record Set] B [Slot Mode] B [Backup
Rec] and press the Set button (R).
(A
P120 [ Slot Mode ] )
0
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(A P
100 [User Switch Set Item] )
0
Recording to slot B stops, and the card slot
mark
of slot B turns white (unselected state).
0
The characters
“BACKUP” changes back to
white.
0
The status indicator of slot B lights up in
green.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /6 4
12 :34 :56
Jan 24,2012
00:00: 00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
100min
50min
100min
50min
White
Memo :
0
During backup recording, if the space of one
card runs out, recording stops only for the card
that is full.
0
When recording to both slots is stopped,
recording
in the Regen mode will be enabled for
the card slot in which recording started.
0
When recording is started in the other slot while
recording to one slot, the clip being recorded is
split and simultaneous recording to the other
card starts.
0
When
recording is stopped for either slot A or B
while recording to both slots, the clip on the slot
which is still recording is split.
0
Although the clips are separated during
recording the clips can be seamlessly joined by
arranging them on the timeline of the editing
software since they are recorded seamlessly.
0
Clip Cutter Trig cannot be performed during
backup recording.
(A P75 [Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter
Trig)] )
0
When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, [Rec
Mode] can only be set to “Normal”.
(A P120
[ Rec Mode ] )
79
Shooting
Special Recording
Besides the normal recording mode, five special
recording methods are available in this camera
recorder. They are Pre Rec, Clip Continuous,
Frame Rec, Interval Rec and Variable Frame.
Select a mode from
[Record Set] B [Rec Mode].
Memo :
0
Set using [Main Menu
] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode].
(A P
120 [ Rec Mode ] )
Pre Rec
0
By
setting the number of seconds in the [Pre Rec
Time], you can start recording video and audio
before actual recording starts based on the [Pre
Rec Time] setting.
0
When
starting actual recording while the camera
recorder is in Recording Standby (STBYP)
mode, you can start recording a few seconds
earlier based on the [Pre Rec Time] setting.
0
Using Pre Rec allows you to record a complete
event without missing the initial scenes even if
you start the recording late.
Memo :
0
Pre Rec Time can be set to
“5sec”, “10sec”, or
“15sec” in [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Pre Rec Time].
0
When the frame rate setting in
[Main Menu] B
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “XHQ”, “15sec”
cannot be selected.
(A P
120 [ Pre Rec Time ] )
.
(Recording stops)
Press [REC]
(Recording starts)
Press [REC]
Recording starts a
number of seconds
earlier based on the
[Pre Rec Time] setting
(Recorded video and audio)
Completed Clip
1
Set [Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.
(A P
120 [ Rec Mode ] )
0
Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.
0
The display changes (
“STBY” B “STBYP”).
2
Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Pre Rec mode.
0
The display changes (“STBYP” B
“RRECP”)
and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
0
Press the
[REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECP”
B “STBYP”) and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green.
Caution :
0
When the interval between start and stop
recording is short, “STBYP” may not be
displayed immediately after recording is
complete.
“RRECP” B “STBYP”
(“STBY” blinks in red) B
“STBYP” is displayed.
0
When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and
“STOP” is
displayed.
0
Video and audio before the above mentioned
time may not be recorded after recording starts
in the following cases.
0
Immediately after power on
0
Immediately after recording stops
0
Immediately after switching from Media
mode to Camera mode
0
Immediately after setting
[Rec Mode]
0
Immediately after the end of Clip Review
0
Immediately after changing file format
0
Immediately after changing video format
Clip Continuous Rec
0
In normal recording, when the recording stops,
the
image, audio, and accompanying data from
the start till the end of the recording are recorded
as one “clip” on the SD card.
0
This mode allows you to consolidate several
rounds of “startstop recording” into one clip.
Example:
In normal recording, three clips are generated as
Recording 1, Recording 2, and Recording 3.
However, recording in this mode generates only
one clip.
80
Shooting
.
(Recorded video and audio)
Completed Clip
Recording 3
Recording 2
Recording 1
Recording 3
Recording 2
Recording 1
(Recording stops)
Press and hold [REC]
(Recording pauses)
Press [REC]
(Recording pauses)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press [REC]
(Recording starts)
Press [REC]
1
Set “Rec Mode” to “Clip Continuous”.
(A P
120 [ Rec Mode ] )
0
Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] to “Clip Continuous”.
0
The display changes (
“STBY” B “STBYC”).
2
Start recording. (Recording 1)
0
Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Clip Continuous mode.
0
The display changes (“STBYC” B
“RRECC”)
and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
3
Pause recording.
0
Press the
[REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”
B “STBYC” (yellow text)).
0
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
Memo :
0
When
the [CANCEL] button is pressed while the
camera recorder is paused (STBYC), the
display changes (“STBYC” (yellow text) B
“STBYC” (blinking yellow text) B “STBYC”
(white text)), and a “clip” is generated. The card
slot status indicator lights up in green.
4
Resume recording. (Recording 2)
0
Press the
[REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”
(yellow text) B “RRECC”).
0
The
card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
5
Pause recording.
0
Press the
[REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”
B “STBYC” (yellow text)).
0
The
card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
6
Resume recording. (Recording 3)
0
Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”
(yellow text) B “RRECC”).
0
The
card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
7
Press and hold the [REC] button.
0
Recording stops and the display changes
(“RRECC” B “STBYC”). A “clip” is
generated.
0
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
8
Press the [REC] button again.
0
The display changes (“STBYC” B
“RRECC”)
and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
0
A new “clip” is generated from here.
Memo :
0
The following operations cannot be performed
while
recording is paused (STBYC, yellow text).
0
Clip Review operation
(A P74 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
0
Switching SD card slots
0
Switching operation mode
(A P
18 [Operation Modes] )
Caution :
0
Do not remove the SD card during recording
(RRECC, red text) or recording pause
(STBYC, yellow text).
0
To remove the SD card in the
“Clip
Continuous” mode, press the [CANCEL] button,
check that “STBYC” (white text) is displayed
and the card slot status indicator lights up in
green before you remove the card.
0
When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and
“STOP” is
displayed.
0
When the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)
] switch is
turned off during recording or recording pause,
recording stops and power is cut off after a clip
is generated.
81
Shooting
Caution :
0
If the power is cut off due to low battery power,
a proper clip may not be generated.
Frame Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image
and accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
In this mode, recording starts with every press of
the [REC] button, and only the specified number of
frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Memo :
0
Audio will not be recorded.
0
Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file cannot be written to the
media.
0
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of
the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
0
After the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
.
Specific amount of data
Actual clips recorded to the media
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
(Padding data)
Normal recording
PausePausePause
Recording resumes
Recording resumes
Press [REC]Press [REC]
(Frame Rec stops)(Frame Rec starts)
Press and hold [REC]Press [REC]
1
Set [Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.
0
Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.
(A P120
[ Rec Mode ] )
0
The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYM”).
2
Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
0
Set using [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Frames].
(A P120
[ Rec Frames ] )
3
Start recording.
0
Press the [REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
0
The
display changes (“STBYM” B “RRECM”
B “STBYM” (yellow text)).
0
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
4
Repeat Frame Rec.
0
Press the [REC] button again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames]
and pause.
0
The display changes (“STBYM” B “RRECM”
B “STBYM” (yellow text)).
0
Frame Rec continues until the recording is
stopped (step 5).
5
Press and hold the [REC] button.
0
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
Caution :
0
Do not remove the SD card during recording
(“RRECM”, red text) or recording pause
(“STBYM”, yellow text).
0
To remove the SD card during Frame Rec, press
the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBYM”
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green before you remove
the card.
0
When [Main Menu
] B [TC/UB] B [TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec
Run”.
0
Audio cannot be recorded. A x mark appears
in the audio level meter display.
(A P132
[Audio Level Meter] )
82
Shooting
Interval Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image
and accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
In this mode, recording and pause are performed
repeatedly at the specified time interval. Only the
specified number of frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Memo :
0
Audio will not be recorded.
0
Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file will not be written to the
media.
0
After
the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
0
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
.
Specific amount of data
Actual clips recorded to the media
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
(Padding data)
Normal recording
PausePausePause
[Rec Interval][Rec Interval]
Recording resumes
Recording resumes
(Interval Rec stops)(Interval Rec starts)
Press [REC]Press [REC]
1
Set [Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.
0
Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [
Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.
(A P120
[ Rec Interval ] )
0
The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYN”).
2
Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames
].
Set using [Main Menu] B [
System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Frames].
(A P120 [ Rec Frames ] )
3
Set the time interval to start recording in
[Interval Rec].
Set using [Main Menu] B [
System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Interval].
(A P120 [ Rec Interval ] )
4
Start recording.
0
Press the
[REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
0
After the specified time in [Rec Interval] has
passed,
recording starts again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
0
Interval Rec continues until the recording is
stopped.
The
display changes (“STBYN” B “RRECN”
B “STBYN” (red text) B “RRECN” B
“STBYN” (red text)).
0
The
card slot status indicator blinks in green.
5
Press and hold the [REC] button.
0
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
0
The display becomes “STBYN”.
Caution :
0
Do not remove the SD card during recording
(RRECN,
red text) or recording pause (STBYN,
yellow text).
0
To remove the SD card during Interval Rec,
press the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBYN”
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green before you remove
the card.
0
When [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TC
Generator] is set to “
Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec
Run”.
0
Audio cannot be recorded. A x mark appears
in the audio level meter display.
(A P
132 [Audio Level Meter] )
83
Shooting
Variable Frame Rec
Shooting in this mode allows you to obtain smooth
slow motion or quick motion videos.
Using different frame rate settings for recording
and playback, videos captured at normal speed
can be played back more smoothly than those in
low or high speed playback.
To enable Variable Frame Rec, the following two
settings are required at the same time.
0
[Record Format
] B [WResolution]/
[YResolution] is set to “1920x1080” or
“1280x720”.
0
[Record Format
] B [WFrame & Bit Rate]/
[YFrame & Bit Rate] is set to “30p(HQ)”,
“24p(UHQ)”, “24p(HQ)” or “25p(HQ)”.
Number of Frames that can be Set
1
Set [WResolution]
and [WFrame & Bit Rate].
(A P118 [WResolution a, Resolution b] )
(A P118 [WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit
Rate b] )
0
[WResolution]:
Set to “1920x1080
” or “1280x720”.
0
[WFrame & Bit Rate]:
Set
to “30p(HQ)”, “24p(UHQ)”, “24p(HQ)” or
“25p(HQ)”.
2
Set [Rec Mode] to “Variable Frame”.
(A P120
[ Rec Mode ] )
Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set] B
[Rec Mode] to “Variable Frame”.
3
Select a recording frame rate from
[WFrame & Bit Rate].
(A P118
[WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit
Rate b] )
The selectable frame rates are as shown in the
table below.
Memo :
0
When
[Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [AE
LEVEL SW] is set to “AE LEVEL/VFR”, you can
use the cross-shaped button (HI) to select the
frame rate during Variable Frame Rec. In modes
other than Variable Frame Rec, the cross-
shaped button (HI) functions as the AE level
setting button.
(A P
98 [ AE Level ] )
0
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
Caution :
0
The shooting frame rate cannot be changed
during
recording. To change the frame rate, stop
the recording first and perform the change.
0
When [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec
Run”.
0
Audio cannot be recorded. A x
mark appears
in the audio level meter display.
(A P
132 [Audio Level Meter] )
Resolution
Frame & Bit
Rate
Selectable Shooting Frame Rate
1920x1080 30p - 30 27, 25, 24, 22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10, 6,
2
24p 30, 27, 25 24 22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10, 6, 2
25p - 25 24, 22.5, 20, 18, 12.5, 10, 6, 2
1280x720 30p 60, 54, 50, 48, 45, 40, 36,
32
30 27, 25, 24, 22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10, 6,
2
24p 60, 54, 50, 48, 45, 40, 36,
32, 30, 27, 25
24 22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10, 6, 2
25p 50, 48, 45, 40, 36, 32 25 24, 22.5, 20, 18, 12.5, 10, 6, 2
Effect during playback Slow motion Standard Quick motion
84
Shooting
Playing Recorded Clips
To
play back clips recorded on SD cards, switch to
the Media mode.
Press and hold the [MODE] selection button in
Camera mode to enter Media mode. A thumbnail
screen of the clips recorded on the SD card is
displayed.
You can play back the selected clip on the
thumbnail screen.
Memo :
0
When an SD card without any clips is inserted,
“No Clips
” is displayed.
Operation Buttons
Use the operation buttons, on the side control
panel of the camera recorder or the LCD monitor,
to operate the thumbnail screen.
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1 OIS / 2 LOLUX / 3
TIME CODE
DISPLAY STATUS
A
D
B
C
A
B
C
D
E F G
I H
A
[MENU/THUMB]
Button
0
Displays the menu.
0
Press this button to close the menu screen
during menu display and return to the
thumbnail screen.
B
[CANCEL] (Stop) Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
C
Set (Play) Button
0
Sets the values and items. (Confirm)
0
Plays back the selected clip.
D
Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)
Moves the cursor.
E
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button
0
Switches
the OK mark of the clip selected by
the cursor.
0
If an OK mark has been appended, it will be
deleted. Otherwise, an OK mark will be
appended.
F
[OIS/2]
Button
0
Switches the selection status of the clip
selected by the cursor.
0
Clips being selected are displayed with
check mark.
G
[LOLUX/3] Button
Enters the action selection screen.
H
[DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the “Standard Screen” and
“Detailed Screen”.
I
[STATUS] Button
Displays the media information screen.
Thumbnail Screen
0
“Standard Screen” and “Detailed Screen” are
available.
Use
the [DISPLAY] button to switch between the
screens.
0
Thumbnails are displayed in order of recording
from the oldest to most recent.
Standard screen
.
00000357 2016-01-02 02:40:41
A
J
H
C
B
G
E
D
F
I
K
A
SD Card Information
0
Displays the status of the inserted SD card,
selected SD card, write-protect switch, and
the need for restoring.
0
Use the
[SLOT A/B] switch to switch slots.
Clips in slot A and B cannot be displayed at
the same time.
W z
:
Write-protect switch of the SD card
in slot A is set.
S
:
SD card in slot B needs to be
restored or formatted, or is an
unsupported SD card.
B
Clip Mark
Displays the clip information (properties).
.
A
B
D
E
C
A
OK Mark
Clip is appended with OK mark.
85
Playback
Memo :
0
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
0
When [
Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Record Format] B [WFormat] is set to
“AVCHD”, the OK mark indicates that the clip is
protected.
(A P
118 [WFormat a, Format b] )
B
Continued From Mark
This mark indicates that the current clip is
continued from another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
C
Uneditable Mark
0
This
mark indicates that an OK mark cannot
be appended to or deleted from the clip, and
the clip cannot be deleted.
0
When [Main Menu
] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Record Format] B [WFormat] is set
to “AVCHD”, clips that are not recorded on
this camera recorder cannot be edited.
D
Continue Mark
This
mark indicates that recording of the current
clip is continued to another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
E
Check Mark
0
A green check mark is displayed when the
clip is selected.
0
Magenta and gray check marks are
displayed in multiple selection mode.
(A P91 [Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple Clips] )
C
Cursor
Clip to be worked on. Use the cross-shaped
button (JKHI) to move the cursor.
D
Thumbnail Substitution Display
.
A B
A
A clip with corrupted management information.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
B
A
clip that cannot be played back nor displayed
in thumbnail with the current video format
settings.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
Memo :
0
Dependent on the settings for [
Main Menu] B
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[System], [WResolution]/[YResolution], and
[WFrame & Bit Rate]/[YFrame & Bit Rate].
(A P117
[ System ] )
(A P118 [WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit
Rate b] )
0
When [Record Format
] B [WFormat] is set to
“AVCHD”, you may not be able to play back files
recorded on a camera recorder other than the
GY-HM660 and GY-HM620 series.
If a file cannot be played back, it will appear in
the thumbnail substitution display 2 described
above.
E
Clip Name
The
file name (clip number) of the selected clip
is displayed.
F
Operation Guide
0
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
0
The action selection screen is displayed
when the User 3 ([LOLUX/3]) button is
pressed.
(A P87 [Actions] )
G
Recording Start Time
Displays the recording start time of the clip.
Memo :
0
The
date/time display is dependent on the [LCD/
VF] B [Display Settings] B [Date Style]/[Time
Style] settings in the [Main Menu] screen.
(A P
111 [ Date Style ] )
(A P111 [ Time Style ] )
H
Scroll Bar
0
Indicates the scroll position.
0
Black space below the scroll bar (white)
indicates that there are more pages.
0
When the scroll bar (white) is at the bottom,
this indicates the last page.
I
Remaining Battery Power
(A P30
[Power Status Display] )
J
Number of Clips
0
If
none of the clips are selected, the “running
number/total number of clips” of the clip to be
displayed appears.
0
Even if only one clip is selected, the number
of selected clips in the current slot is
displayed.
K
Network Connection Icon a
0
When
[Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]
is set to “On(SDI Off)” or “On(HDMI Off)”, the
network connection status is displayed.
This icon is not displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(A P134
[Network Connection Icon a] )
86
Playback
Detailed screen
* Items
that are common with the Standard screen
will not be described. Refer to “[Standard screen]
(A P 85)”.
.
Jan 1, 2016 00:00:19
C
B
A
A
Thumbnail
Thumbnail of the clip selected by the cursor.
Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to move the
cursor.
B
Scroll Mark (DE)
0
If there are previous clips, D
appears on the
left.
0
If there are more clips, E appears on the
right.
0
The marks will not be displayed if there are
no clips before and after the current clip.
C
Metadata
Metadata of the clip pointed by the cursor.
You can use the cross-shaped button (JK) to
scroll.
Actions
The action selection screen is displayed when the
User 3 ([LOLUX/3]) button is pressed.
You can perform the following operations.
Item Description
Select All Clips Selects all clips.
Select OK
Marked
Selects all clips appended with
OK mark.
Select Range Specifies the range when
selecting multiple clips.
(A P
91 [Selecting Multiple
Clips Randomly] )
Deselect All Clears all clip selections.
Item Description
Add OK Mark Appends an OK mark.
0
This Clip:
Appends an OK mark to the
clip pointed by the cursor.
0
Selected Clips:
Appends an OK mark to the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
0
All Clips:
Appends an OK mark to all
clips.
Delete OK Mark Deletes the OK mark.
0
This Clip:
Deletes the OK mark of the
clip pointed by the cursor.
0
Selected Clips:
Deletes the OK mark of the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
0
All Clips:
Deletes the OK mark of all
clips.
FTP Upload
a
Uploads a clip to the FTP server.
0
This Clip:
Uploads the clip pointed by
the cursor.
0
Selected Clips:
Uploads the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
0
All Clips:
Uploads all clips.
Delete Clips Deletes clip. However, clips with
OK mark cannot be deleted.
0
This Clip:
Deletes the clip pointed by
the cursor.
0
Selected Clips:
Deletes the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
0
All Clips:
Deletes all clips.
Trim This Clip Trims the clip pointed by the
cursor.
87
Playback
Memo :
0
The
object of action is the clip of the current slot
being displayed.
0
[Selected Clips] cannot be performed if there are
no selected (appended with check mark) clips.
0
[This
Clip] cannot be performed if there are more
than one selected (appended with check mark)
clips.
0
If the write-protect switch of an SD card is set,
OK mark cannot be appended or deleted, and
the clips cannot be deleted.
Playing back
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
of the camera recorder to play back.
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
A
C
B
A
IW Button
0
Plays back/pauses the clip pointed by the
cursor.
0
You
can press the cross-shaped button (HI)
to perform frame-by-frame forward playback
during pause mode.
B
S/T Button
Skips in the reverse or forward direction.
O/N Button
During Playback:
Fast forwards in the reverse or forward
direction.
While paused:
Frame-by-frame playback in the reverse or
forward direction.
C
o
Button
Stops playback.
1
In the thumbnail screen, move the cursor to
the clip to be played back.
Move the cursor to the clip to be played back
using the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
2
Press the playback/pause button.
Playback of the selected clip starts.
Audio Output during Playback
0
You can confirm the playback sound from the
monitor speaker, or the headphone connected
to the [x] terminal. When a headphone is
connected
to the [x] terminal, sound cannot be
output from the monitor speaker.
(A P148 [Connecting the Headphone] )
0
Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker and
headphone using the [MONITOR +/-] volume
adjustment button on the LCD monitor section
of the camera recorder.
Time Code Playback
Time code or user’s bit recorded on an SD card can
be displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Memo :
0
The time code is also superimposed on the
video
signal output from the [HD/SD SDI] output
terminal.
0
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD SDI] output
terminal is used as a flag to determine valid
video signals. Therefore, accurate values will
not be output.
0
If
a section without time code is played back, the
time code will stop. However, playback will
continue.
Displaying Information during Shooting
During playback, pressing the [DISPLAY] button
shows the display screen.
Pressing the
[AE LOCK/4] button switches the
display information during shooting between no
display, camera information display, and GPS
display.
0
The GPS display displays information on the
recording location of the video being played
back only when GPS information has been
recorded.
The local date/time is displayed.
0
Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
+35.483197
+139.652172
Oct 30,2016
07:01:58PM
AE LOCK/4
AE LOCK/4
AE LOCK/4
GPS Display
Camera Information
Display
Hide
88
Playback
Memo :
0
GPS function (recording of GPS information) is
only available on the GY-HM660 series. a
The GY-HM620 series can only provide the
information display of the video with the
recorded GPS information. b
0
When [System
] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format] B System is set to “HD+SD” or “HD
+Web”, only SD or web files can be played back
from slot B.
In this case, files up-converted into the HD size
are played back in the simple mode. a
0
Trimming information is displayed while
trimming is in progress. You cannot switch the
display
using the [AE LOCK/4] button during this
process.
Deleting Clips
Delete clip.
.
OIS / 2 LOLUX / 3
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
Memo :
0
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
0
Read-only clips can be deleted on a PC.
Deleting One Clip
Delete the clip (one clip) pointed by the cursor in
[Delete Clips] B [This Clip] in the menu.
Memo :
0
Clips with OK mark cannot be deleted.
During Thumbnail Screen
1
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted.
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
.
1
2
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
89
Playback
3
Select [Delete
Clips] B [This Clip] and press
the Set button (R).
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
.
3
4
Select [Delete] using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
Deleting starts.
.
4
Selecting and Deleting Multiple Clips
To select and delete multiple clips, refer to
“[Selecting
and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips] (A P 91)”.
Deleting All Clips
Delete all clips that are displayed.
1
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
2
Select [Delete Clips] B [
All Clips].
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
3
Select [Delete] and press the Set button
(R).
Deleting starts.
Memo :
0
The time taken to delete clips depends on the
number of clips to be deleted.
Appending/Deleting OK
Mark
0
You can append OK marks to the clips for
important scenes.
0
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted, thus protecting the important clips.
0
When the camera recorder is in Media mode,
you can delete the OK marks appended during
recording, or append/delete OK marks after
shooting.
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
LOLUX / 3FOCUS ASSIST/1
During Thumbnail Screen
1
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
0
If
the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
0
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
.
OK Mark
90
Playback
During Playback or Pause Screen
1
Press [FOCUS
ASSIST/1] button during clip
playback.
0
If
the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
0
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
.
1000/2000
12:34:56
12:34:56
Jan 12,2016
Jan 12,2016
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
0
282min
282min
1920x1080
1920x1080
60i HQ
60i HQ
1000/2000
1000/2000
OK Mark
Memo :
0
The
clip pauses when an OK mark is appended
or deleted during playback.
Appending/Deleting OK Mark of
Multiple Clips
To select and append/delete OK mark for multiple
clips, refer to “[Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple Clips] (A P 91)”.
Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple
Clips
0
Multiple clips can be selected during thumbnail
screen or playback screen display.
0
After selecting multiple clips, perform
appending/deleting
of OK mark, deleting of clips
using the action selection screen.
0
After selecting multiple clips, the selections will
be canceled by the following operations.
0
When [Deselect All] in the action menu is
selected
0
When
exiting Media mode from the thumbnail
screen
0
When removing the SD card
0
When switching the slot in use
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly
1
Move the cursor to a clip without check
mark, and press the
[OIS/2] button.
A green check mark appears on the clip.
.
1
2
Repeat Step 1 to select multiple clips.
0
Multiple clips can be selected.
0
Press the
[LOLUX/3] button while the
multiple clips are selected.
0
Appends OK mark together:
[Add OK Mark
] B [Selected Clips]
0
Deletes OK mark together:
[Delete OK Mark
] B [Selected Clips]
0
Uploading
selected clips to the FTP server
together a :
[FTP Upload] B [Selected Clips]
0
Deletes selected clips together:
[
Delete Clips] B [Selected Clips]
Memo :
0
Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [OIS/2
] button will cancel the
selection.
0
If
the operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
91
Playback
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively
1
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
2
Select “Select Range” in the action
selection screen, and press the Set button
(R).
.
2
3
Move the cursor to the beginning (or end)
of the range for multiple selection, and
press the Set button (R).
4
Move the cursor to the other end of the
range.
0
Magenta check marks appear on the clips
within the range. (Including clips that were
already selected.)
0
Gray check marks appear on selected clips
that are outside the range.
.
3
4
5
Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
range.
0
The check marks change from magenta to
green.
0
Pressing the
[LOLUX/3] button while the
multiple clips are selected displays the
action selection screen. The following
operations can be performed.
0
Appends OK mark together:
[
Add OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
0
Deletes OK mark together:
[
Delete OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]
0
Uploading
selected clips to the FTP server
together a :
[FTP Upload] B [Selected Clips]
0
Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips
] B [Selected Clips]
Memo :
0
Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [OIS/2
] button will cancel the
selection.
0
If
the operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
92
Playback
Trimming Recorded Clips
You
can extract (trim) the necessary parts of a clip
recorded in the SD card.
The trimmed clip is saved as a new file on the same
SD card as the original clip. No changes are made
to the original clip.
1
Switch to Media mode.
Switch the mode using the [MODE] selection
button on the side control panel.
2
Move the cursor to the clip to be trimmed.
Move the cursor to the clip to be trimmed using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
.
2
3
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
4
Select [Trim This Clip], and press the Set
button (R).
Playback of the selected clip starts.
.
282min
0
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00:00: 00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
40 30 20 10 0
1000/ 2000
IN
OUT
TRIM
30min
11:22: 33.00
11:23: 44.00
00:08: 22
A
B
C
4
A
Guide
Operation guide
B
Position bar
6
:
Current position of the video
7
: Position to start trimming (in point)
8
: Position to end trimming (out point)
C
Trimming information
W or Y :
Indicates the available space
in the storage media (W or Y)
7
: Indicates the time code of the
in point
8
: Indicates the time code of the
out point
9
: Indicates the duration from the
in point to the out point
Memo :
0
The
trimmed clip will be saved to the same card
slot as that of the original clip.
0
[Duration] appears in yellow if the duration is 10
minutes or longer. Trimming cannot be
performed in this case.
0
[Duration]
appears in yellow if the duration is
longer than the recordable time on the storage
media. Trimming cannot be performed in this
case.
0
When trimming starts, the display switches to
the Media Display 2 screen.
5
Specify the in point.
0
Operate
buttons such as O/N or S/T
to move the video to the in point.
(A P88 [Playing back] )
0
Press the [USER1] button at the point you
want
to start trimming to specify the in point.
6
Specify the out point.
0
Operate buttons such as O/N or S/T
to move the video to the out point.
(A P88 [Playing back] )
0
Press the [USER2] button at the point you
want to end trimming to specify the out point.
7
Perform trimming.
Press the [USER3] button to perform trimming.
Memo :
0
While trimming is in progress, you can press the
[CANCEL] button to return to the thumbnail
screen.
0
While
trimming is in progress, you can press the
[DISPLAY] button to switch the display, but the
trimming information is displayed at all times.
0
When trimming the in and out point, the in point
trimmed may be up to one second before the
specified
in point and the out point trimmed may
be up to one second behind the specified out
point.
93
Playback
Basic Operations in Menu
Screen
0
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button on the side
control panel of the camera recorder or on the
LCD monitor to display the menu screen on the
LCD monitor and viewfinder.
0
Various settings for shooting and playback can
be configured on the menu screen.
0
There are two types of menu screens -
[Main
Menu] and [Favorites Menu].
0
[
Main Menu] contains all the setting items of the
camera recorder, classified according to
functions and uses, while [Favorites Menu]
allows users to customize the menu items freely.
(A P127
[Adding/Editing Frequently Used
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )
0
The operating procedures and main screen
displays are the same for both menus.
0
The menu screen can also be displayed on
external monitors connected to the video signal
output terminal.
(A P112 [ Display On TV ] )
Operation Buttons
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
of the camera recorder or the buttons on the LCD
monitor to operate the menu.
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1 OIS / 2
TIME CODE
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
DISPLAY
A
D
B
C
A
B
C
D
E F
G
A
[MENU/THUMB]
Button
0
Displays the menu screen. The
[Main
Menu] screen is displayed by default.
0
During normal usage, [Main Menu
] is
displayed if the previous menu operation
ended at [Main Menu], and [Favorites
Menu] if the previous menu operation ended
at [Favorites Menu].
0
Press this button to close the menu screen
during
menu display and return to the normal
screen.
0
Pressing and holding down the button while
the menu is displayed switches the [Main
Menu] screen to the [Favorites Menu] or vice
versa.
B
[CANCEL] Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
C
Set Button (R)
Sets the values and items.
D
Cross-shaped Button (JKH I)
J
:
Moves the cursor upward.
K
: Moves the cursor downward.
H
: Moves back to the previous item.
I
: Moves forward to the next item.
E
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button
Adds the selected menu or submenu item to the
[Favorites Menu].
(A P127 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )
F
[OIS/2] Button
Resets settings in the [TC Preset] or [UB
Preset] setting screen. This button is disabled
in other screens.
G
[DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] screens.
94
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Display and Description of the Menu
Screen
Selecting Menu Items
.
H
I
F
E
B
D
G
A
C
A
Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
B
Menu Item
0
Displays the names of the menu item and
sub-menu.
0
Menu
items with [...] after them indicates that
there is a sub-menu to access.
C
Fixed Item
Items that cannot be changed are displayed in
gray and cannot be selected.
D
Operation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
E
Setting Value
Setting values for the menu items.
For menus with sub-menus, values are not
displayed.
F
Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
G
Header
Indicates the current menu type with the line
color.
Blue
: [Main Menu] Screen
Green : [Favorites Menu] (Operation
screen)
Magenta : [Favorites Menu] (Editing screen)
H
Remaining Battery Power
(A P30 [Power Status Display] )
Memo :
0
If
the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold
separately) is not used, the battery mark which
indicates the battery level may not appear.
I
Menu Title
Title of the currently displayed menu.
Changing Setting Values
.
D
F
A
C
B
E
A
Menu Item to Change
Menu item to be changed.
A list of setting values F appears in a pop-up.
B
Operation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
C
Setting Values Before Change
Setting values before changing. The
background of the item is displayed in blue.
D
Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
E
Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
F
List of Setting Values
0
A
pop-up displaying a list of setting values for
selection.
0
The height of the pop-up depends on the
number of settings available. Use the scroll
bar D to confirm the current display status.
95
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Text Input with Software Keyboard
Use the software keyboard to enter the [Setup
File
] subname, [Clip Name Prefix], and the settings
under [Network] B [Settings].
Entering a subname
(A P142
[Configuring Setup Files] )
.
G
A
E
H
C
B
D
F
Entering the [Clip Name Prefix]
(A P
122 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )
.
A
E
H
C
B
D
Settings under [Network] B [Settings]
The keyboard displayed varies according to the
settings.
(A P
122 [Network/Settings Item a] )
.
A
H
C
G
D
B
E
F
I
A
Character Entry Field
0
Field for entering the title.
0
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Setup File] subname or up to 4 characters
for the [
Clip Name Prefix].
B
Character Cursor
Select
a character using the key cursor D, and
press the Set button (R) to input the selected
character at the position of the character cursor.
The character cursor moves to the next position
on the right each time a character is input.
The cursor can be moved using the arrow keys
H.
C
Character Keys
Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to move
the key cursor D to the character you want to
enter.
D
Key Cursor
Indicates the currently selected character or
item. Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to
move the cursor.
E
Confirmation Buttons
0
Select
[Set]/[Store] and press the Set button
(R) to confirm the title.
0
Select [Cancel
] and press the Set button (R)
on the side control panel of the camera
recorder to abort character input and return
to the previous screen.
F
[SP] Space Key
Select
[SP] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
enter a space at the current position of the
character cursor B.
G
[3 ] Backspace Key
Select [3 ] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
delete the character on the left of the character
cursor B.
H
Arrow Keys
Moves the position of the character cursor B.
I
Character Switch Button
Switches the character buttons C to the upper
case, lower case, and symbols.
96
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Menu Screen Hierarchical
Chart
.
Reset Process
Reverse Picture
Color Gain
Adjust...
Color Matrix
White Balance...
WDR
Gamma
White Clip
Knee
Black Toe
Master Black
Adjust...Detail
Camera Process...
AE LEVEL SW
Handle Zoom Speed
GAIN H
GAIN M
GAIN L
Smooth Trans
EEI Limit
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)
AGC Limit
AE Speed
AE Level
Shutter
Flicker Correction
OIS
Bars
Camera Function...
Main Menu...
Flash Band Correction
Shooting Mode
AF Speed
User Switch Set...
AF Assist
.
System Information
Time Zone
Reserved
Date/Time
Reset All
Language
Tally Lamp
Auto Power Off
Setup File...
Media...
Record Set...
System...
Audio Set...
Video Set...
A/V Set...
LCD Mirror
LCD Backlight
LCD Contrast
VF Contrast
VF Bright
VF Color
LCD + VF
Display Settings...
Marker Settings...
Shooting Assist...
LCD/VF...
Drop Frame
UB Mode
TC Preset
TC Generator
TC/UB...
Network a
GPS a
Settings...
Memo :
0
Some
menus cannot be set depending on the operating mode or status of the camera recorder. These
items are displayed in gray, and they cannot be selected.
0
Setting value with the R mark is the factory default.
97
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Function Menu
Menu screen for specifying operation settings
during shooting.
This item can only be selected in the Camera
mode.
Bars
For setting whether to output color bars.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
(A P114
[ Test Tone ] )
OIS
For setting whether to enable image stabilizer.
When “On
” is selected, set the Level.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Level
For setting the level of the image stabilizer.
[Setting Values: High, RNormal]
Memo :
0
When “High” is selected, correcting severe
camera shake may cause the area surrounding
the image to darken.
Flicker Correction
For setting whether to adjust image flicker that
occurs under a fluorescent light.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Flash Band Correction
For reducing the condition of the flash band
phenomenon, which creates an unnatural image
with a part of it brightly lit, such as by the camera
flash of another still camera.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Caution :
0
Flash
band correction function is not available in
any of the following cases.
0
When [Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame”
0
When [WFrame & Bit Rate]/[YFrame & Bit
Rate] is set to
“24p”
0
When
in the Automatic Shutter mode or when
the shutter is turned on in the Manual Shutter
mode
(A P56 [Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter
Switching)] )
0
When [Network] is set to “On(SDI Off)” or
“On(HDMI Off)”
0
[Flash Band Correction]
operates when the
luminance of the screen varies widely, with or
without flash light. However, depending on the
shooting condition, the flash band correction
may not be fully effective even if there are flash
lights.
0
The following symptoms may occur under flash
light,
but these are not malfunctions due to flash
band correction.
0
Moving object appears to be stationary
momentarily.
0
A horizontal line appears on the image.
0
The [Flash Band Correction] function will be set
to “Off” if the camera recorder switches from the
Camera mode to another mode, or when the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is set to
“OFF(CHG)”.
Shutter
For specifying shutter-related settings.
Use this item to set to
“Step” (fixed value) or
“Variable” when operating with the cross-shaped
button (JK) on the right side.
0
Variable:
Sets to variable scan. Use this setting such as
when shooting a PC monitor.
0
Step:
Sets to step shutter, which switches the shutter
speed by a fixed value.
[Setting Values: Variable, RStep]
AE Level
For setting the convergence level during AE (Auto
Exposure).
This can also be adjusted using the cross-shaped
button (HI) on the right side.
[Setting Values: -6 to +6 (R0)]
AE Speed
For
setting the convergence speed during AE (Auto
Exposure).
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
98
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
AGC Limit
For setting the maximum gain value of
“AGC”,
which electrically boosts the sensitivity level
according to the brightness automatically.
[Setting Values: 24dB, R18dB, 12dB, 6dB]
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)
For setting the limit value of the OPEN end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F5.6, F4, F2.8, F2, RF1.6]
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)
For setting the limit value of the CLOSE end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F11, RF8, F5.6]
EEI Limit
For setting the shutter speed control range when
the Automatic Shutter mode (EEI) is enabled.
[Setting Values: 4F-stop, R3F-stop, 2F-stop]
Smooth Trans
For setting the shock reduction function, which
slows down the sudden change when switching
with the [GAIN]
or [WHT BAL] selection switch.
[Setting Values: Fast, Middle, Slow, ROff]
Memo :
0
However, this function is disabled when the
[FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”, or when
switching the gain selection switch that was set
to “AGC”.
GAIN L, GAIN M, GAIN H
For setting the gain value of each position on the
[GAIN]
selection switch.
This is fixed at “AGC” when the [FULL AUTO]
switch is set to “ON”.
[Setting Values: 24dB, 21dB, 18dB, 15dB, 12dB,
9dB, 6dB, 3dB, 0dB, -3dB, -6dB]
(Default values GAIN L: 0dB, GAIN M: 6dB, GAIN
H: 12dB)
Memo :
0
When [Shooting Mode] is set to
“Standard”,
“-3dB” and “-6dB” cannot be selected.
(A P
105 [ Shooting Mode ] )
AE LEVEL SW
For specifying the operation of the cross-shaped
button (HI) on the right side.
0
AE LEVEL/VFR:
Sets the number of frames during Variable
Frame
Rec, and operates as the AE level setting
button in other cases.
(A P84 [Variable Frame Rec] )
0
AE Level:
Operates as the AE level setting button at all
times.
0
Disable:
Disables the button.
[Setting Values: AE LEVEL/VFR, RAE Level,
Disable]
Handle Zoom Speed
This function allows you to set the zoom speed of
the
zoom lever at the handle when the [ZOOM FIX/
VAR/OFF] switch is set to “FIX”.
[Setting Values: 1 to 8 (R 5)]
AF Speed
For setting the AF operation speed.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
AF Assist
For setting whether to shift the auto focus point
when the focus ring is turned during Auto Focus
(AF).
0
Area:
This option allows you to shift the auto focus
point to the left, center, right, or near and far
directions by turning the focus ring during AF.
Selecting this option displays the icon in
the area.
0
Far/Near:
This option allows you to shift the auto focus
point to near and far directions by turning the
focus ring during AF.
0
Off:
Sets the AF Assist function to “Off
”.
[Setting Values: Area, Far/Near, ROff]
(A
P50 [AF Assist Function] )
Memo :
0
This setting is effective only when the
[FOCUS]
switch is set to “AUTO”.
0
The manual focus adjustment mode is
temporarily
activated by turning the focus ring in
the AF mode. If the focus ring is not operated for
a certain time, the camera recorder returns to the
AF mode.
User Switch Set...
For specifying user button related settings.
(A P
100 [User Switch Set Item] )
99
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
User Switch Set Item
USER1 to USER7, LCD KEY▲, LCD KEY▶,
LCD KEY▼, LCD KEY◀
By
assigning one of the following functions to each
of the [FOCUS ASSIST/1], [OIS/2], [LOLUX/3], [AE
LOCK/4], [ZEBRA/5], [MARKER/6], [C.REVIEW/7]
buttons or the cross-shaped buttons on the LCD
monitor, these buttons can be used to control the
assigned function (on/off, start, switch).
Set according to the shooting conditions. Usable
only in the Camera mode.
[Setting Values: None, Bars, Flash Band, Lolux, AE
Lock, Face Detect, OIS, One Push Iris, One Push
Focus, Preset Zoom1, Preset Zoom2, Preset
Zoom3, White Balance, Zebra, Marker, Focus
Assist, Spot Meter, Expanded Focus, LCD
Backlight, Backup Trig, Clip Cutter Trig, OK Mark,
Clip Review, Load Picture File, Live Streaming
a]
Front REC
For
setting the function of the [REC] button located
below the lens at the front of the unit.
0
REC:
Functions
as a record button for starting/ending
recording.
0
AWB:
When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch is set to “A” or “B” in the Manual White
Balance mode, it functions as an AWB startup
button. If the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch is set to “PRESET”, it functions as a
button for switching between two color
temperature settings.
(A P
59 [Manual White Balance Mode (Manual
Switching)] )
0
None:
Disabled.
[Setting Values: RREC, AWB, None]
Lolux
To increase the sensitivity when in dim
surroundings, set a value in the Lolux mode.
[Setting Values: 36dB, R30dB]
Clip Review
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]-[
USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Clip
Review”.
0
Last 5sec:
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
ending.
0
Top 5sec:
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
beginning.
0
Clip:
Views the entire clip.
[Setting Values: RLast 5sec, Top 5sec, Clip]
Memo :
0
This
item is selectable when any of the [USER1]-
[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD
KEY▼], [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Clip
Review”.
Spot Meter
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]-[
USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Spot
Meter”.
(A P72 [Setting Spot Meter] )
0
Max & Min:
Displays the brightest and darkest areas of the
image.
0
Max:
Displays the brightest area of the image.
0
Min:
Displays the darkest area of the image.
0
Manual:
Displays the image brightness at a specified
position.
[Setting Values: RMax & Min, Max, Min, Manual]
100
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Face Detect
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]-[
USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Face
Detect”.
Select the control to track results of face detection.
0
AF&AE:
Sets auto focus and exposure control for the
face that is being tracked.
0
AF:
Sets
auto focus for the face that is being tracked.
[Setting Values: RAF&AE, AF]
(A P52 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
Memo :
0
When “AF
” is specified, this function will be
activated only when the [FOCUS] switch is set
to “Auto”.
When “AF&AE” is specified, this function will be
activated only when the [FOCUS] switch is set
to “Auto”, or when one or more of the items
(Gain, Iris and Shutter) is set to Auto mode.
9
Sensitivity
For setting the level of ease of face detection.
[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low]
9
Hysteresis
For setting the margin to maintain status when the
face that is being tracked is lost.
Set to “Fast” to select another object immediately
if the face on the screen is lost.
Set to “Slow
” to operate at the same position for
some time even if the face on the screen is lost.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
AE Lock
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]-[
USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “AE
Lock”.
0
AE:
Use
this feature to fix a value to the Auto function
of Gain, Iris, or Shutter when the user button that
is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed.
0
AE/WB:
Use this feature to fix a value to White Balance
and the Auto function of Gain, Iris, or Shutter
when the user button that is assigned “AE
Lock” is pressed.
[Setting Values: RAE, AE/WB]
Memo :
0
This feature only works when Iris, Shutter or
Gain is set to Auto mode.
0
“AE
Lock” is canceled when the button assigned
with “AE Lock” is pressed, or when any of the
functions that can be locked is operated
regardless of the mode (Manual or Auto).
Preset Zoom1, Preset Zoom2, Preset Zoom3
For
setting the speed for shifting to the preset zoom
position and the rate of change for starting and
stopping the preset zoom operation of the preset
zoom function assigned to the user button.
9
Speed
For setting the speed to shift to the preset zoom
position.
[Setting Values: 1 to 127 (R 64)]
9
Ease In
For setting the rate of change from the start of the
zoom
operation until the predetermined [Speed] is
reached.
The larger the setting value, the longer it takes to
reach the value specified in Speed.
[Setting Values: 1 to 10, ROff]
9
Ease Out
For setting the rate of change from the
predetermined [Speed] until the zoom operation
stops.
The larger the setting value, the longer it takes
before the operation stops.
[Setting Values: 1 to 10, ROff]
101
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Duration
For displaying the zoom operation time calculated
from the setting values of
[Speed] and [Ease In]/
[Ease Out].
[Displayed Value: ***.* SEC]
Expanded Focus
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]-[
USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to
“Expanded Focus”.
0
Toggle:
Pressing the button assigned with “Expanded
Focus
” each time switches the “Expanded
Focus” function to on or off.
0
Momentary:
The
“Expanded Focus” function is enabled
during the interval while the button assigned with
“Expanded Focus” is pressed.
0
Limited Time:
Activates the timer.
During
autofocus, the [Expanded Focus] feature
turns off about 3 seconds after it is turned on.
During manual focus, the [Expanded Focus]
feature turns off about 3 seconds after you stop
operating the focus ring.
[Setting Values: RToggle, Momentary, Limited
Time]
Camera Process Menu
Menu screen for adjusting the quality of camera
images.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode.
Detail
For adjusting the contour (detail) enhancement
level.
Increasing the value increases the sharpness of
the contour.
[Setting Values: -10 to +10, Off (R0)]
9
Adjust...
For specifying the detailed settings of the contour
(detail).
(A P
105 [Detail/Adjust Item] )
Memo :
0
This
item cannot be selected when [Detail] is set
to “Off”.
Master Black
For
adjusting the pedestal level (master black) that
serves as the reference black.
Increasing the value increases the pedestal.
[Setting Values: -50 to +50 (R-3)]
Black Toe
Process
the dark areas according to the balance of
bright and dark areas in the image to adjust the
overall balance of contrast.
For altering the gain of dark areas. Adjust this item
according to the condition of the captured video
signals.
0
Stretch:
Increases the gain of dark areas in an image to
stretch the signals of these areas only, thereby
showing the contrast between bright and dark
areas more clearly.
Specify the amount of stretch with [Stretch
Level
].
0
Normal:
Normal condition.
0
Compress:
Compresses the gain of dark areas to increase
the contrast when the entire image appears
bright and contrast is weak. Specify the
compression amount with [Compress Level
].
[Setting Values: Stretch, RNormal, Compress]
Memo :
0
When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as
“---” and cannot be selected.
102
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Stretch Level
Stretch amount increases when a larger value is
specified.
[Setting Values: 1 to 5 (R 3)]
Memo :
0
This item is displayed only when
[Black Toe] is
set to “Stretch”. Otherwise, this item appears as
“---” and cannot be selected.
9
Compress Level
Compression amount increases when a larger
value is specified.
[Setting Values: 1 to 5 (R 3)]
Memo :
0
This item is displayed only when
[Black Toe] is
set to “Compress”. Otherwise, this item appears
as “---” and cannot be selected.
Knee
For specifying the “Knee” operation, which
compresses
video signals beyond a certain level to
show the gradation of the highlighted portion. To
check the gradation of a bright area, set to “Manual”
and adjust the knee point (starting point of knee
operation) manually.
0
Manual:
Enables
manual adjustment of knee point using
[Level].
0
Auto:
Adjusts the knee point automatically according
to the luminance level.
[Setting Values: Manual, RAuto]
Memo :
0
When [WDR] is set to other than
“Off”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
9
Level
For setting the starting point (knee point) of knee
compression when [Knee] is set to “Manual
”.
[Setting Values: R100.0%,97.5%,95.0%,92.5%,
90.0%,87.5%,85.0%]
Memo :
0
When [Knee] is set to other than “Auto”, or
[WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as
“---” and cannot be selected.
9
Sensitivity
For setting the response speed of the “Knee”
operation when [Knee] is set to
“Auto”.
Set to “Slow” when shooting an object under a
condition where there is drastic change in the light
intensity.
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
Memo :
0
When
[Knee] is set to “Manual”, or [WDR] is set
to other than “Off”, this item appears as “---” and
cannot be selected.
White Clip
For setting the point to apply white clip for input
video signals with a high luminance level.
0
108%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 108 %.
0
103%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 103 %.
0
100%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance
level is 100 %. Set to this value when
the system in use limits Y output signals within
100 %.
[Setting Values: R108%, 103%, 100%]
Memo :
0
When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as
“108%” and cannot be selected.
Gamma
For
adjusting the gamma curve that determines the
gradation expression.
0
Cinema:
Sets
to a gamma curve with similar gradation to
the screen characteristics of movies.
0
Standard:
Sets to a standard gamma curve.
[Setting Values: Cinema, RStandard]
Memo :
0
When [WDR] is set to other than
“Off”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
103
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Level
This item can be specified separately when
[Gamma
] is set to “Standard” or “Cinema”.
0
Increase the number:
Enhances the gradation of black. However, the
gradation of bright areas deteriorates.
0
Decrease the number:
Enhances the gradation of bright areas.
However, the gradation of black deteriorates.
[Setting Values: -5 to +5 (R 0)]
WDR
For setting the WDR (Wide Dynamic Range)
function.
When shooting object with wide dynamic range
due to backlight conditions, this function
compresses the dynamic range while maintaining
image contrast through providing gradation
compensation to the input video signals.
0
Strong:
Enhances
the effect of gradation compensation
for object with wide dynamic range due to
outdoor or strong backlight conditions.
0
Natural:
Normal setting for wide dynamic range.
0
Weak:
Reduces the effect of gradation compensation
compared to the normal setting.
0
Off:
Sets the wide dynamic range function to “Off”.
[Setting Values: Strong, Natural, Weak, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, [Black
Toe
], [Knee], [Gamma] and [White Clip] cannot
be selected.
White Balance...
Menu for adjusting white balance.
(A P
106 [White Balance Item] )
* For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] (A P 59)”.
Color Matrix
For setting the color matrix.
0
Cinema Subdued:
Sets to a subdued color matrix that is similar to
the screen characteristics of movies.
0
Cinema Vivid:
Sets to a vivid color matrix that is similar to the
screen characteristics of movies.
0
Standard:
Sets to a standard color matrix.
0
Off:
Sets the color matrix function to Off.
[Setting Values: Cinema Subdued, Cinema Vivid,
RStandard, Off]
9
Adjust
This item is used to adjust
[Color Matrix] to a color
according to the user’s preference.
0
This item is used to adjust
[Color Matrix] to a
color according to the user’s preference.
0
The saturation, hue and brightness of the
primary and complementary colors (6 colors in
total) can be set individually.
0
The adjusted values of
“Standard”, “Cinema
Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in [Color Matrix]
can be stored individually.
(A P141
[Adjusting Color Matrix] )
[Setting range for Lightness/Saturation: -10 to +10]
(roughly ± 10 %)
[Setting range for Hue: -5 to +5] (roughly ± 5°)
Memo :
0
This item cannot be selected when
[Color
Matrix] is set to “Off”.
Color Gain
For adjusting the video signal color level.
Increasing the value deepens the color.
[Setting Values: -50 to +15, Off (R0)]
Memo :
0
Images are displayed in black-and-white when
this is set to
“Off”.
Reverse Picture
For recording images correctly by setting this item
to “Rotate” when the lens image appears upside
down or laterally inverted.
0
Rotate:
Enables horizontal/vertical inversion of the
image.
0
Off:
Disables horizontal/vertical inversion of the
image.
[Setting Values: Rotate, ROff]
104
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Shooting Mode
For switching the settings for image recording on
the camera.
0
Standard:
Normal shooting mode.
This setting is suitable for shooting low-noise
image quality.
Use this mode in well lit places.
0
Extended:
High sensitivity shooting mode.
This setting enables recording in various
brightness conditions.
Use this mode in places where the lighting is
difficult to control and the brightness is
insufficient.
[Setting Values: RStandard, Extended]
Reset Process
Restores all items in the
[Camera Process] menu
to their default settings.
Detail/Adjust Item
V/H Balance
For setting the H/V balance to enhance contour
(detail)
in the horizontal (H) or vertical (V) direction.
0
H+1 to H+4:
Increasing the value enhances contour in the
horizontal direction.
0
V+1 to V+4:
Increasing the value enhances contour in the
vertical direction.
[Setting Values: H+1 to H+4, RNormal,
V+1 to V+4]
Memo :
0
When [System] under [Record Format
] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Normal”.
0
When [System
] under [Record Format] is set to
“HD+SD”, this item can be set during HD
recording, but will be fixed at “Normal” during SD
recording.
0
When [
System] under [Record Format] is set to
“HD+SD”, this item can be set during HD
recording, but will be fixed at “Normal” during SD
recording. a
H Frequency
For specifying the correction frequency of the
horizontal
contour. Set this according to the object.
0
High:
Emphasizes
the high frequency range. Use this
when shooting objects with fine patterns.
0
Middle:
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
0
Low:
Emphasizes the low frequency range. Use this
when shooting objects with large patterns.
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]
Memo :
0
When [System] under [
Record Format] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Low”.
0
When [System] under [Record Format
] is set to
“HD+SD”, this item can be set during HD
recording, but will be fixed at “Low” during SD
recording. a
V Frequency
For specifying the correction frequency of the
vertical contour. Set this according to the object.
0
Low:
Emphasizes the low frequency range.
0
Middle:
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
0
High:
Emphasizes the high frequency range.
[Setting Values: Low, RMiddle, High]
Memo :
0
When [System
] under [Record Format] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Low”.
(A
P117 [ Record Format ] )
0
When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“HD+SD”, this item can be set during HD
recording, but will be fixed at “Low” during SD
recording. a
0
“
High” cannot be selected under the following
settings.
0
When [WResolution] is set to
“1920x1080”,
and [WFrame & Bit Rate] is set to “60i” or
“50i”
0
When [WResolution] is set to “1440x1080
”,
and [WFrame & Bit Rate] is set to “60i” or
“50i”
105
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Enhancement
Set
to “On” to enhance the reproducibility of details.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Skin Detail
For turning On/Off the Skin Detail function, which
is
used to adjust the contour correction effect of the
colors captured.
Select “On” to soften the detail at areas where skin
tone is detected.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Level
For setting the level of contour correction (degree
of softening) using the Skin Detail function.
Decreasing
the value increases the level of contour
correction (degree of softening).
[Setting Values: -1, R -2, -3]
9
Range
For adjusting the range of skin tone to trigger the
Skin Detail function.
Increasing the value increases the range.
[Setting Values: -5 to +5 (R0)]
White Balance Item
Preset Temp.
For setting the color temperature when the
[WHT
BAL] switch is set to “PRESET”.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
(A P 59)”.
Alternative Temp.
For setting the alternative color temperature in the
Preset mode.
When the [WHT BAL] switch is set to
“PRESET”,
pressing the [y] button each time switches the
color temperature setting in the Preset mode.
([Preset Temp.] 1 [Alternative Temp.])
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
(A P 59)”.
AWB Paint
For
adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component in the
AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]
(A P 59)”.
0
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
0
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]
Memo :
0
This item is selectable when the
[WHT BAL]
switch on the right of the camera recorder is set
to “A” or “B”. When “PRESET” is set, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
0
Different values can be specified for “A” and “B”.
0
After the [y] (Auto White Balance) button is
pressed to readjust the white balance while
[Clear Paint After AWB] is set to “On”, R and B
values switch automatically to “0”.
Clear Paint After AWB
For
specifying whether to clear the [AWB Paint] (R
value and B value) settings after executing AWB
(Auto White Balance).
0
On:
Sets the [AWB Paint
] (R value and B value)
settings to “0” after executing AWB (Auto White
Balance).
0
Off:
Does not change the [AWB Paint
] (R value and
B value) settings after executing AWB (Auto
White Balance).
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
FAW Paint
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component
during FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode.
0
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
0
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]
106
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
TC/UB Menu
Menu screen for setting time code and user’s bit.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode,
or during recording.
TC Generator
For setting the operation of the time code.
0
Free Run(Ext):
External time code input will be synchronized
with this and the time code will be recorded.
0
Free Run:
The time code operates in the run mode at all
times regardless of the recording status. It
continues to run even when the power of the
camera recorder is turned off.
0
Rec Run:
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. It continues to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD card is not
replaced. If the SD card is removed and
recording is made on another card, time code
will be recorded on the new card from where it
was left off in the previous card.
0
Regen:
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. When the SD card is replaced, the
last
time code recorded on the card is read and
recorded on a new card so that the time code
continues in running order.
[Setting Values: Free Run(Ext), Free Run, RRec
Run, Regen]
TC Preset
For setting the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Display
: Drop setting 02:02:25.20
: Non Drop setting 02:02:25:20
UB Mode
For setting the recording mode of the user’s bit.
0
Date:
Records the date.
0
Time:
Records the time.
0
Preset:
Records according to the preset setting.
(A P69
[Setting the User’s Bit] )
[Setting Values: Date, Time, RPreset]
Memo :
0
If UB Mode is set to “Time
”, the user’s bit
operates in the 24-hour format even if the LCD
display is in the 12-hour format.
9
Preset
For setting the user’s bit. (Digit by digit)
Display
: AB CD EF 01
(A P69 [Presetting the User’s Bit] )
Memo :
0
When [UB Mode] is set to
“Date” or “Time”, this
item appears as “---” and preset is disabled.
Drop Frame
For setting the framing mode of the time code
generator.
0
Non Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the non-
drop-frame
mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the number of frames.
0
Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the drop-
frame mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the recording time.
[Setting Values: Non Drop, RDrop]
Memo :
0
This item can be set only when
[Main Menu] B
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[WFrame & Bit Rate] is set to “60p”, “30p”, or
“60i”. When the frame rate is “24p”, “Non Drop”
becomes fixed and cannot be selected. When
the frame rate is “50p”, “25p”, or “50i”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
(A P
118 [WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit
Rate b] )
107
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
LCD/VF Menu
Item for specifying settings related to the LCD
monitor or viewfinder screen.
This menu screen can be used to specify settings
related to the Focus Assist mode, zebra pattern
display, screen size, marker, and safety zone. In
addition, it is also used for selecting whether to
display characters on the LCD monitor or
viewfinder screen, as well as for adjusting the
picture quality of the LCD monitor.
Shooting Assist...
Menu for setting the Shooting Assist function.
(A P108
[Shooting Assist Item] )
Marker Settings...
For setting items such as the safety zone and
center mark.
(A P109
[Marker Settings Item] )
Display Settings...
For specifying display-related settings.
(A P110
[Display Settings Item] )
LCD + VF
For selecting a method to switch between the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen displays.
(A P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
0
On:
Displays images on the viewfinder at all times.
0
Off:
Turns
off the viewfinder screen display when the
LCD monitor is turned on.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [
Network] is set to “On”, this item is fixed
at “Off” and cannot be selected.
VF Color
For selecting whether to display the image on the
viewfinder screen in color or black-and-white.
Select “On” to display in color, and
“Off” to display
in black-and-white.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0
The setting of this item is valid only in Camera
mode.
0
When this item is set to
“Off”, only the captured
images are displayed in black-and-white. The
display and menu screens are displayed in
color.
VF Bright
For
setting the brightness of the viewfinder screen.
Increasing the value increases the brightness.
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]
VF Contrast
For
setting the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the viewfinder
screen.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]
LCD Contrast
For
setting the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the LCD monitor.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: -10 to +10 (R 0)]
LCD Backlight
For setting the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight.
Increasing the value increases the brightness.
[Setting Values: -1, R 0, +1]
LCD Mirror
For specifying the image display method when
facing the LCD monitor.
Select “Mirror
” to display the image after laterally
inverting it. (Mirror display)
(A P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
[Setting Values: Mirror, RNormal]
Memo :
0
The setting of this item is valid only in Camera
mode.
0
During color bar, menu screen and status
screen display, the “Mirror” setting is disabled.
(A P140 [Color Bar Output] )
Shooting Assist Item
Focus Assist
For setting whether to add color to the contour of
the focused image upon switching the image to
black-and-white.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
108
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Type
For specifying the operation when the [FOCUS
ASSIST/1
] button is pressed.
(A P51 [Focus Assist Function] )
0
ACCU-Focus:
Enables the Focus Assist and ACCU-Focus
(forced
focus) functions. The depth of field of the
object becomes shallower to enable easier
focusing. The ACCU-Focus function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
0
Normal:
Enables only the Focus Assist function. The
focused area is displayed in color to enable
easier focusing. Display color can be specified
with
[Color].
[Setting Values: ACCU-Focus, RNormal]
9
Color
For setting the display color of the focused area
when Focus Assist is activated.
[Setting Values: RBlue, Green, Red]
Zebra
For selecting whether to display zebra patterns at
the bright areas of the subject.
Select
“On” to display zebra patterns or “Off” to
hide.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Top
For setting the maximum luminance level for the
zebra pattern display.
[Setting Values: Over, 100% to 5% (in 5%
increments)] (R80%)
9
Bottom
For setting the minimum luminance level for the
zebra pattern display.
[Setting Values: 100% to 0% (in 5% increments)]
(R70%)
Memo :
0
The relation between Top and Bottom is such
that
Top>Bottom always holds. To maintain this
relation during setting, the setting value is
automatically corrected.
Focus Assist & Zebra
For selecting the operation when [Focus Assist
]
and [Zebra] are used simultaneously.
0
Standard: The focus assist outlines will
overlapped the zebra pattern.
0
ALT: The focus assist outlines will not
overlapped the zebra pattern, however, flicker
may occur on the zebra area.
[Setting Values: Standard, RALT]
Marker Settings Item
For setting the marker and safety zone, which are
useful in helping you determine the angle of view
for the image according to the shooting purpose.
(A P
140 [Marker and Safety Zone Displays
(Camera Mode Only)] )
Memo :
0
During
Clip Review or when in the Media mode,
the markers do not appear regardless of the
setting.
Marker
For
setting whether to display marker, safety zone,
and center marks on the screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Grid Marker
For setting whether to display a 3x3 grid on the
screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [Grid Marker] is set to “On”, [Aspect
Ratio], [Aspect Marker], and [Safety Zone] do
not function.
9
Aspect Ratio
For
selecting the final image aspect ratio to be used
from the overall angle of view.
[Setting Values: 16:9(+4:3), 2.35:1, 1.85:1, R16:9,
1.75:1, 1.66:1, 14:9, 13:9, 4:3, 2.35:1 Center,
2.35:1 Top, 1.85:1 Center, 1.85:1 Top]
Memo :
0
When [System] B [Record Set
] B [Record
Format] B [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item
is fixed at “4:3” and cannot be selected.
(A P
119 [ SD Aspect ] )
109
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Aspect Marker
For specifying how boundary markers are to be
used to indicate the parts of an image that are
beyond the range of the aspect ratio selected in
[Aspect Ratio].
0
Line+Halftone:
Displays the boundary using lines, and areas
outside the boundary in halftone.
0
Halftone:
Displays
areas outside the boundary in halftone.
0
Line:
Displays the boundary using lines.
0
Off:
Hides the boundary markers.
[Setting Values: Line+Halftone, Halftone, Line,
ROff]
Memo :
0
When
[Aspect Ratio] is set to “16:9” or
“16:9(+4:3)”, this item is fixed at “Off” and cannot
be selected.
9
Safety Zone
For setting the percentage of area that is to be
deemed as valid area (Safety Zone) within the
boundary of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect
Ratio].
[Setting Values: 95%, 93%, 90%, 88%, 80%, ROff]
9
Center Mark
For
specifying whether to display a mark to indicate
the screen center within the aspect ratio selected
in [Aspect Ratio].
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Display Settings Item
This menu is used to set the displays on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
Zoom
For setting the display method of the zoom
position.
0
Number:
Displays the zoom position in numbers (0-99).
0
Bar:
Displays the zoom position in a bar.
0
Off:
Does not display the zoom position.
[Setting Values: Number, RBar, Off]
Focus
For setting the display method of the approximate
distance to the subject in focus during manual
focus.
0
Feet:
Displays the focus in feet.
0
Meter:
Displays the focus in meters.
0
Off:
Does not display the focal length during focus.
[Setting Values: Feet, RMeter, Off]
ND Filter
For setting whether to display the filter position.
0
On+Assist:
Displays the current filter position.
If the ND filter setting is inappropriate, the
appropriate ND filter to select will appear
blinking.
0
On:
Displays the current filter position.
0
Off:
Hides the filter position.
[Setting Values: On+Assist, ROn, Off]
Record Format
For setting whether to display the video format
during recording or playback.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Media Remain
For
setting whether to display the remaining space
of the recording SD card.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0
When the remaining space warning is
displayed, the information appears even when
“Off” is selected.
0
The displayed time is an estimate.
110
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
TC/UB
For specifying whether to display the time code
(TC)
or user’s bit (UB) rate in the display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
[Setting Values: UB, RTC, Off]
Audio Meter
For specifying whether to display the audio level
meter on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Battery
For setting the display of the remaining battery
power in the display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
The battery information appears only on the
Display 2 screen in Camera mode.
(A P131
[Display 2 screen] )
0
Time:
Displays the remaining battery power in
minutes. (min)
0
Capacity%:
Displays the remaining battery power in
percentage. (%)
0
Voltage:
Displays the current battery voltage in units of
0.1 V. (V)
0
Off:
The remaining battery power is not displayed.
[Setting Values: RTime, Capacity%, Voltage, Off]
Memo :
0
The battery mark that appears before the “Time”,
“Capacity%” or “Voltage” value changes
according to the remaining battery power.
In addition, the plug mark is added during
charging.
4 S : 10 % and below
D R : 11 % to 30 %
C Q : 31% to 70 %
B P : 71 % to 100 %
0
When
the remaining battery power is low, “RES”
instead of the value is displayed.
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
0
The remaining battery power and remaining
time are intended as reference values for the
shooting duration.
0
The time, capacity or voltage will not be
displayed during charging.
Date/Time
For
specifying whether to display the date and time
in the display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Date Style
For setting the date display sequence for display
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen as well
as for time stamp recording.
Display examples of the setting values are as
follows.
0
DMY2: 30 Jun 2016
0
DMY1: 30-06-2016
0
MDY2: Jun 30, 2016
0
MDY1: 06-30-2016
0
YMD: 2016-06-30
[Setting Values: DMY2, DMY1, MDY1, MDY2,
YMD]
(Default values: MDY2 (U model), DMY1 (E
model))
Time Style
For setting the time display for display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen as well as for time
stamp recording.
[Setting Values: 24hour, 12hour]
(Default values: 12hour (U model), 24hour (E
model))
Shutter
For setting the shutter display to be displayed on
the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
0
DEG:
Displays the shutter speed in degrees in the
same way as film cameras.
0
SEC:
Displays the shutter speed in seconds.
[Setting Values: DEG, RSEC]
Memo :
0
“DEG” is selectable only when [WFrame & Bit
Rate] is set to
“24p” or “25p”.
When [WFrame & Bit Rate] is set to other values,
the shutter display setting is fixed at “SEC” and
cannot be selected.
(A
P118 [WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit
Rate b] )
111
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
A/V Set Menu
Menu screen for video output and audio.
Video Set...
For specifying video output-related settings.
(A P112
[Video Set Item] )
Audio Set...
For specifying audio-related settings.
(A P113
[Audio Set Item] )
Video Set Item
Display On TV
For
setting whether to display the display and menu
characters on the external monitor.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
HDMI/SDI Out
For setting the terminal to output the video.
[Setting Values: HDMI+SDI, SDI, HDMI, ROff]
Memo :
0
When the [
Network] setting is set to “On(SDI
Off)”, “HDMI+SDI” and “SDI” are not selectable.
And when “On(HDMI Off)” is set, “HDMI+SDI”
and “HDMI” are not selectable.
9
Resolution
For
selecting the resolution of video output from the
[HDMI]/[SDI] terminal according to the monitor to
be connected.
[Setting Values: 576i, 576p, 480i, 480p, 720p,
R1080i, 1080p]
Memo :
0
When
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B
[HDMI/SDI Out] is set to “HDMI+SDI” or “SDI”,
“1080p” cannot be selected.
0
When
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B
[HDMI/SDI Out] is set to “HDMI+SDI” or “SDI”,
changing the resolution will cause the camera
recorder to restart. “Please Wait...” will be
displayed.
0
The selectable options vary according to the
setting in [System
]/[WResolution]/[WFrame &
Bit Rate] of [System] B [Record Set] B [Record
Format].
0
Cross conversion output is not possible.
9
HDMI Color
0
For setting the color format of HDMI signals.
0
This item is selectable only when
[HDMI/SDI
Out] is set to “HDMI” or “HDMI+SDI”.
[Setting Values: RGB, RAuto]
9
HDMI Enhance
0
For setting the color range of HDMI signals.
When connecting to a PC monitor, set this to
“
On”.
0
This item is selectable only when
[HDMI/SDI
Out] is set to “HDMI” or “HDMI+SDI”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
9
Rec Trigger
For
setting whether to superimpose trigger signals
in tandem with the [HDMI] terminal, [HD/SD SDI]
terminal and the [REC] button on the camera body.
When a compatible device is connected,
recording/stop control signals are output in tandem
with the operation of the [REC] button.
The record trigger output status to the connected
device is indicated by REC B/STBYB on the
display screen.
0
HDMI+SDI:
Superimposes
the trigger signals in tandem with
the [HDMI] terminal, [HD/SD SDI] terminal and
the [REC] button on the camera body and
outputs the recording/stop control signals to the
compatible device.
0
SDI:
Superimposes
the trigger signals in tandem with
the [SDI] terminal as well as the [REC] button on
the camera body and outputs the recording/stop
control signals to the compatible device.
0
HDMI:
Superimposes
the trigger signals in tandem with
the [HDMI] terminal as well as the [REC] button
on the camera body and outputs the recording/
stop control signals to the compatible device.
0
Off:
Does not superimpose the trigger signals.
[Setting Values: ROff, HDMI, SDI, HDMI+SDI]
Memo :
0
Even if REC B/STBYB is displayed on the
display screen, the compatible device may not
necessarily be recording.
0
When
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B
[HDMI/SDI Out] is set to “Off”, [Rec Trigger] is
fixed at “Off” and cannot be selected.
0
When [Main Menu
] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Rec Mode] is set to “Interval Rec”, “Frame
Rec” or “Variable Frame”, [Rec Trigger] is fixed
at “Off” and cannot be selected.
0
Set to “Off” if connecting to a device that does
not support record trigger.
112
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
HDMI TC
For setting whether to superimpose time code to
the [HDMI] terminal.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When
[Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B
[HDMI/SDI Out] is set to “SDI”, [HDMI TC] is
fixed at “Off” and cannot be selected.
0
Set to “Off” if connecting to a device that does
not support HDMI TC.
SD Aspect
For setting the style of displaying down-converted
images on a 4:3 aspect ratio screen.
0
Side Cut:
Displays image with the left and right sides cut
off.
0
Letter:
Displays as a wide image with the top and
bottom blackened.
0
Squeeze:
Displays image that is squeezed horizontally.
[Setting Values: Side Cut, Letter, RSqueeze]
Memo :
0
When [Record Format]
B
[System] is set to “SD”
or “HD+SD”, and when [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”,
this item appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
(A P117 [ System ] )
SD Set Up
For selecting whether to add a setup signal to the
video signal output from the
[AV] output terminal.
Setup signals are added when “7.5%” is selected.
[Setting Values: 7.5%, 0.0%]
(Default values: 7.5% (U model), fixed at “0.0%” (E
model))
Memo :
0
Depending on the menu settings of the camera
recorder and the condition of the cable
connected to it, the setup signal setting may be
fixed
at “0.0%”. “0.0%” is displayed in gray in this
case.
Audio Set Item
Input1 Mic Ref.
For setting the reference input level when the
[INPUT1] selection switch is set to
“MIC” or “MIC
+48V”.
[Setting Values: -62dB, -56dB, R-50dB, -44dB,
-38dB, -32dB]
Input2 Mic Ref.
For setting the reference input level when the
[INPUT2] selection switch is set to
“MIC” or “MIC
+48V”.
[Setting Values: -62dB, -56dB, R-50dB, -44dB,
-38dB, -32dB]
Int. Mic Gain
For
setting the sensitivity of the built-in microphone.
[Setting Values: +12dB, +6dB, R0dB]
AUX Gain
For setting the sensitivity of the [AUX] terminal
input.
[Setting Values: +12dB, +6dB, R0dB]
Ref. Level
For
setting the audio reference level to be recorded
to the SD card. (Applies to both [CH1/CH2].)
[Setting Values: -12dB, -18dB, R-20dB]
Limiter
For setting the limiter operation.
0
Ref. Level:
Sets “Ref. Level
” to the maximum recording
level.
0
-8dBFS, -5dBFS:
Sets “-8dBFS” or “-5dBFS” to the maximum
recording level.
0
Off:
Depending on the settings of the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switches, the
operation may be different as described below.
0
The limiter does not function when
“MANUAL” is set.
0
The limiter functions at -5 dBFS when
“AUTO”
is set.
[Setting Values: Ref. Level, -8dBFS, R-5dBFS,
Off]
AGC Response
9
Attack Time
Sets the time to activate the limiter.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
9
Decay Time
Sets the time to deactivate the limiter operation.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
113
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
AGC Mode
For setting whether to link the limiter operation of
[CH1] and [CH2].
Select “Link
” to link or “Separate” to separate.
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]
Memo :
0
Enabled
only when both the [AUX] input terminal
and [INPUT1/INPUT2] input terminal are set to
“LINE” or “MIC”, and CH1/CH2 of the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] switch is set to “AUTO”.
XLR Manual Level
For setting whether to link manual audio
adjustment operation between
[INPUT1] and
[INPUT2] terminals.
Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.
When this item is set to “Link”, adjust the recording
level using the [CH1] recording level adjustment
knob.
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]
Memo :
0
Enabled only when both the
[INPUT1/INPUT2]
input terminals are set to “LINE” or “MIC”, and
both [CH1]/[CH2] of the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switches are set to
“MANUAL”.
0
When this item is set to
“Link”, [CH2] recording
level adjustment knob is disabled.
Int. Mic Separation
For setting the enhancement level of the stereo
effect of the built-in microphone.
0
1 to 4:
Enhances
the stereo effect. Increasing the value
increases the stereo effect.
0
Effect off:
Does not enhance the stereo effect.
0
Mono:
Sets the built-in microphone to monaural.
[Setting Values: 1 to 4, Effect off, Mono (R2)]
Memo :
0
When any value from 1 to 4 is selected, the
sound quality changes slightly due to the
process of enhancing the stereo effect. This is
normal.
0
This menu is enabled when the
[CH1]/[CH2]
selection switch is set to “INT”.
Test Tone
For specifying whether to output the audio test
signals (1 kHz) during color bar output.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
INPUT1/2 Wind Cut
For
selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of
the audio input signals (low-cut) when the [INPUT1/
INPUT2] switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC+48V”.
Set this item to reduce wind noise from the
microphone.
0
Both:
Enables low-cut on both the [INPUT1] and
[
INPUT2] terminals.
0
INPUT2:
Enables low-cut on the audio of the [INPUT2
]
terminal only.
0
INPUT1:
Enables low-cut on the audio of the
[INPUT1]
terminal only.
0
Off:
Disables low-cut.
[Setting Values: Both, INPUT2, INPUT1, ROff]
Int. Mic Wind Cut
For
selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of
the audio input signals (low-cut) from the built-in
microphone. Set this item to “On” to reduce wind
noise from the microphone.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Equalizer
You
can correct the characteristic and enhance the
sound of the connected microphone using this
equalizer setting.
For setting the audio frequency from a 5-band
equalizer.
0
Frequency:
100Hz, 330Hz, 1kHz, 3.3kHz, 10kHz
0
Variable level:
± 6dB (1dB step)
Memo :
0
Audio will be recorded in the characteristic set
in the equalizer.
0
Set all bands to
“0dB” to bypass the equalizer.
0
When
the equalizer level is set to the + side, the
audio may be distorted. In this case, reduce the
recording level in Manual mode.
0
If the values of multiple frequencies are
changed, the specified levels and the actual
levels may be different due to interference
between the frequency bands.
0
This function is enabled only when both
[INPUT1/2 Wind Cut] and [Int. Mic Wind Cut] are
set to “Off”.
114
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Monitor
For setting the audio sound of the [x] terminal to
stereo or mixed sound when the [MONITOR]
switch on the LCD monitor is set to
“BOTH”.
0
Mix:
Outputs
mixed sound (mixed sound of CH1 and
CH2) to both L and R.
0
Stereo:
Outputs stereo sound (outputs audio sound of
CH1 to L, and CH2 to R).
[Setting Values: RMix, Stereo]
Memo :
0
If both CH1 and CH2 are built-in microphones,
stereo sound is output from the [x] terminal
regardless of the
[Monitor] setting.
Alarm Level
For selecting whether to turn on the warning tone
as well as setting the volume.
The warning tone is output from the monitor
speaker or [x] terminal.
[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low, Off]
Audio On FULL AUTO
For setting whether to enable Auto for audio when
[FULL AUTO] is set to “ON”.
0
SW Set:
Sets the audio recording mode following the
[
CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch
setting.
0
Auto:
Sets audio recording mode to the forced auto
mode.
[Setting Values: SW Set, RAuto]
System Menu
This menu screen allows system-related settings.
For specifying recording settings, formatting and
restoring of SD card, tally lamp settings, network
settings, date/time, time zone, and other settings.
It can also be used to reset the menu settings to
their default values.
Record Set...
For specifying recorded video-related settings.
(A P117
[Record Set Item] )
Media
9
Format Media
For formatting (initializing) an SD card.
Select a card slot (A or B), select
[Format] from
[Cancel]/[Format], and press the Set button (R) to
format (initialize) the card.
(A P41 [Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards] )
9
Restore Media
For restoring an SD card.
Select
a card slot (A or B), and press the Set button
(R) to restore the SD card.
(A P42 [Restoring the SD Card] )
Memo :
0
This
item appears only when the SD card needs
to be restored. However, it is not selectable
when recording in Camera mode and during Clip
Review.
Setup File
This allows you to save the menu settings as well
as the performance results of shutter speed and
AWB.
It is useful to save settings according to different
shooting conditions.
9
Load File...
Loads the settings.
(A P
144 [Loading a Setup File] )
9
Store File...
Saves the settings.
(A P
143 [Saving Setup Files] )
9
Delete File...
Deletes the configured file.
(A P
144 [Deleting Setup Files] )
115
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Auto Power Off
For setting whether to turn off the power
automatically when the camera recorder is not
operated
for more than 5 minutes when the battery
is used. This function is valid only when the battery
is used.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When both the battery and AC adapter are
connected, power from the AC adapter
connection will be used. As such, this function
will not have any effect.
Tally Lamp
For
setting whether to light up the tally lamp during
recording, when the remaining space warning is
displayed, or during live streaming.
o
a
0
Rec/Live Streaming:
Lights up during recording or live streaming.
0
Live Streaming:
Lights up during live streaming. Does not light
up during recording.
0
Rec:
Lights up during recording.
0
Off:
Turns off the indicator.
[Setting Values: Rec/Live Streaming, Live
Streaming, RRec, Off]
o
b
0
On:
Turns on the indicator, indicator blinks.
0
Off:
Turns off the indicator, indicator does not blink.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0
The blinking warning display, such as when the
remaining battery level is low, is enabled in a
setting other than
“Off”.
GPS a
For setting the GPS function to On or Off (power
on/off).
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Language
Switches between languages in the menu screen.
[Setting Values: REnglish, Français, Español] (U
model)
[Setting Values: REnglish, Français, Deutsch,
Italiano, Español, P
усский] (E model)
Network a
To use the network function, set this item to
“On(SDI Off)
” or “On(HDMI Off)”.
0
On(SDI Off):
Uses the network function. However, SDI output
is disabled.
0
On(HDMI Off):
Uses the network function. However, HDMI
output is disabled.
0
Off:
Does not use the network function.
[Setting Values: On(SDI Off), On(HDMI Off), ROff]
Memo :
0
Restriction applies to the following functions
when you are using the network function.
0
SDI and HDMI cannot be output
simultaneously.
0
[
Variable Frame Rate] cannot be selected.
0
[Flash Band Correction]
is fixed at “Off”.
0
[LCD + VF] is fixed at
“Off”.
9
Import Metadata
For importing metadata from the FTP server.
Memo :
0
This
option is not available when [Network] is set
to “Off”.
9
Settings...
For specifying network-related settings.
(A P
122 [Network/Settings Item a] )
Memo :
0
This
option is not available when [Network] is set
to “Off”.
Reset All
Resets all menu settings.
Memo :
0
[Date/Time
] and [Time Zone] cannot be reset.
(A P
117 [ Date/Time ] )
(A P117 [ Time Zone ] )
0
This item is not selectable when recording in
Camera
mode, during Clip Review, and in Media
mode.
116
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Date/Time
For
setting the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Memo :
0
If the signal reception for GPS satellites allows
date and time to be set based on the GPS
information, you can set the time obtained from
the GPS satellite by pressing the
[FOCUS
ASSIST/1] button.
The [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button is grayed out if
information for setting the date and time cannot
be acquired from the GPS satellite. a
0
The
display order of the date (year, month, day)
follows the setting in [Display Settings] B [Date
Style]. However, the 24-hour format is used for
the hour display regardless of the [Time Style]
setting.
(A P
111 [ Date Style ] )
Time Zone
For setting the UTC time difference in units of 30
minutes.
[Setting Values: UTC-00:30-UTC-12:00, UTC,
UTC+14:00-UTC+00:30 (in 30 min increments)]
(Default values: UTC-05:00 (U model), UTC (E
model))
Memo :
0
If [Date/Time] is already set, the [Date/Time]
item is automatically adjusted when [Time
Zone] is altered.
Reserved
For setting the additional function to “On
” or “Off”.
9
Reserved 1 to Reserved 16
Normally set to
“Off”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
System Information
9
Version
Displays information on the firmware version.
9
Fan Hour
For displaying the usage time of the internal fan.
Memo :
0
Under normal environment, dust will
accumulate
on the internal fan when the camera
recorder is used over a long period. Dust may
enter the camera recorder especially if it is used
outdoors. This may affect the image and sound
quality of the camera recorder. Check and
replace the fan after every 9000 hours
(suggested guideline).
9
Open Source License
Displays the license for the open source software
used by this camera recorder.
Record Set Item
Record Format
After setting of all items in the
[Record Format]
menu is complete, select [Set] at the bottom of the
screen to apply the new settings on the camera
recorder and switch the recording format. A
“Please Wait...” message appears during
switching.
9
System
For selecting a system definition.
0
HD:
Records in “HD” (high definition) quality
0
SD:
Records in “SD” (standard definition) quality
0
HD+SD a：
Records in “HD” (high definition) for slot A, and
in “SD”
(standard definition) for slot B.
0
HD+Web a：
Records in
“HD” (high definition) for slot A, and
in low definition for slot B.
[Setting Values: RHD, SD, HD+SD, HD+Web]
Caution :
0
The setting value options for each of the
following item vary depending on the setting of
this item.
a : [WFormat], [WResolution], [WFrame & Bit
Rate]
b : [
Format], [Resolution], [Frame & Bit Rate]
117
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
WFormat a, Format b
For
selecting the format of the file to be recorded to
the SD card in slot A.
a
[Setting Values: RQuickTime(MPEG2),
MP4(MPEG2), MXF(MPEG2), AVCHD,
QuickTime(H.264)]
b
[Setting Values: RQuickTime(MPEG2),
MP4(MPEG2), AVCHD, QuickTime(H.264)]
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to
“HD” or “SD”, the
recording file format will be the same for both SD
cards in slots A and B.
0
When [System] is set to “SD
”, this item is fixed
at “QuickTime(H.264)”.
9
WResolution a, Resolution b
For selecting the image size to be recorded to the
SD card in slot A. (Horizontal x vertical)
The available options vary according to the
[WFormat] a, [Format] b and [System]
settings.
0
When MP4(MPEG2) or QuickTime(MPEG2) is
selected:
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080,
1280x720]
0
When MXF(MPEG2) is selected a:
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080,
1280x720]
0
When AVCHD is selected:
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080]
0
When QuickTime(H.264) is selected:
Fixed at “1920x1080
”
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to “
HD” or “SD”, the
recording definition will be the same for both SD
cards in slots A and B.
0
When [System] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed
as follows.
0
U model: Fixed at “720x480
”
0
E model: Fixed at “720x576
”
0
The selectable values of [WFrame & Bit Rate]
a or [Frame & Bit Rate] b vary according
to the setting of this item.
9
WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit Rate
b
For selecting the recording frame rate and encoding
bit rate for the SD card inserted into slot A.
The selectable options vary according to the settings
of the following items.
WResolution
a,
Resolution
b
WFormat
a,
Format b
WFrame & Bit
Rate a,
Frame & Bit Rate
b
1920x1080 AVCHD [Setting Values:
60p(HQ),
R60i(HQ) (*1),
50p(HQ),
R50i(HQ) (*2),
60i(SP),
50i(SP)]
QuickTime(H.
264)
[Setting Values:
60p(XHQ),
60i(XHQ),
50p(XHQ),
50i(XHQ),
30p(XHQ),
25p(XHQ),
24p(XHQ),
R60i(UHQ) (*1),
R50i(UHQ) (*2),
30p(UHQ),
25p(UHQ),
24p(UHQ)]
Other than
AVCHD and
QuickTime(H.
264)
[Setting Values:
R60i(HQ) (*1),
30p(HQ),
24p(HQ),
R50i(HQ) (*2),
25p(HQ)]
1440x1080 AVCHD [Setting Values:
R60i(LP) (*1),
R50i(LP) (*2),
60i(EP), 50i(EP)]
Other than
AVCHD
[Setting Values:
R60i(HQ) (*1),
R50i(HQ) (*2),
60i(SP), 50i(SP)]
1280x720
MXF(MPEG2)
a
[Setting Values:
R60p(HQ) (*1),
R50p(HQ) (*2)]
Other than
MXF(MPEG2)
a
MP4(MPEG2)
or
QuickTime(
MPEG2)
b
[Setting Values:
R60p(HQ) (*1),
30p(HQ),
24p(HQ),
R50p(HQ) (*2),
25p(HQ), 60p(SP),
50p(SP)]
*1 Default value for U model
*2 Default value for E model
118
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Memo :
0
For details on the combinations of usable
[Record Format
], refer to the following.
(A P
47 [List of Formats] )
0
When [System] is set to “SD”, this item is fixed
as follows for the different models.
0
U model: “60i”
0
E model:
“50i”
0
When
[System] is set to “HD” or “SD”, the frame
rate and encoding bit rate for recording to the SD
cards in slots A and B will be the same.
9
Y Format a
For
selecting the format of the file to be recorded to
the SD card in slot B when [System] is set to “HD
+Web” or “HD+SD”.
The selectable options vary as follows according
to the [System] setting.
0
When “HD+Web” is selected:
“QuickTime(H.264)”
or “AVCHD”
0
When “HD+SD
” is selected:
Fixed at “QuickTime(H.264)”
Memo :
0
When “HD+Web” is selected, and [WFrame &
Bit Rate] is set to
“30p”, “25p”, or “24p”, the
format is fixed at “QuickTime(H.264)”.
9
Y Resolution a
For selecting the size of the image to be recorded
to
the SD card in slot B when [System] is set to “HD
+Web” or “HD+SD”. (Horizontal x vertical)
The available options vary as follows according to
the [System] and [YFormat] settings.
0
When HD+SD is selected:
“720x480
” (U model), “720x576” (E model)
0
When [System] is set to
“HD+Web”, and
[YFormat] to “QuickTime(H.264)”:
“960x540” or “480x270”
0
When [System
] is set to “HD+Web”, and
[YFormat] to “AVCHD”:
Fixed at “1440x1080”
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to “
HD” or “SD”, this item
is fixed at the same value as [WResolution].
9
Y Frame & Bit Rate a
For selecting the frame rate and encoding bit rate
of the image to be recorded to the SD card in slot
B when [System] is set to
“HD+Web” or “HD+SD”.
The available options vary according to the
[System] and [WFrame & Bit Rate] settings.
0
When HD+SD is selected:
Fixed at “60i
” (U model), “50i” (E model)
0
When HD+Web ([YFormat] is set to “AVCHD”)
is selected:
0
When [WFrame & Bit Rate] is set to “60i
”:
“60i(EP)” or “60i(LP)”
0
When [WFrame & Bit Rate] is set to
“50i”:
“50i(EP)” or “50i(LP)”
0
When HD+Web ([YFormat] is set to
“QuickTime(H.264)
”) is selected:
Fixed at “30p”, “25p”, or “24p”
Memo :
0
When [System] is set to “
HD” or “SD”, this item
is fixed at the same value as [WFrame & Bit
Rate].
9
SD Aspect
For setting the aspect ratio of the recorded image
when [System] is set to
“HD+SD” or “SD”.
[Setting Values: R16:9, 4:3]
Memo :
0
When [System]
is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”, this
item is fixed at “16:9”.
119
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Rec Mode
0
For selecting the record mode for recording to
the SD card.
(A P
80 [Special Recording] )
0
The selectable options vary according to the
[Record Format
] menu settings.
Format
No. of Frames for
Frame & Bit Rate
Setting values
MP4
(MPEG2)
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
MXF
(MPEG2)
a
MP4
(MPEG2)
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
b
30p, 25p, 24p Normal, Pre
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec,
Variable Frame
60p, 60i, 50p, 50i Normal, Pre
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec
AVCHD 60p, 60i, 50p, 50i Normal, Pre
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec
QuickTime
(H.264)
60p, 60i, 50p, 50i Normal, Pre
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec
30p, 25p, 24p Normal, Pre
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec,
Variable Frame
Memo :
0
When [Slot
Mode] is set to “Backup”, this item is
fixed at “Normal”.
0
[Variable Frame Rate
] is enabled when
[WResolution]/[YResolution] is set to
“1920x1080” or “1280x720”, and [WFrame & Bit
Rate]/[YFrame & Bit Rate] is set to “30p”, “25p”
or “24p”.
9
Pre Rec Time
For setting the pre-recording time when
[Rec
Mode] is set to “Pre Rec”.
[Setting Values: R5sec, 10sec, 15sec]
Memo :
0
When the frame rate setting in [Main Menu] B
[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B
[Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “XHQ”, “15sec”
cannot be selected.
9
Rec Frames
For setting the number of frames to record when
[Rec Mode] is set to “Frame Rec” or “Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1frame, 3frames, 6frames]
9
Rec Interval
For setting the recording time interval when [Rec
Mode] is set to
“Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1sec, 2sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec,
1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 30min, 1hour]
9
Variable Frame Rate
For setting the frame rate during recording when
[Rec Mode] is set to
“Variable Frame”.
The available options vary according to the settings
for [Record Format] B [WResolution]/
[YResolution] and [WFrame & Bit Rate]/[YFrame
& Bit Rate].
(A P84 [Variable Frame Rec] )
Slot Mode
For setting the operation of the card slot.
0
Series:
Mode that activates the two slots sequentially.
0
Dual:
Mode that activates the two slots at the same
time.
(A P76
[Dual Rec] )
0
Backup:
Mode that enables recording to slot B without
using the [REC] button. This item is selectable
only when [Rec Mode] is set to “Normal”.
Start or stop the recording using the [Backup
Rec] menu or press the [USER1] to [USER7],
[LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD KEY▼], [LCD
KEY◀] button that is assigned with “Backup
Trig”.
(A P78
[Backup Rec] )
120
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Memo :
0
When this is set to
“Series”, and recordable
media are inserted in both slots, pressing the
[REC] button starts recording only to the card in
the selected slot (active slot).
0
When “Series
” is selected, and [Record
Format] B [WFormat] is set to “AVCHD”, the
clips are recorded over the slots seamlessly
without interruption in the video.
0
When
this is set to “Dual”, and recordable media
are inserted in both slots, pressing the [REC]
button starts simultaneous recording to the
cards in both slots.
9
Backup Rec
For
starting/stopping backup recording with [REC]/
[STBY].
This item is selectable only when [Slot Mode] is set
to “Backup”.
Memo :
0
When
recording is stopped due to no remaining
space on the media, etc., this item is fixed at
“STOP” and cannot be selected.
4GB File Spanning(SDXC)
A
recording file is automatically split when the size
exceeds 4 GB, but if an SDXC card is used, you
can record clips larger than 4 GB by setting this
option to “Off”. (Up to a maximum of 64 GB or 4
hours)
0
On:
Splits
a file when it exceeds 4 GB or 30 minutes.
0
Off:
Splits a file when it exceeds 64 GB or 4 hours.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0
To use an SDHC card, set
[4GB File
Spanning(SDXC)] to “On”.
0
This option is only valid if the SD card used for
recording is of the SDXC format.
0
During simultaneous recording, such as Dual
Rec and backup recording, this option is valid
only when the SD cards in both slots are of the
SDXC format.
0
This option is valid only when
[Record Format]
B [WFormat]/[YFormat] is set to
“QuickTime(MPEG2)”, “MXF(MPEG2)”, or
“QuickTime(H.264)”.
(A P118
[WFormat a, Format b] )
(A P119 [ Y Format a ] )
Recording in DCIM Folder
When “On
” is selected, files are recorded to the
DCIM folder of the SD card during MOV recording.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo :
0
When “Off” is selected, folders containing
recorded clips may not be detectable in the MAC
OS environment.
0
To
import clips to a Blu-ray disc & HDD recorder
produced by our company, set this item to “Off”
before recording.
LPCM (QuickTime)
For setting the audio recording format of
QuickTime.
[Setting Values: Dual Mono, RStereo]
Memo :
0
If the definition of the recorded video is Web,
recording
is performed in “Stereo” regardless of
the setting selected. a
Time Stamp
For setting whether to display shooting date/time
information in the recorded video.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
The date/time display style can be changed in
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings
] B [Date Style]/
[Time Style].
(A P
111 [ Date Style ] )
(A P111 [ Time Style ] )
0
When the date/time is hidden while the menu
screen, status screen or other screen is
displayed, the date/time during this period will
not be recorded to the video. A confirmation
screen appears if you try to display the menu
screen or status screen during recording.
0
When [
System] is set to “HD+Web” or “HD+SD”,
the shooting date/time information cannot be
recorded to the image to be recorded in slot B.
a
121
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Clip Set
9
Clip Name Prefix
For setting the first four characters of the name of
the clip file to be recorded to the SD card.
Enter
any of the 38 characters including alphabets
(upper case), numbers (0 to 9), “_” (underscore),
and “-” (hyphen) using the software keyboard.
(A P96 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
[Setting Values: xxxG] (The default value of xxx is
the last three digits of the serial number.)
Memo :
0
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set
]
B [Record Format] B [WFormat] is set to
“AVCHD”, this setting is not reflected in the file
name of the clip.
However, it is recorded as the display name of
the clip in the thumbnail display.
0
“-” (hyphen) in the [Clip Name Prefix
] will be
replaced with “_” (underscore) only when
recording clips to the DCIM folder.
9
Reset Clip Number
For assigning a new number (Clip Number) by
resetting it (0001).
Select [Reset]
and press the Set button (R) to reset
the number.
When [WFormat] is set to “AVCHD”, the clip
number is reset to “00000”.
When other clips exist on the SD card, the smallest
available number is used after reset.
0
Example:
If the [Clip Name Prefix
] is “ABCD”, and
“ABCD0001” already exists on the SD card,
“ABCD0002” will be assigned.
Clear Planning Metadata
Erases the planning metadata downloaded from
the FTP server.
Network/Settings Item a
For specifying network-related settings.
The display of the software keyboard for input
varies according to the item you are setting.
(A P
96 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
Web
For setting the functions that make use of the web
browser.
9
Web Access
To access via a web browser, set to
“On”.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
9
Camera Name
For setting the name displayed on the web
browser. Enter not more than 8 characters using
the software keyboard.
(Default value: HM660)
9
Login Name (Fixed)
The login name is fixed as
“prohd”. It cannot be
changed.
9
Change Password
Changes the password for accessing via a web
browser.
The current password is displayed. Enter a new
password directly.
Enter not more than 31 characters using the
software keyboard.
Live Streaming Set
For specifying settings for distributing live video
images.
Memo :
0
The settings cannot be changed during live
streaming.
0
Users cannot access this menu in the following
cases.
0
When
[Record Format] B [System] is set to
“HD+SD” or “HD+Web”
0
When [Record Format
] B [Frame & Bit
Rate] is set to “24p”, “50p” or “60p”
(*“50p” and “60p” are for 1920x1080
resolution)
122
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Live Streaming
Starts live distribution when “On” is selected.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
“On” cannot be selected if network connection
is not established.
0
“On” cannot be selected when FTP is running.
0
Live
streaming switches to “Off” when the power
is turned off.
9
Server
For selecting the server for live streaming.
[Setting Values: RServer1, Server2, Server3,
Server4]
Memo :
0
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (Live Streaming set to
“On”).
9
Streaming Server
For setting the server for live streaming.
Memo :
0
The setting cannot be changed during live
streaming (Live Streaming set to
“On”).
9
Server1/Server2/Server3/Server4
o
Alias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of
this camera recorder.
The
name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Server] options.
* The default value is “Server1/Server2/Server3/
Server4”.
* You can enter up to 31 characters and ASCII
characters.
o
Type
For setting the system to transfer videos for
distribution.
[Setting Values: RMPEG2-TS/UDP, MPEG2-
TS/TCP, MPEG2-TS/RTP, RTSP/RTP, ZIXI,
RTMP]
Memo :
0
Use reception devices that are compatible with
the respective transfer systems.
0
To use the
“ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is
needed separately.
0
The following items that can be set vary
depending on the setting of this item.
o
Destination Address
For setting details such as the host name and
the
IP address of the live distribution destination.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using single-
byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to 9),
single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
o
Destination URL
For entering the URL of the live distribution
destination beginning with “rtmp://”.
There is no default value (blank).
*
You can enter up to 191 characters and ASCII
characters.
o
Destination Port
Enter the network port number of the live
distribution destination using an integer
between 1 and 65535.
When [Type] is set to
“MPEG2-TS/UDP”,
“MPEG2-TS/TCP” or “MPEG2-TS/RTP”, the
default value is “6504”. If “ZIXI” is set, the default
value is “2088”.
Memo :
0
When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/RTP”, only
even numbers from 2 to 65530 can be specified
for the port number.
0
When [Type
] is set to “MPEG2-TS/RTP” and
[SMPTE 2022-1 FEC] is set to “On”, N+2 and N
+4 port numbers are also used in addition to the
specified port number (N).
o
Stream ID
For setting the registered stream ID of the live
distribution destination.
The
default value varies with the product model.
* Enter not more than 63 characters.
o
Stream Key
Enter the stream key specified at the live
transmission destination.
There is no default value (blank).
*
Enter not more than 63 characters.
o
Password
For setting the [Stream ID] password.
There is no default value (blank).
* Enter
not more than 127 characters. When [Type]
is set to “RTSP/RTP”, enter not more than 31
characters.
o
Latency
For setting the latency mode.
[Setting Values: High, Medium, RLow,
Minimun(ZIXI Off)]
123
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
o
Adaptive Bit Rate
If “On
” is selected, the bit rate setting value of
live streaming is set to maximum limit, and the
bit rate is changed automatically according to
changes in the network bandwidth.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
[Adaptive Bit Rate
] is selectable when [Type] is
set to “ZIXI” and [Latency] is set to a value other
than “Minimun(ZIXI Off)”.
*The
bit rate is displayed on the status screen only
when “On” is set.
o
PCR Jitter
Setting to “Low” reduces to PCR jitter of live
streaming.
[Setting Values: Low, RNormal]
Memo :
0
This
item is selectable only when [Type] is set to
“MPEG2-TS/UDP”.
o
SMPTE 2022-1 FEC
Set to “On” to use FEC (Forward Error
Correction).
A
transmission system that recovers the missing
packets in the decoding process without having
to retransmit the missing packets.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
* The decoder must be compatible with SMPTE
2022-1.
o
FEC Matrix
For setting the amount of FEC (Forward Error
Correction) overhead for configuring
SMPTE2022-1.
(A P177
[Setting the FEC Matrix] )
Memo :
0
This item is selectable only when
[SMPTE
2022-1 FEC] is set to “On”.
9
Resolution
For
setting the resolution of the video image during
live distribution.
The camera recorder restarts when the setting is
changed. “Please Wait...” will be displayed.
The available options vary according to the settings
for [WResolution] and [WFrame & Bit Rate] under
[Record Format].
W Resolution
No. of
Frames for
WFrame &
Bit Rate
Setting values
(R: default value)
1920x1080,
1440x1080
60i, 30p R1920x1080 (*1),
1280x720,
720x480,
640x360
50i, 25p R1920x1080 (*2),
1280x720,
720x576,
640x360
1280x720 60p, 30p 1280x720,
720x480,
640x360
50p, 25p 1280x720,
720x576,
640x360
720x480
(U model)
60i 720x480,
640x360
720x576
(E model)
50i 720x576,
640x360
*1 Default value for U model
*2 Default value for E model
Memo :
0
The settings cannot be changed during live
streaming or recording.
0
The Aspect Ratio for the live streaming image is
fixed to “16:9”.
9
Frame & Bit Rate
For setting the frame rate and encoding bit rate of
the video image during live distribution.
The
available options vary according to the settings
for [Resolution] above, as well as [WFrame & Bit
Rate] under [Record Format].
124
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
No. of Frames for
W
Frame & Bit
Rate
Resolution
Setting values
(R: default value)
60p, 60i, 30p 1920x1080 60i (12.0 M),
R 60i (8.0 M) (*1),
60i (5.0 M),
60i (3.0 M)
1280x720 30p (8.0 M),
30p (5.0 M),
30p (3.0 M),
30p (1.5 M)
720x480 60i (8.0 M),
60i (5.0 M),
60i (3.0 M),
60i (1.5 M),
60i (0.8 M),
60i (0.3 M)
640x360 30p (3.0 M),
30p (1.5 M),
30p (0.8 M),
30p (0.3 M)
50p, 50i, 25p 1920x1080 50i (12.0 M),
R 50i (8.0 M) (*2),
50i (5.0 M),
50i (3.0 M)
1280x720 25p (8.0 M),
25p (5.0 M),
25p (3.0 M),
25p (1.5 M)
720x576 50i (8.0 M),
50i (5.0 M),
50i (3.0 M),
50i (1.5 M),
50i (0.8 M),
50i (0.3 M)
640x360 25p (3.0 M),
25p (1.5 M),
25p (0.8 M),
25p (0.3 M)
*1 Default value for U model
*2
Default value for E model
Memo :
0
The settings cannot be changed during live
streaming.
0
An
encoding bit rate exceeding 5.0 Mbps cannot
be selected when [Type] is set to “MPEG2-
TS/RTP” or “RTSP/RTP”.
0
An
encoding bit rate exceeding 5.0 Mbps cannot
be selected when [Type] is set to “ZIXI” and
[Latency] is set to other than “Low”.
0
An
encoding bit rate exceeding 3.0 Mbps cannot
be selected when [Type] is set to “ZIXI” and
[Latency] is set to “Low”, or when [Type] is set to
“RTMP”.
Connection Setup
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
network.
A [Wizard] screen will appear according to the
adapter connected to the rear [
HOST] terminal.
Follow the instructions to perform the setting.
You can Load, Store, and Delete the settings
specified on the [Wizard] screen.
9
Wizard
A [Wizard]
screen appears according to the type of
adapter that is connected to the rear [HOST]
terminal.
Follow the instructions.
9
Load
Loads the settings on the [Wizard
] screen.
(A P174 [Reading the Connection Settings
File] )
9
Store
Saves the settings on the
[Wizard] screen.
(A P173 [Saving the Connection Settings File] )
9
Delete
Deletes the saved settings.
(A P
174 [Deleting Connection Settings] )
9
APN
For specifying APN (Access Point Name).
*
This item is grayed out and cannot be selected if
APN cannot be set for the adapter attached.
Caution :
0
The APN setting is written into the cellular
adapter, not this camera recorder.
Setting a wrong APN may result in
communication failure or expensive bills from
the
telecommunications company. Set the APN
correctly.
(A P152 [Connecting via Cellular Adapter] )
Metadata Server
For registering the FTP server for importing the
metadata and the path of the file to be imported.
Up to 4 settings can be registered.
125
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
9
Meta-FTP1 to Meta-FTP4
(The name specified in the respective
[Alias
] items is displayed)
o Alias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
camera recorder.
The name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Import Metadata] options.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
o Protocol
For setting the protocol of the FTP server to be
connected.
0
FTP:
Protocol
that does not encrypt the incoming and
outgoing data.
0
SFTP:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSH.
0
FTPS:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an implicit mode
(starts encrypted communication once
connection starts).
0
FTPES:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an explicit mode
(starts encrypted communication after
permission is granted).
[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES]
o Server
For setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)
or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using single-
byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to 9),
single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
o Port
Enter the FTP server port number to use using an
integer between 1 and 65535.
The default value varies with the Protocol setting.
(FTP: 21, SFTP: 22, FTPS: 990, FTPES: 21)
o File Path
Enter the path name for the metadata file (“/pub/
meta.xml”, “/home/user/meta2.xml”, etc.)
* Enter not more than 127 characters.
o Username
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
o Password
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
o PASV Mode
For
setting whether to set the communication mode
used for file transfer to the passive mode.
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a
connection from the FTP server to the camera
cannot be established.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [Protocol] is set to “SFTP
”, this item
appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
Clip Server
For setting the server and directory for uploading
recorded clips in the SD card to the FTP server.
9
Clip-FTP1 to Clip-FTP4
(The name specified in the respective
[Alias
] items is displayed)
o Alias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
camera recorder.
The name set in this item will appear on the [FTP
Upload] action screen of the thumbnail display.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
o Protocol
For setting the protocol of the FTP server to be
connected.
0
FTP:
Protocol
that does not encrypt the incoming and
outgoing data.
0
SFTP:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSH.
0
FTPS:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an implicit mode
(starts encrypted communication once
connection starts).
0
FTPES:
Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing
data using SSL or TLS. It uses an explicit mode
(starts encrypted communication after
permission is granted).
0
ZIXI:
Enables stable transmission by reducing jitter
and packet loss significantly through
communicating via a relay server.
[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES, ZIXI]
Memo :
0
To use the
“ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is
needed separately.
0
If “ZIXI” is set, the resume function is enabled.
126
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
o Server
For
setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)
or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using single-
byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to 9),
single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].
o Port
Enter the FTP server port number to use using an
integer between 1 and 65535.
The default value varies with the Protocol setting.
(FTP: 21, SFTP: 22, FTPS: 990, FTPES: 21, ZIXI:
2088)
o Dir. Path
Enter the path name for the directory to upload to
(“/pub”, “/home/user”, etc.)
* Enter not more than 127 characters.
o Username
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
o Stream ID
For setting the registered stream ID of the upload
destination.
The default value varies with the product model.
* Enter not more than 63 characters.
o Password
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters. When
[Protocol] is set to “ZIXI”, enter not more than 127
characters.
o PASV Mode
For setting whether to set the communication mode
used for file transfer to the passive mode.
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a
connection from the FTP server to the camera
cannot be established.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo :
0
When [
Protocol] is set to “SFTP” or “ZIXI”, this
item appears as “---” and cannot be selected.
Reset Network
Restores all items in the
[Network] menu to their
default settings.
Adding/Editing
Frequently Used Menu
Items (Favorites Menu)
You
can select and add/edit frequently used menu
items freely to create a personal menu screen
(Favorites Menu).
Memo :
0
[Favorites Menu
] is only enabled in the Camera
mode. [Favorites Menu] remains unchanged
even when the recording format changes.
0
Up to 20 menu items can be added.
0
Added
items in [Favorites Menu] will not be reset
even when [Main Menu] B [Reset All] is
executed.
0
Long descriptive names may be displayed for
the menu items in [Favorites Menu] to enable
better understanding.
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1 OIS / 2
TIME CODE
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
DISPLAY
127
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu
1
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to open
the [
Main Menu] screen.
2
Select the menu or submenu item to add.
.
2
Memo :
0
Adding items to [Favorites Menu] cannot be
performed in the following cases. [USER1 Add]
is displayed in gray in the operation guide.
0
Selected item is already added to [Favorites
Menu].
0
Number
of menu items that can be added (20
items) is exceeded.
3
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
A screen to confirm the addition appears.
4
Select [Add] and press the Set button (R).
The selected menu item is added to [Favorites
Menu].
.
4
Editing Favorites Menu
You can delete or change the order of the items
added to [Favorites Menu].
Deleting Items from [Favorites Menu]
1
Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
A
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to open
the [
Main Menu] screen.
B
Press the [DISPLAY] button or press and
hold down the [MENU/THUMB] button to
open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
2
Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
.
2
Header
(Magenta)
3
Select the menu or submenu item to delete.
.
3
128
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
4
Press the [OIS/2] button.
A delete mark (b) appears at the beginning of
the menu item.
.
Memo :
0
When the [OIS/2] button is pressed again while
the menu item with the delete mark (b) is
selected, the menu item will be excluded from
the
items to be deleted and the delete mark (b)
disappears.
5
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
6
Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
.
6
Memo :
0
Deletion is not complete until the changes are
saved with
[Save & Exit].
0
To exit the editing mode without deleting any
items, select
[Exit without Saving].
0
To return to the editing mode, select
[Cancel].
Changing the Order of Items in [Favorites
Menu
]
.
AE LEVEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1 OIS / 2
TIME CODE
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
DISPLAY
1
Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to open the
[Favorites Menu] screen.
2
Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
.
2
Header
(Magenta)
129
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
3
Select the menu or submenu item to move
and press the Set button (R).
The moving mode is activated and a position
selection bar for the move appears.
.
3
Position
Selection Bar
4
Select the position to move to with the
cross-shaped button (JK).
Move the position selection bar with the cross-
shaped button (JK) and select a position to
move to.
5
Press the Set button (R).
The selected item moves to the new position.
.
5
4
6
Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
7
Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
.
7
Memo :
0
Moving is not complete until the changes are
saved with
[Save & Exit].
0
To exit the editing mode without saving any
changes, select [Exit without Saving
].
0
To return to the editing mode, select
[Cancel].
130
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Display Screen in Camera
Mode
Display 0 screen
This screen displays the event. It is also used to
display warnings only.
.
100min
50min
282min
12.5/ 30fps
0
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 64
100mi
n
5
0m
i
n
2
82
m
i
n
P 13000
K
1
/
1
00
F
1
.
6
0
d
B
AE
+
6
ND
1
/
6
4
※2
※1
D
c
I
J
H
X
b
a
A
g
e
f
*1 Appears only during warnings
*2
Appears only during operation
Display 1 screen
.
100min
50min
282min
12.5/ 30fps
0
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 64
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00:00:00.00
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
100mi
n
5
0m
i
n
2
82
m
in
※
D
A
G
LI
TK M
N
P
R
Q
S
U
W
V
YZf e
O
J
H
X
b
cg
a
* Appears only during warnings
Display 2 screen
.
100min
50min
282min
12.5/ 30fps
0
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 / 64
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00:00:00.00
1920x1080
30p HQ
4030 20 10 0
5 . 6 f t
D
g
C
G
LI
K M
N
P
R
Q
S
U
W
V
Y
d
b
E
F
B
O
J
H
X
a
Zf e
cA
T
A
OK Mark
Displayed
when OK mark has been appended.
(A P90 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )
B
Voltage/Battery Power
Displays
the current status of the power supply
in use.
(A P30 [Power Status Display] )
Memo :
0
Displayed
in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens
during warnings only.
C
Remaining Space on Media
Displays
the remaining recording time of the SD
cards in slot A and slot B separately.
W
: Currently selected slot. (White card)
W z : Write-protect switch of SD card is set.
W!INVALID : SD card cannot be read or
written to, or restored.
W!FORMAT : SD card requires
formatting.
W!RESTORE : SD card requires restoring.
W
!INCORRECT
:
0
When Record Set is set to other than
“AVCHD”/“SD”/“Web” with a Class 4 SD card
inserted.
0
When the SD card is not supported.
0
When an SD card lower than Class 10 is
inserted while in the XHQ mode.
W!REC INH
:
0
When attempting to record in 50i(HQ)/
50i(SP) to an SD card recorded in
AVCHD60i(HQ)/60i(SP) (or vice versa).
0
When an SDHC card is inserted while [4GB
File Spanning(SDXC)] is set to “Off”.
(A
P121 [ 4GB File Spanning(SDXC) ] )
The following icons are displayed during FTP
upload. a
(A P155 [Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
a] )
Icon Status
.
FTP transfer is in progress.
Three images are alternately
displayed, and the arrows
become animated. In this case,
instead
of the recordable time of
the SD card, an estimated value
of the remaining transfer time is
displayed.
.
(Yellow)
Error has occurred during FTP
transfer.
131
Display/Status Screen
Memo :
0
This item is not displayed when
[Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Media
Remain] is set to “Off”. However, warnings will
be displayed.
(A P
110 [ Media Remain ] )
0
Displayed on the Display 0 and Display 1
screens
only in the case of warnings. (When the
remaining time is shorter than 3 minutes)
The icons appear on all display screens in the
following cases.
0
When recording is performed to only one of
the slots while [Main Menu
] B [System] B
[Record Set] B [Slot Mode] is set to “Dual”.
(A P120
[ Slot Mode ] )
0
When recording is performed to only one of
the slots while [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System]
is set to “HD+SD” or “HD+Web”. a
(A P117
[ System ] )
0
The displayed time is an estimate.
D
Variable Frame Rate
Displayed as xx/yy fps (xx: recording frame rate,
yy: playback frame rate) only when [Rec Mode]
is set to “Variable Frame”.
(A P120 [ Rec Mode ] )
E
Resolution
Displays the video image resolution.
Memo :
0
This item is not displayed when
[Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Record
Format] is set to “Off”.
(A P
110 [ Record Format ] )
F
Frame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
Memo :
0
This item is not displayed when
[Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Record
Format] is set to “Off”.
(A P110
[ Record Format ] )
G
Audio Level Meter
0
Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.
0
a appears on the screen when in the Auto
mode.
.
4 030 20 10 0
0
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Rec Mode] is set to
“Frame Rec”,
“Interval Rec”, or “Variable Frame”, audio
cannot be recorded and is indicated by the
x mark.
.
4 030 20 10 0
Memo :
0
This item is not displayed when
[Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Audio Meter]
is set to “Off”.
(A P
111 [ Audio Meter ] )
H
GPS Mark a
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [GPS
] is set
to “On”, the signal reception status is displayed.
(A P116 [ GPS a ] )
Memo :
0
The display changes according to the signal
reception sensitivity. If signals cannot be
received, the H mark appears in yellow.
0
This item is not displayed when
[GPS] is set to
“Off”.
I
Volume Operation Indicator
Displayed when there are changes made to the
volume of the headphone, speaker (0 to 15),
and the values of LCD BRIGHT, PEAKING (-10
to +10).
.
12
LCD BRIGHT
PEAKING
-10
0
0
Memo :
0
There is no audio output from the speaker in
Camera mode.
J
Flash Band Correction Mark
This item is displayed when
[Main Menu] B
[Camera Function] B [Flash Band Correction] is
set to “On”.
(A P98 [ Flash Band Correction ] )
K
Image Stabilizer Mark
Displayed when the image stabilizer is ON.
i
: When [Level] of [OIS] is set to
“Normal”.
j
: When [Level] of [OIS] is set to
“High”.
132
Display/Status Screen
Memo :
0
If image stabilizer is set to
“OFF” when the
Display 0 screen is displayed, h appears for 3
seconds.
0
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
L
White Balance Mode
Displays the current white balance mode.
(*****K indicates color temperature)
A<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
Auto A.
B<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
Auto B.
P<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
Preset.
a
<FAW> : During Full Auto White Balance
mode.
Z
<FAW> : When [AE LOCK] is set to “On”
during Full Auto White Balance
mode.
Memo :
0
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
M
Shutter
0
The
current shutter speed is displayed when
the shutter is set to “On”.
(A P
98 [ Shutter ] )
0
a
is displayed when the [FULL AUTO] switch
is set to “ON” to enable Full Auto shooting
mode, or when the [SHUTTER] button is
pressed to enable automatic shutter mode.
Memo :
0
The variable range of the shutter speed varies
according to the video format settings.
(A P56
[Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
0
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
0
If
the shutter speed is not displayed, the shutter
is OFF.
N
Iris F-Number
Displays F-number of the lens iris.
O
Gain
0
Displays the gain value.
0
a is displayed in AGC mode during Manual
shooting.
0
Z
is displayed when AE LOCK is set to “ON”.
0
“LUX30” or “LUX36” is displayed when in the
low-light shooting mode.
Memo :
0
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
P
AE Level
0
Appears when the AE function is activated,
and
[Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B
[AE Level] is set to a value other than
“Normal”.
(A P98 [ AE Level ] )
0
When operated while manual operation is
disabled, “AE” blinks for about 5 seconds.
0
When face detection is enabled and
[Face
Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, q appears on the
left side of “AE”.
(A P52 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
Q
ND Filter Position
Displays the current ND filter position.
Memo :
0
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [ND Filter] is
set to “Off”.
(A P110
[ ND Filter ] )
0
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
R
Focus Display
0
Displays the approximate distance to the
subject in focus during manual focus.
0
e is displayed during Auto Focus.
0
When
face detection is enabled, q appears
on the left side of e.
(A P52 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
(A P101 [ Face Detect ] )
0
If [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [AF
Assist] is set to “Area”, the
icon appears
on the left side of e.
(A P
99 [ AF Assist ] )
Memo :
0
You can specify the display method (Feet/
Meter) in
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display
Settings] B [Focus].
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(A P
110 [ Focus ] )
0
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
S
Zebra pattern
During zebra pattern display, (zebra icon)
is displayed on the display screen in Camera
mode.
(A P71 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )
133
Display/Status Screen
T
Focus Assist
0
“FOCUS
” is displayed when auto focus is
activated.
0
When ACCU-Focus is enabled, “ACCU-
FOCUS
” blinks for about 10 seconds while
Focus Assist starts up, after which the
“FOCUS” indicator lights up.
0
If recording starts while [ACCU-Focus
] is
active, [ACCU-Focus] will be forcibly
deactivated.
(A P
108 [ Focus Assist ] )
Memo :
0
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
U
Luminance Information
Displayed when the Spot Meter function is
activated.
(A P72 [Setting Spot Meter] )
MAX : Maximum luminance
MIN : Minimum luminance
V
Date/Time Display
Displays the current date and time.
Memo :
0
The date/time display style can be specified in
[Main
Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B
[Date Style]/[Time Style].
(A P
111 [ Date Style ] )
(A P111 [ Time Style ] )
0
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Date/Time] is
set to “Off”.
(A P
111 [ Date/Time ] )
0
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record Set]
B [Time Stamp] is set to “On”, this item is not
displayed.
(A P121
[ Time Stamp ] )
W
Zoom Display
0
Displays the zoom position. (Zoom bar or
value)
0
The zoom bar will only be displayed for 3
seconds after the zoom operation is
activated.
0
The
value will always be displayed. (0 to 99)
Memo :
0
You can specify the display method (Number/
Bar)
in [LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B “Zoom”.
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(A P
110 [ Zoom ] )
0
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
X
Network Connection Icon a
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network] is
set to “On(SDI Off)” or “On(HDMI Off)
”, the
network connection status is displayed.
This icon is not displayed when “Off” is selected.
(A P116 [ Network a ] )
Icon Status
.
(Blink)
Connection is not established
(starting up, preparing for
connection)
.
(Yellow)
Connection is not established
(preparing for connection)
.
Connection is established
.
When a USB adapter different
from the connection settings is
detected
(No display) When an incompatible USB
adapter is detected, or when
[Network] is set to “
Off”
Memo :
0
When a cellular adapter that supports LTE
connection
display is in use, “LTE” will appear to
the left of the above icon when LTE connection
is detected.
Y
Time Code (I)/User’s Bit (J) Display
0
Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second:
frame) or user’s bit data recorded in
the SD card being played back.
0
Example of time code display:
.
00:00:00:00
※
* Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot (.)
denotes drop frames.
0
Example of user’s bit display:
.
FF EE DD 20
134
Display/Status Screen
Memo :
0
You can specify whether to display the time
code, user’s bit, or turn off the display in
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings
] B [TC/UB].
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(A P
111 [ TC/UB ] )
Z
Time Code Lock Indicator
When the built-in time code generator is
synchronized to the external time code data
input during the synchronization of time code
with another camera recorder, Z lights up.
(A P
70 [Synchronizing Time Code on Another
Camera] )
a
Live streaming mark a
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set] B [Live
Streaming] is set to “On”, the distribution status
is displayed.
(A P123 [ Live Streaming ] )
Icon Status
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (good
connection quality)
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (poor
connection quality)
.
(Yellow)
Connection pending or
connection failed
b
Event/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
(A P
178 [Error Messages and Actions] )
c
Media Status
---- : No card found in the selected
slot
STBY : Recording standby
RREC : Recording
REVIEW : Clip Review
(A P74 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
STBY P : Pre Rec recording standby
(A P80 [Pre Rec] )
RRECP : Pre Rec recording
(A P80 [Pre Rec] )
STBY C : Clip Continuous Rec recording
standby
(A P80 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
RRECC : Clip
Continuous Rec recording
(A P80 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
STBYC
(displayed in
yellow)
: Clip Continuous Rec recording
pause
(A P80 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
STBY N : Interval Rec recording standby
(A P83 [Interval Rec] )
STBYN
(displayed in
red)
: Interval recording pause
RRECN : Interval Rec recording
(A P83 [Interval Rec] )
STBY M : Frame Rec recording standby
(A P82 [Frame Rec] )
RRECM : Frame Rec recording
(A P82 [Frame Rec] )
STBYM
(displayed in
yellow)
: Frame Rec recording pause
(A P82 [Frame Rec] )
STOP : Unable to record to the card in
the slot
P.OFF : Power OFF
d
Dual Rec/Backup Rec Display
“DUAL” is displayed in the Dual Rec mode and
“BACKUP” is displayed in the Backup Rec
mode.
(A P120 [ Slot Mode ] )
Memo :
0
This item is not displayed when
[Slot Mode] is
set to “Series”.
0
This item is not displayed when
[Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Media
Remain] is set to “Off”. However, warnings will
be displayed.
(A P
110 [ Media Remain ] )
0
Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens
during warnings only. (When the remaining time
is shorter than 3 minutes)
e
Record Trigger
STBY B :
When [Rec Trigger] is set to “On”
and recording is stopped
REC B : When [Rec Trigger] is set to “On”
and recording is in progress
f
Expanded focus
“EXPANDED” (yellow) is displayed during
expanded focus.
g
Operation lock
The r icon appears during operation lock.
(A P44 [Operation Lock Feature] )
135
Display/Status Screen
Display Screen in Media
Mode
Media Display 0 Screen
This screen displays the media status or event. It
is also used to display warnings only.
.
282min
+5
1000/ 2000
K
A
G
I
N
Q
O
P
M
2
82
m
i
n
※
* Appears only during warnings
Media Display 1 Screen
.
282min
0
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00:00:00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20 10 0
1000/ 2000
K
A
F
G
I
J
LN
Q
O
C
D
P
M
B
Media Display 2 Screen
.
282min
0
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00:00:00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20 10 0
1000/ 2000
K
B
A
F
G
I
J
LN
Q
O
C
D
P
E
M
H
A
Media
0
Displays the media slot (A or B) of the
currently played clip.
0
z appears when the write-protect switch of
the SD card is set.
B
Voltage/Battery Power
Displays
the current status of the power supply
in use.
(A P30 [Power Status Display] )
Memo :
0
Displayed in the Media Display 0 screen during
warnings only.
C
Resolution
Displays the video image resolution.
D
Frame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
E
Operation Guide
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
F
Audio Level Meter
Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.
.
4 030 20 10 0
Memo :
0
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu] B
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings] B [Audio Meter]
is set to “Off”.
(A P
111 [ Audio Meter ] )
G
Volume Operation Indicator
Displayed
when there are changes made to the
volume of the headphone, speaker (0 to 15),
and the value of LCD BRIGHT (-10 to +10).
(A P132 [Volume Operation Indicator] )
H
Position bar
Displays the current position in the video.
During trimming, the position bar appears in
green, and icons for the in and out points are
displayed.
6
: Current position of the video
7
: Position to start trimming
(In point)
8
: Position to end trimming
(Out point)
136
Display/Status Screen
I
Information Display
Use the
[AE LOCK/4] button to switch between
camera information display, GPS display and
turning off the display.
0
The
GPS display displays information on the
recording location of the video being played
back only when GPS information has been
recorded.
The local date/time is displayed.
0
Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
.
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
+35.483197
+139.652172
Oct 30,2016
07:01:58PM
AE LOCK/4
AE LOCK/4
AE LOCK/4
GPS Display
Camera Information
Display
Hide
Memo :
0
Trimming information is displayed while
trimming is in progress. You cannot switch the
display using the [AE LOCK/4] button during this
process.
J
Date/Time Display
Displays the date/time that is recorded on the
currently played SD card.
Memo :
0
The date/time display style can be specified in
[LCD/VF] B [Display Settings
] B [Date Style]/
[Time Style].
(A P
111 [ Date Style ] )
(A P111 [ Time Style ] )
K
Network Connection Icon a
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network] is
set to
“On(SDI Off)” or “On(HDMI Off)”, the
network connection status is displayed.
This icon is not displayed when “Off” is selected.
(A P116 [ Network a ] )
Icon Status
.
(Blink)
Connection is not established
(starting up, preparing for
connection)
.
(Yellow)
Connection is not established
(preparing for connection)
.
Connection is established
.
When a USB adapter different
from the connection settings is
detected
(No display) When an incompatible USB
adapter is detected, or when
[Network] is set to “
Off”
Memo :
0
When a cellular adapter that supports LTE
connection
display is in use, “LTE” will appear to
the left of the above icon when LTE connection
is detected.
L
Time Code (I)/User’s Bit (J) Display
0
Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame) or user’s bit data recorded in
the SD card being played back.
0
Example of time code display:
.
00:00:00:00
※
* Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot (.)
denotes drop frames.
0
Example of user’s bit display:
.
FF EE DD 20
Memo :
0
You can specify whether to display the time
code, user’s bit, or turn off the display in [TC/UB]
of [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Display
Settings].
(A
P111 [ TC/UB ] )
137
Display/Status Screen
M
Event/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
(A P
178 [Error Messages and Actions] )
N
Media Status
PLAY : Playing
STILL : Still picture playback mode
FWD * : High-speed playback in the
forward direction (* playback
speed: 5x, 15x, 60x, or 360x)
REV * : High-speed playback in the
reverse direction (* reverse
playback speed: 5x, 15x, 60x, or
360x)
STOP : Stop mode
P.OFF : Power OFF
O
Check Mark
Displayed when the currently played clip is
selected.
P
OK Mark
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.
(A P90 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )
Q
Clip Information
Displays current clip number/total number of
clips.
138
Display/Status Screen
Status Screen
For checking the settings of the camera recorder.
Camera 1 Screen/Camera 2 Screen
For checking information related to shooting using
the camera recorder.
.
USER Switch Set Screen
For checking the status (functions assigned) of the
user buttons.
(A P38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
.
Audio Screen
For checking the settings related to audio input.
(A P113
[Audio Set Item] )
.
Audio Level Screen
For checking audio related information such as
microphone volume level.
(A P63 [Audio Recording] )
.
Video Screen
For checking the settings related to video output.
(A
P112 [Video Set Item] )
.
Planning Metadata Screen
For checking the current planning metadata
setting.
(A
P117 [ Record Format ] )
.
Network Screen a
For checking the network-related settings.
(A P125
[ Wizard ] )
.
139
Display/Status Screen
Marker and Safety Zone
Displays (Camera Mode
Only)
The marker and safety zone displays are useful in
helping you determine the angle of view for the
image according to the shooting purpose.
The
marker is displayed only in the Camera mode.
Displaying the Grid Marker
1
Set [LCD/VF] B [Marker Settings
] B [Grid
Marker] to “On”.
(A P
109 [ Grid Marker ] )
A grid that divides the screen into 3x3 is
displayed.
.
Memo :
0
When [Grid Marker] is set to
“On”, [Aspect
Ratio], [Aspect Marker], and [Safety Zone] do
not function.
0
Example of display when [Aspect Ratio] = “4:3”,
[Aspect Marker] = “Line+Halftone”, and [Center
Mark] = “On”
.
Aspect Marker
Center MarkSafety Zone
Memo :
0
You can turn On/Off the safety zone and center
mark displays using
[LCD/VF] B [Marker
Settings] B [Aspect Ratio], [Safety Zone], and
[Center Mark].
(A P
110 [ Safety Zone ] )
Smoothening the Skin
Color (Skin Detail
Function)
The
Skin Detail function can be used to reduce the
contour enhancement of video signals for only the
skin areas so as to produce a smoother skin tone.
1
Set [Skin Detail] to “On”.
(A P
106 [ Skin Detail ] )
Set [Main Menu] B [Camera Process] B
[Detail]/[Adjust] B [Skin Detail] to “On”.
Memo :
0
You can specify the adjustment level for the
contour enhancement of the skin tone in
[Main
Menu] B [Camera Process] B [Detail]/[Adjust]
B [Skin Detail]/[Level].
(A P
106 [ Level ] )
Color Bar Output
Color bars can be output on this camera recorder.
Memo :
0
The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
(A P114 [ Test Tone ] )
To Output the Color Bar Using the Menu
To output color bars, follow the setting procedure
below.
1
Set [Camera Function] B [Bars
] to “On”.
(A P
98 [ Bars ] )
Color bars are output.
To Output the Color Bar Using the User Button
1
Assign the “Bars” function to any of the
user buttons.
(A P38
[Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
2
Press the user button that is assigned with
“
Bars”.
Color bars are output.
140
Camera Features
Adjusting Color Matrix
0
The color matrix of the camera recorder can be
adjusted to a color of the user’s preference.
0
When shooting is performed using multiple
cameras,
the colors of the different cameras can
be adjusted, and a color of the user’s preference
can be set on this camera recorder.
0
The Saturation, Hue and Lightness of the
primary and complementary colors (6 colors in
total) can be set individually.
0
Adjust the color on the vector scope and
waveform monitor using the DSC color chart.
* The adjusted values of “Standard”, “Cinema
Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued”
in [Color Matrix]
can be stored individually.
(A P104 [ Color Matrix ] )
1
Select [Camera Process] B [Color Matrix
]/
[Adjust].
(A P104
[ Adjust ] )
2
Adjust Hue.
0
Select the color using the cross-shaped
button (JK) and confirm using the cross-
shaped button (I). (The cursor moves to
Hue.)
0
Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)
rotates
the hue in the clockwise direction on
the vector scope.
0
Pressing the cross-shaped button (K)
rotates the hue in the anti-clockwise
direction on the vector scope.
.
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
Magenta
Green
BlueYell ow
CyanRed
3
Adjust Saturation.
0
Press the cross-shaped button (I) to move
the cursor to Saturation.
0
Each of the colors changes in the direction
indicated by the arrow on the vector scope.
0
Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)
moves the color outward from the center of
the circle on the vector scope.
0
Pressing the cross-shaped button (K)
moves the color toward to the center of the
circle on the vector scope.
.
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
Y
I
Mg
R
Cy
B
G
YI
I
Mg
Magenta
Green
BlueYell ow
CyanRed
4
Adjust Lightness.
0
Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)
lightens; and pressing the cross-shaped
button (K) darkens.
0
Press the cross-shaped button (I) to return
the cursor to Hue.
141
Camera Features
Configuring Setup Files
The menu settings can be stored on the camera
recorder or an SD card by saving them as a setup
file.
Loading a saved setup file enables you to
reproduce the appropriate setup state speedily.
The following types of setup files are available.
o
Picture File:
File that contains image creation settings in
accordance
to the shooting conditions ([Camera
Process] menu items).
o
All File:
File that contains all menu settings, ranging from
video
format settings to image creation settings
such as device settings and shooting
conditions, as well as the contents of the
[Favorites Menu].
o
User File:
File that contains settings from All File that are
not included in the [Camera Process
] menu
items.
(A P102 [Camera Process Menu] )
Memo :
0
Make use of the
[Setup File] menu to save or
load a setup file.
0
The following operations can be performed on
the [
Setup File] menu.
0
[Saving Setup Files] (A P 143
)
0
[Loading a Setup File] (A P 144)
0
[Deleting Setup Files] (A P 144)
Number of Storable Setup Files
o
Picture File
Camera recorder : [CAM1] to [CAM4]
SD slot A
: [ W 1 ] to [ W 8 ]
SD slot B : [ Y 1 ] to [ Y 8 ]
o
User File/All File
Camera recorder : [CAM1] to [CAM2]
SD slot A
: [ W 1 ] to [ W 8 ]
SD slot B : [ Y 1 ] to [ Y 8 ]
Compatibility
o
Picture File
Only Picture File of the GY-HM660 and
GY-HM620 series can be loaded.
o
User File/All File
0
Only User File/All File of the GY-HM660 and
GY-HM620 series can be loaded.
0
When
User File/All File saved using GY-HM660
is loaded, functions that only exist on
GY-HM660 are ignored.
142
Camera Features
Saving Setup Files
1
Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu] B [System] B [Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(A P115
[ Setup File ] )
2
Select [Store File] and press the Set button
(R).
3
Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
and press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4
Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
.
4
Memo :
0
Files cannot be written in the following cases.
(Displayed in gray, selection disabled)
0
When the inserted SD card is not supported or
not formatted. (File name appears as “---”.)
0
When a write-protected SD card is inserted
(a z mark appears beside the SD card icon).
5
Name the file.
0
Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
(A P
96 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
0
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Store File]/[Picture File] subname.
Memo :
0
When overwriting an existing file, the subname
of the existing file is displayed.
0
Select
[Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the
previous screen.
6
Select [Store]
and press the Set button (R).
.
6
5
7
Save the file.
0
A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
Select [Overwrite]
on the confirmation
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen.
.
7
0
Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen when the file is newly saved.
.
8
Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
143
Camera Features
Loading a Setup File
1
Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu] B [
System] B [Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(A P115 [ Setup File ] )
2
Select [Load File] and press the Set button
(R).
3
Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
and press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4
Select the file to load using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
4
Memo :
0
When
the write-protect switch of the inserted SD
card is set, a z mark appears beside the SD
card icon. Setup files can be loaded from an SD
card even if the write-protect switch is set.
0
Setup files that are completely incompatible will
not be displayed.
(A P142 [Configuring Setup Files] )
5
Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears
on the
screen.
.
5
6
Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete
”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Deleting Setup Files
1
Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu] B [
System] B [Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(A P115 [ Setup File ] )
2
Select [Delete File] and press the Set button
(R).
3
Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],
and press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4
Select the file to delete using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
4
Memo :
0
User File saved on the SD card cannot be
deleted.
5
Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...”
appears on the
screen.
.
5
6
Deletion is complete.
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
144
Camera Features
Loading Clips to the PC
0
You can load clips to a PC by connecting the
camera recorder to the PC via the USB port.
Doing so enables clips stored in the SD card to
be managed and edited on the PC.
0
Files
on the SD card can be managed/edited on
the connected PC in this mode only for USB
mass storage class devices that are recognized
by the said PC as a peripheral drive.
Memo :
0
Files cannot be written to the SD card.
0
Make sure to manage/edit files recorded in the
MP4 file format using the (JVC ProHD Clip
Manager) PC application software in the
supplied disc.
0
For details on how to install the application
software, refer to the
[User's Guide] of the [JVC
ProHD Clip Manager] inside the supplied disc.
1
Connect the camera recorder to the PC
using a USB cable.
A confirmation message “Change to USB
Mode?”
to enable the USB connection appears.
.
AUX
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVICE
AV
A
BATT.RE L EASE
POWER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
REC
HOST
AV
DEVICE
PC
2
Select [Change] using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The camera recorder switches to USB mode.
.
2
Memo :
0
If recording is in progress, the
“Change to USB
Mode?” message appears after recording
stops.
0
If playback is in progress, the camera recorder
switches to USB mode after the file closes
automatically, such as when playback stops.
Disconnecting
0
Disable
the connection on the PC, then remove
the USB cable from the camera recorder.
0
Doing so exits the USB mode and switches the
camera recorder to Camera mode.
Memo :
0
The
procedure for disabling the USB connection
varies according to the PC in use. For details,
refer to the “INSTRUCTIONS” of the PC.
145
Connecting External Devices
When your PC cannot recognize the SD
card
Confirm and update the OS of your PC.
OS Description
Windows Vista Necessary to update to SP1
or higher.
Windows Vista SP1/
Windows Vista SP2
Necessary to download the
update software.
(KB975823)
0
32 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=2d1abe01-
0942-4f8aabb2-
2ad529de00a1
0
64 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=7d54c53f-017c
-4ea5-
ae08-34c3452ba315
Windows 7 Necessary to download the
update software.
(KB976422)
0
32 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=3ee91fc2-
a9bc-4ee1-
aca3-2a9aff5915ea
0
64 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=73f766dd-
7127-4445-
b860-47084587155f
Connecting External
Monitor
0
To output live or playback video images and
audio sound to an external monitor, select the
output signals from the camera recorder, and
connect
using an appropriate cable according to
the monitor to be used.
0
Choose the most suitable terminal according to
the monitor in use.
0
[HD/SD SDI] terminal:
Outputs either the HD-SDI signal or SD-SDI
signal.
0
[
AV] terminal:
Outputs composite video and audio signals.
0
[HDMI] terminal:
Outputs HDMI signals.
Configure the settings in the [A/V Set] menu to
match the monitor to be connected.
(A
P112 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )
Memo :
0
When [
Network] is set to “On(HDMI Off)” or
“On(SDI Off)”, either HDMI signal or SDI signal
is output. a
(A P116
[ Network a ] )
0
If
the [HD/SD SDI] terminal or [HDMI] terminal is
connected, configure the settings in the [A/V
Set] menu according to the monitor to be
connected.
(A P112
[ HDMI/SDI Out ] )
146
Connecting External Devices
.
AUX
INPUT
2
INPUT
1
DEVICE
AV
A
BATT.RELEASE
POW
ER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
SD/HD
SDI
REC
HOST
AV
DEVICE
DC
REMOTE
HOST
Audio (Lch)
Audio (Rch)
Video
GND
SDI IN
HDMI
AV input
* Select
the output signal in [A/V Set] B [HDMI/SDI
Out].
(A P112 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )
*
When [Record Format]
B
[System] is set to “SD”,
only SD-SDI signals are output.
(A P117 [ System ] )
* To display the menu screen or display screen on
an external monitor, set [A/V Set] B [Video Set]
B [Display On TV] to “On”.
(A P112 [ Display On TV ] )
Connecting via SDI
0
Digital video signals, together with embedded
(superimposed) audio signals and time code
signals,
are output for both the HD-SDI and SD-
SDI signals.
0
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD SDI] output
terminal is used as a flag to determine valid
video signals. Therefore, accurate values will
not be output.
Memo :
0
The sampling frequency for embedded
(superimposed) audio signals is 48 kHz. Time
code of the built-in time generator as well as
playback time code are also output.
Setting the Aspect
0
For setting the mode to convert images with a
16:9
aspect ratio to display on a 4:3 aspect ratio
screen.
0
Set using [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SD
Aspect].
0
The
available modes include “Side Cut”, “Letter”
(blackened at the top and bottom), and
“Squeeze” (full size, compressed at the left and
right).
(A P119
[ SD Aspect ] )
Memo :
0
When [Record Format]
B
[System] is set to “SD”,
and [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item cannot be
selected.
(A P117 [ System ] )
(A P119 [ SD Aspect ] )
147
Connecting External Devices
Connecting the
Headphone
0
Audio output from the [x] terminal can be
selected using [A/V Set] B [
Monitor] or the
[MONITOR] selection switch on the camera
recorder.
(A P115
[ Monitor ] )
0
The different combinations of settings that are
output from the [x] terminal and monitor
speaker are as follows.
[MONITOR]
Switch
Settings
[Monitor]
Settings
[x]
Terminal
Speaker *
L R
[CH1] - CH1 CH1
[BOTH] [Mix] CH1+CH2 CH1+CH2
[Stereo] CH1 CH2
[CH2] - CH2 CH2
* Audio is output from the speaker only in Media
mode. Does not output in the Camera mode.
.
AUX
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVICE
AV
A
BATT.RELEASE
POWER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
REC
HOST
AUX
POWER
/CHG
Connecting Wired Remote
Control
You can operate the functions of this unit with a
wired remote control.
Memo :
0
When the switches of the camera recorder and
remote control unit are operated at the same
time, the switch operation of the remote control
unit takes priority over that of the camera
recorder.
1
Connect a wired remote control to the
camera recorder.
Connect the wired remote control (sold
separately) to the
[REMOTE] terminal of this
camera recorder.
.
AUX
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVICE
AV
A
BATT.RE L EA S E
POWER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
REC
HOST
REMOTE
Connect the wired
remote control
Caution :
0
Turn
off the power of the camera recorder when
connecting a wired remote control.
2
Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
148
Connecting External Devices
Functions of Network
Connection a
0
The network function can be operated by
connecting one of the following adapters to the
rear [HOST] terminal.
0
Wireless LAN adapter
0
Ethernet adapter
0
Cellular adapter
(A
P150 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
0
The network feature comprises web-browser-
based functions using devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, as well as
FTP and live streaming functions that run via
thumbnail screens and menu operation.
List of Functions
Importing Metadata
You can download a metadata settings file (XML
format)
from the FTP server and store metadata in
the camera recorder.
(A P153 [Importing Metadata a] )
Uploading Recorded Clips
You can upload clips recorded in the SD card to a
preset FTP server.
(A P
155 [Uploading a Recorded Video Clip
a] )
Memo :
0
Uploading can also be performed via a web
browser.
(A P
162 [Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web
Browser a] )
Editing Metadata
0
Planning Metadata
You
can access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s metadata via a web browser on
devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,
or PC, and edit the metadata that is to be applied
to clips to be recorded.
(A P159 [ Planning Metadata ] )
0
Clip Metadata
You can access the page for editing the
metadata
via a web browser on devices such as
a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
display or rewrite the metadata that is recorded
to a clip.
(A P160 [ Clip Metadata ] )
View Remote
You can access via a web browser on devices such
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check
the live image or remotely control the camera.
(A P166 [View Remote Feature a] )
Camera Control
You can access via a web browser on devices such
as
a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to remotely
control the camera.
(A P168 [Camera Control Function a] )
Live streaming
By combining with the set top box decoder or PC
application that supports live streaming, you can
perform
audio and video streaming via the network.
(A P175 [Performing Live Streaming a] )
Preparing Network
Connection a
Operating Environment
Operation has been verified for the following
environments.
Computer
0
OS: Windows 7
Web browser: Internet Explorer 11
0
OS: Mac OSX 10.11
Web browser: Safari 9
Smartphone/Tablet Terminal
0
OS: iOS9 (iPhone 6)
Web browser: Safari 9
0
OS: iOS8 (iPad 3rd generation)
Web browser: Safari 8
0
OS: Android 4.4 (Nexus 7 2013)
Web browser: Chrome 44.0
0
OS: Windows 8.1 (Surface)
Web browser: Internet Explorer 11
149
Connecting to the Network
a
Camera Setup for Network Connection
1
Connect an appropriate adapter according
to the intended use to the
[HOST] terminal
at the rear of the camera recorder.
The following adapters can be connected.
0
Wireless LAN adapter
0
Ethernet adapter
0
Cellular adapter
.
AUX
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVICE
AV
A
BATT.RE L EA S E
POWER
/CHG
B
HDMI
REMOTE
DC
HD/SD
SDI
REC
HOST
HOST
HOST
Connect an appropriate adapter
Memo :
0
Only a network connection adapter can be
connected to the
[HOST] terminal.
0
Connect
or disconnect an adapter only after you
have turned off the power of the camera
recorder.
0
You can find the latest information on the
compatible adapters at the product page of our
website.
0
Two
types of network coverage (WAN and LAN)
are available for each application.
2
Enable the network connection.
Set [Main Menu] B [System
] B [Network] to
“On(HDMI Off)” or “On(SDI Off)”.
3
Configure the connection settings.
0
Select [Main
Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Connection Setup] B [Wizard]
and press the Set button (R).
0
A wizard screen appears according to the
type of adapter connected. Follow the
instructions
on the screen to perform setting.
(A P150 [Connecting via Wireless LAN] )
(A P152 [Connecting via Wired LAN] )
(A P152 [Connecting via Cellular Adapter] )
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Connection via Access Point
1
Perform setting on the camera recorder,
and start up the
[Wizard] screen.
(A P
150 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
2
[Wireless LAN] appears on the [Wizard]
screen.
.
3
Press the I button to display the
[Select
Connection Type] screen.
Select “Connect with Access Point”.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting. Perform setting for the following.
0
Mode of connection
0
Method of setting
*
SSID, type of encryption, Passphrase, and
IP Address setting (“DHCP” or “Manual”) in
cases other than WPS
.
3
4
Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a web browser.
(A P158 [Connecting from a Web Browser
a] )
150
Connecting to the Network
a
P2P Connection
You can access the web function of this camera
recorder from devices such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC.
1
[Wireless LAN] appears on the [Wizard]
screen.
.
2
Press the I button to display the
[Select
Connection Type] screen.
Select “P2P”.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting.
Perform setting for the following.
0
Mode of connection
0
Method of setting
* SSID and Passphrase in cases other than
WPS
.
2
Memo :
0
When “WPS
” is selected in the [Select Setup
Type] screen, the following steps 3 and 4 are not
required.
3
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, and display the
[Network] (status)
screen.
0
Press the [STATUS
] button on the camera
recorder to display the status screen.
Press the cross-shaped button (HI) to
display the [Network] screen.
0
Check to ensure that the [SSID] and
[Passphrase
] that you have set in the wizard
are displayed.
.
4
Select [SSID] from the list of access points
(smartphone,
tablet terminal, PC, etc.), and
enter [Passphrase].
0
Display the list of access points in the
wireless connection settings of the
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
select “HM660-*****
”. (***** are numbers that
vary with the device used.)
0
After the password confirmation screen
appears, enter the [Passphrase
] displayed
on the [Network] screen.
.
5
Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a web browser.
(A P
158 [Connecting from a Web Browser
a] )
151
Connecting to the Network
a
Connecting via Wired LAN
You can connect a device such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC directly to the camera
recorder
using a cross cable to access the camera
recorder’s web functions. Alternatively, you can
also connect using an Ethernet hub.
1
Connect the [HOST]
terminal on the camera
recorder to the smartphone, tablet
terminal, PC, etc. using a cross cable.
2
Perform setting on the camera recorder,
and start up the [Wizard] screen.
(A P
150 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
3
[Ethernet] appears on the [Wizard] screen.
.
4
Press the I button to display the
[IP
Address Configuration] screen.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting. Perform setting for the following.
0
IP address setting (DHCP or manual)
0
IP Address
0
Subnet Mask
0
Gateway
0
DNS Server
.
5
Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a web browser.
(A P
158 [Connecting from a Web Browser
a] )
Connecting via Cellular Adapter
You can make use of the FTP function and live
streaming
function by connecting a cellular adapter
to this camera recorder.
1
Connect the cellular adapter to the [HOST]
terminal of the camera recorder.
2
Perform setting on the camera recorder,
and start up the
[Wizard] screen.
(A P150
[Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
3
[Cellular] appears on the [Wizard] screen.
.
4
Press the I button.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting. Perform setting for the following.
0
Connection phone number
0
User name
0
Password
Caution :
0
You can access the web functions via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC only in a LAN environment.
0
Note that you may have to pay very high bills in
the case of pay-per-use contracts. Fixed price
contract is recommended if you are using the
network function.
0
Note that the use of improper settings may result
in expensive bills from the phone service
provider. Make sure that the setting is correct.
0
To avoid expensive bills due to the roaming
connection, you are recommended to use this
function by disabling the roaming contract.
0
There may be communication even when you
are not using the network function. Remove the
cellular adapter when the function is not in use.
152
Connecting to the Network
a
Importing Metadata a
You can download a metadata settings file (XML
format)
from the FTP server and store metadata in
the camera recorder.
The imported metadata is applied to clips to be
recorded.
Preparing Metadata
0
You can record the four metadata types below.
Title1 : ASCII
only, max. 63 characters
(bytes)
Title2 : UNICODE, max. 127 bytes
Creator : UNICODE, max. 127 bytes
Description : UNICODE, max. 2047 bytes
0
Metadata makes use of the XML description
format.
0
Edit the
<Title1><Title2><Description><Creator> tag
element using the XML editor. (Indicated by the
frames below)
.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<NRT-MetaInterface lastUpdate="2015-01-29T18:06:21+09:00"
xmlns="urn:schemas-proHD:nonRealTimeMetaInterface:ver.1.00"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
<MetaData>
<Title1>Title1 sample</Title1>
<!-- only "en",max63bytes -->
<Title2>Title2 sample</Title2>
<!-- ,max127bytes -->
<Description>Description sample</Description>
<!-- ,max2047bytes -->
<Creator>Creator sample</Creator>
<!-- ,max127bytes -->
</MetaData>
</NRT-MetaInterface>
Configuring the Server for Downloading
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
FTP
server for downloading the metadata (domain
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the
path of the file to download.
1
Open the [Metadata Server] screen.
Open the [Main
Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Metadata Server] screen.
.
2
Register the [Metadata Server].
0
Select a server using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The
server settings screen appears. Perform
setting for each item.
0
Up to 4 settings can be registered.
(A P125 [ Metadata Server ] )
.
Memo :
0
For
details on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
153
Connecting to the Network
a
Importing Metadata
Download the metadata settings file (XML format)
from the FTP server.
1
Select [Main
Menu] B [System] B [Network]
B [Import Metadata] and press the Set
button (R).
The [Import Metadata] screen appears.
.
2
Select the server for importing the
metadata.
0
The name that is registered in
[Metadata
Server] B [Alias] is displayed.
0
Select a server using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
.
2
3
Select [Import] on
the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Import starts.
After
import is complete, the display is restored
to the screen before the [Import Metadata]
screen appears.
.
3
Memo :
0
You cannot exit the menu or perform recording
while import is in progress.
0
If
import of the metadata failed, “Import Error!” is
displayed, and a message indicating the cause
of the error appears.
Press the Set button (R) to return to the [Import
Metadata] screen in step 1.
(A P
179 [List of FTP Transfer Errors a] )
0
When “HTTP
” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
0
If a setting other than “FTP
” is specified for
[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
154
Connecting to the Network
a
Uploading a Recorded
Video Clip a
Upload clips recorded in the SD card to a preset
FTP server.
Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
FTP server to upload recorded clips to (domain
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the
directory of the upload destination.
1
Open the [Clip Server] screen.
Open the [Main
Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Clip Server] screen.
.
2
Register the [Clip Server].
Register the server to upload recorded clips in
the SD card to.
Up to 4 servers can be registered.
(A P
126 [ Clip Server ] )
Memo :
0
For
details on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
Uploading Video Clip
Upload clips recorded in the SD card to a preset
FTP server.
All playable clips on the thumbnail screen can be
uploaded.
Uploading a Video Clip
1
Set the camera recorder to the Media mode.
0
Press
and hold the [MODE] selection button
in Camera mode to enter Media mode. A
thumbnail screen of the clips recorded on the
SD card is displayed.
0
You can upload the selected clips on the
thumbnail screen to the FTP server.
(A P
85 [Thumbnail Screen] )
2
Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded.
Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded using
the cross-shaped button (JKH I).
.
2
3
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
.
3
4
Select [FTP Upload] B [
This Clip] B server
to upload to, and press the Set button (R).
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
.
Memo :
0
The name for the server to upload files to are
indicated using the preset names in [Clip
Server] B [Alias].
0
To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).
Select
[Yes] on the confirmation screen, and
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and
return to the thumbnail screen.
155
Connecting to the Network
a
5
Upload is complete.
0
After upload is complete, “Successfully
Completed.” appears on the screen.
0
Press the Set button (R) to return to the
thumbnail screen.
.
5
Selecting and Uploading Multiple Clips
To select and upload multiple clips, refer to
“[Selecting
and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips] (A P 91)”.
Uploading All Video Clips
1
Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
2
Upload the clips.
Select [FTP Upload...] B [All Clips
] B server to
upload to, and press the Set button (R).
.
2
3
Upload starts.
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
.
Memo :
0
To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).
Select
[Yes] on the confirmation screen, and
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and
return to the thumbnail screen.
0
If
the file to be uploaded has the same name as
an existing file in the FTP server, an overwrite
confirmation window appears.
0
When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
the overwrite confirmation window will not be
displayed and the existing file is overwritten.
0
Even after upload has started (FTP transfer in
progress)
in step 3, pressing the [MODE] button
switches the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, allowing you to start shooting.
0
If [
Protocol] is set to “SFTP”, “FTPS” or
“FTPES”, to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
0
Fingerprint is a unique value that varies with
each public key and certificate.
0
For details of the fingerprint, please consult
the administrator of the server to be
connected.
(A P126
[ Clip Server ] )
0
When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
156
Connecting to the Network
a
4
Upload is complete.
0
After all clips are uploaded successfully,
“Successfully Completed.” is displayed.
Press the Set button (R) to return to the
thumbnail screen.
0
When clips are not uploaded successfully,
the following errors are displayed.
.
Cause of Error
(A P
179 [List of FTP Transfer Errors a] )
Memo :
0
If
there is an error message or other notifications
when you switched to the Camera mode while
FTP upload is in progress, a 5 icon (yellow) will
appear in the remaining media space display
area in the Camera mode.
You can press the [MODE] button to switch to
the Media mode and display the above error
screen.
Follow “[List of FTP Transfer Errorsa]
(A P 179)” to clear the error display.
FTP Resume Feature a
When FTP transfer starts and there is a file of the
same name on the server with a file size smaller
than
the file to be transferred, the file on the server
will be regarded as an interrupted file during a FTP
transfer. A confirmation screen to resume transfer
(append writing) appears.
.
If “Resume” is
selected, FTP transfer is carried out
such that it appends from the position where it was
interrupted.
When FTP transfer ends normally, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
Memo :
0
FTP server equipped with resume function is
required.
0
If [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Clip Server] B [Clip-FTP1] B [Clip-
FTP4] B [Protocol] is set to “SFTP”, the resume
function is disabled.
0
If
“HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP Proxy]
screen of the network connection setting, the
resume function is disabled.
157
Connecting to the Network
a
Connecting from a Web
Browser a
You can access the web functions of this camera
recorder via a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
Make
the necessary preparations for connection in
advance.
(A P150 [Connect an appropriate adapter
according to the intended use to the [HOST]
terminal at the rear of the camera recorder.] )
1
Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, and display the
[Network] (status)
screen.
0
Press the [STATUS
] button on the camera
recorder to display the status screen.
Press the cross-shaped button (HI) to
display the [Network] screen.
0
Check the displayed
[IP Address].
.
2
Start up the web browser on the terminal
you wish to connect to the camera
recorder, and enter the
[IP Address] in the
address field.
(Example: 192.168.0.1)
If “192.168.0.1” is displayed in [IP Address],
enter “http://192.168.0.1
”.
.
http://192.168.0.1
3
Enter the user name and password.
Enter the user name (prohd) and the password
(initial password: 0000) on the login screen to
display the main page of the camera.
.
Memo :
0
The password can be altered in
[Main Menu] B
[System] B [Network]/[Settings] B [Web] B
[Change Password].
(A P
122 [ Change Password ] )
158
Connecting to the Network
a
Editing Metadata a
You can create the metadata to be inserted into a
recorded
file, or rewrite the metadata of a recorded
clip.
Planning Metadata
You can access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s
metadata via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
edit the metadata that is to be applied to clips to be
recorded.
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P158
[Connecting from a Web Browser
a] )
2
Tap (click) the [Planning Metadata] tab to
open the [Planning Metadata]
screen.
.
2
3
Editing Metadata
A
Enter information for the necessary fields.
B
After input is complete, tap (click) [Save
] to
overwrite the metadata.
.
A
B
Keyboard
4
Tap (click) [
OK] on the confirmation screen.
0
Update of the [Planning Metadata
] starts.
0
After update is complete,
“Renewal of
planning metadata is succeeded.” is
displayed. Tap (click) [OK].
0
Returns to the screen in step 3.
.
Memo :
0
If
update failed, “Renewal of planning metadata
is failed.” is displayed.
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step
3.
159
Connecting to the Network
a
Clip Metadata
You can access the page for editing the metadata
via a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and display or
rewrite the metadata that is recorded to a clip.
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P158
[Connecting from a Web Browser
a] )
2
Display the clip list.
Tap (click) the [Clip List] tab to display the clip
list.
.
2
3
Set the camera recorder to the “Remote
Edit Mode
”.
You can switch to “Remote Edit Mode” from a
web browser or through operation of the
camera.
o Switching from a web browser
A
You will see a message indicating
“It is
necessary to change the camera mode to
"Remote Edit Mode". Change the mode.” on
the web browser.
.
A
B
ChangeCancel
It is necessary to change the camera
mode to "Remote Edit Mode".
Change the mode.
B
Tap
(click) [Change] to switch the camera to
the Remote Edit mode.
.
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
o Switching from the camera
A
“Change to Remote Edit Mode?
” is
displayed on the display screen of the
camera unit.
B
Select [Change] and press the Set button
(R) to switch to the Remote Edit mode.
.
B
A
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
Cancel
Change
Remote Edit Mode?
Change to
160
Connecting to the Network
a
Memo :
0
When the menu or status is displayed, display
of the confirmation screen will be put on hold.
0
If
the menu is displayed on the camera recorder,
close the menu.
0
If the status is displayed on the camera recorder,
close the status display.
0
Pressing the Set button (R) on the camera
recorder while in the Remote Edit Mode ends
the Remote Edit Mode forcibly and switches to
the Camera mode.
0
When FTP upload via the camera unit is
currently in progress, switching to the Remote
Edit mode is disabled.
4
Select the Metadata Edit mode.
Select the [Metadata] tab.
5
Select the clip to rewrite the metadata.
0
A list of the recorded clips appears on the
[Clip List
] screen.
0
Tap (click) the clip for which you want to
rewrite the metadata.
.
4
5
Memo :
0
You
can switch the displayed slot using the [Slot
A] and [Slot B] tabs.
0
You
can use the [J-30] or [K+30] tab to jump to
the previous or next 30 clips on the list.
6
Editing the Metadata of Selected Clips
A
Edit the information for the necessary fields.
0
If
you are using a PC, input using the mouse
and keyboard.
0
If you are using a smartphone or tablet
terminal, tap the text input area to display a
standard software keyboard on the screen.
Enter the information using the displayed
keyboard.
B
You
can tap (click) [OK Mark] to add an OK mark
to or delete it from selected clips.
C
After editing is complete, tap (click) [Save] to
overwrite the metadata.
.
BA C
Keyboard
161
Connecting to the Network
a
7
Tap (click) [
OK] on the confirmation screen.
0
Update of the metadata starts.
0
After update is complete,
“Renewal of clip
metadata is succeeded.” is displayed. Tap
(click) [OK].
0
Returns to the screen in step 4.
.
7
OK
Renewal of clip metadata is
succeeded.
Memo :
0
If update failed,
“Renewal of clip metadata is
failed.” is displayed.
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step
4.
Uploading a Recording
Clip via a Web Browser
a
0
Upload
clips recorded in the SD card to a preset
FTP server.
0
You can upload selected clips, all clips, or those
appended with an OK mark.
Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading
(A P
155 [Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading] )
Uploading Video Clips
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P158 [Connecting from a Web Browser
a] )
2
Display the clip list.
Tap (click) the [Clip List] tab to display the clip
list.
.
2
3
Set the camera recorder to the “Remote
Edit Mode
”.
You can switch to “Remote Edit Mode” from a
web browser or through operation of the
camera.
162
Connecting to the Network
a
o Switching from a web browser
A
You will see a message indicating
“It is
necessary to change the camera mode to
"Remote Edit Mode". Change the mode.” on
the web browser.
.
A
B
ChangeCancel
It is necessary to change the camera
mode to "Remote Edit Mode".
Change the mode.
B
Tap
(click) [Change] to switch the camera to
the Remote Edit mode.
.
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
o Switching from the camera
A
“Change to Remote Edit Mode?
” is
displayed on the display screen of the
camera unit.
B
Select [Change] and press the Set button
(R) to switch to the Remote Edit mode.
.
B
A
Exit
Remote Edit Mode
Cancel
Change
Remote Edit Mode?
Change to
Memo :
0
When the menu or status is displayed,
display of the confirmation screen will be
put on hold.
0
If the menu is displayed on the camera
recorder, close the menu.
0
If the status is displayed on the camera
recorder, close the status display.
0
Pressing
the Set button (R) on the camera
recorder while in the Remote Edit Mode
ends the Remote Edit Mode forcibly and
switches to the Camera mode.
0
When FTP upload via the camera unit is
currently in progress, switching to the
Remote Edit mode is disabled.
4
Select the Upload mode.
Select the [Upload] tab.
5
Select the clip you want to upload.
0
A list of the recorded clips appears on the
[Clip List] screen.
0
Tap (click) the clip you want to upload to
select it.
0
Clips being selected are indicated by a
check mark.
Memo :
0
You
can switch the displayed slot using the [Slot
A] and [Slot B] tabs.
0
You
can use the [J-30] or [K+30] tab to jump to
the previous or next 30 clips on the list.
6
Select the upload operation.
Tap (click) the [Actions] button.
.
4
6
5
163
Connecting to the Network
a
7
Select a method to upload the clips.
.
A
B
C
D
A
Upload all clips
Uploads all the clips in the displayed slots.
Tap (click) to move to the
[Clip Server]
screen.
B
Upload OK clips
Uploads all clips in the displayed slots that
are appended with an OK mark.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]
screen.
C
Upload selected clips
Uploads the clips you have selected.
Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]
screen.
D
Clear all selection
Clears all clip selection and returns to the
[Clip List] screen.
8
Select the clip server and start uploading.
0
Upon
selecting the server to upoload clips to,
an upload screen appears.
.
8
0
The status of the transfer process is
indicated by a progress bar.
.
164
Connecting to the Network
a
Memo :
0
To stop transfer, tap (click) the [Stop] button.
Tapping (clicking)
[Yes] on the confirmation
screen stops the transfer halfway and brings you
back to the main page.
0
If there already exists a file on the FTP server
with
a name identical to the file to be transferred,
a confirmation screen asking to overwrite the file
will appear.
However, if “HTTP” is selected in the [Select
FTP Proxy] screen of the network connection
settings, an overwrite confirmation screen does
not appear, and the existing file will be
overwritten directly.
0
After
uploading in step 8 has started, other web
browser operations are disabled until uploading
is complete.
0
After uploading in step 8 has started and upon
shifting to the Media mode by pressing the
[MODE] selection button, operation from the
web browser will be disabled.
To enable web browser operation, press the
[MODE] selection button again to switch to the
Camera mode.
0
If
[Protocol] is set to “SFTP”, “FTPS” or
“FTPES”, to ensure the safety of the
communication path, a screen appears
prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the
public key and certificate received from the
server.
Check to ensure that the displayed value
coincides with the known value.
0
Fingerprint is a unique value that varies with
each public key and certificate.
0
For details of the fingerprint, please consult
the administrator of the server to be
connected.
(A P126
[ Clip Server ] )
0
When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
connections to the servers other than “FTP”
protocol cannot be made.
9
Upload is complete.
0
After upload is complete, “Successfully
Completed.” appears on the screen.
.
9
Exit
Successfully Completed.
FTP Upload
0
When clips are not uploaded successfully,
the following errors are displayed.
.
Cause of
Error
Exit
Internal Error.
Failed.
FTP Upload
(A P
179 [List of FTP Transfer Errors a] )
Memo :
0
Follow “[List of FTP Transfer Errorsa]
(A P 179)” to clear the error message.
165
Connecting to the Network
a
View Remote Feature a
You
can access via a web browser on devices such
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check
the live image and perform the following remote
control operations.
0
Start/stop recording
0
Zooming
0
Register/delete preset zoom
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P158
[Connecting from a Web Browser
a] )
2
Tap (click) the [View Remote] tab to open
the [
View Remote] screen.
.
2
Operating Procedure
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:
12
12:
54
54.
19
19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM660
HM660
Z 00
Z 00
A
B
G
H
I
D
E
C
F
J
A
Page Switch Tab
Tap (click) this tab to move to the
[Planning
Metadata], [Clip Metadata], or [Settings]
screen.
B
Live View Screen
Displays the live images.
Tap a live image to display or hide information
that is displayed on the live image, such as
remaining space on the media and time code.
C
[Clear] Button
Switches to the Delete Preset Zoom Position
mode.
(A P167 [Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom] )
(A P168 [Deleting a Preset Zoom] )
D
[Preset] Button
Switches to the Register Preset Zoom Position
mode.
(A P167 [Registering Preset Zoom] )
E
[A]/[B]/[C] Buttons
Use these buttons to perform preset registration
or delete a preset data.
F
Zoom Control
0
Operate the zoom function by dragging the
zoom button along the sliding bar.
0
Tap
(click) the [Wide] or [Tele] button to fine-
tune the zoom position.
G
Function Lock Button
Locks the functions that have been set on the
[Settings] screen.
(A P
171 [Changing View Remote Function
Settings] )
Icon Description
.
Locked
.
Not locked
H
Stop Record Button
I
Start Record Button
J
Camera Control Function
(A P
168 [Camera Control Function a] )
166
Connecting to the Network
a
Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom
Registering Preset Zoom
You can register any 3 zoom positions.
1
Set to the Register Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Preset] button to switch to the
Register Preset Zoom mode.
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:
12
12:
54
54.
19
19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM660
HM660
Z 00
Z 00
2
Determine the zoom position.
Use the zoom control to operate the zoom and
determine a position.
3
Tap (click) [A].
Position [A] is registered, and position A is
displayed
on the sliding bar of the zoom control.
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:
12
12:
54
54.
19
19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM660
HM660
Z 00
Z 00
4
In the same way, register [B] and [C].
After all three positions A, B and C are
registered, the positions of the [A], [B]
, and [C]
buttons will be rearranged according to the
order of the registered zoom position from the
left.
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:
12
12:
54
54.
19
19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM660
HM660
Z 00
Z 00
5
Exit the Register Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Preset] button to exit the
Register Preset Zoom mode.
Memo :
0
After registration is complete (
[A], [B], and [C]
buttons are all active), tapping (clicking) each
button switches to the corresponding preset
zoom position.
0
This function operates independently of the
preset zoom position on the camera recorder.
(A P
49 [Saving/Recalling Current Zoom
Position (Preset Zoom)] )
167
Connecting to the Network
a
Deleting a Preset Zoom
1
Set to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
When any of positions [A], [B], and [C] are
registered, tapping (clicking) the [Clear
] button
switches to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:
12
12:
54
54.
19
19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM660
HM660
Z 00
Z 00
2
Tap (click) the [A], [B], or [C] button that
corresponds to the position you want to
delete.
0
The position is deleted, and the button is
grayed out.
0
The corresponding zoom position mark on
the sliding bar also disappears.
.
26min
26min
50min
50min
01:
12
12:
54
54.
19
19
STBY
STBY
282min
282min
HM660
HM660
Z 00
Z 00
Position mark
disappears
Grayed out
3
Exit the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Clear] button to exit the Delete
Preset Zoom mode.
Memo :
0
The
Clip Review function of the camera recorder
is unavailable during View Remote operation.
(A P74 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
Camera Control Function
a
You
can control the camera by accessing via a web
browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC.
You can perform the following operations for each
of the items.
.
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
REC
For performing recording start or recording
pause operation.
.
B
CAMERA
Enables operations related to the camera
functions.
168
Connecting to the Network
a
.
.
C
ZOOM
Enables zooming operations.
.
D
FOCUS
Enables focusing operations.
.
E
USER SWITCH
You
can enable or disable the user buttons that
are assigned with a function.
.
F
MENU
You can show or hide the display and menu
characters on an external monitor as well as
operation of menus, switching the display
screen and status display.
.
169
Connecting to the Network
a
Changing the Settings via
a Web Browser a
You can change the network-related settings by
accessing
via a web browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
1
Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page via a web browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(A P
158 [Connecting from a Web Browser
a] )
2
Tap (click) the [Settings] tab.
.
2
3
The [Settings] screen appears.
Set each of the items as follows.
.
A
B
C
D
E
A
View Remote
Settings for operations on the View Remote.
B
Connection Setup
Settings related to the network.
You can change the settings for each of the
preset items on the [Wizard
] screen of the
camera recorder.
C
Metadata Server
Settings on the server for importing the
metadata.
Setting can be performed in the same way as
the Metadata Server menu on the camera
recorder.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
D
Clip Server
Settings for the server to upload recorded clips
to.
Setting can be performed in the same way as
the [Clip Server] menu on the camera recorder.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
E
Live Streaming
Setting for streaming audio and video via the
network.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
Memo :
0
Priority is given to menu operation on the
camera recorder.
0
When the menu on the camera recorder is
opened while the
[Settings] screen is opened
using a web browser, a warning appears, after
which the display returns to the main screen.
0
While the menu is displayed on the camera
recorder, the
[Settings] screen cannot be
opened via the web browser.
170
Connecting to the Network
a
Changing View Remote Function
Settings
For performing setting for using the View Remote
function.
.
A
B
C
A
[Camera Name
]
0
For setting the name that appears at the top
left of the view screen.
0
Tapping the text input area displays a
software keyboard.
If you are using a PC, enter using the PC
keyboard.
0
By
tapping the Go key after input is complete,
the software keyboard disappears.
B
[Restrictions
]
For setting the buttons to be disabled on the
View screen while in the locked mode.
0
[
REC]:
For setting whether to disable the Stop
Record button, zoom operation, and camera
control during recording.
Tap (click) each item to switch between
[Unlock] and [Lock].
0
[Except REC
]:
For setting whether to disable the record
button, zoom operation, and camera control
in any mode other than the recording mode.
Tap (click) each item to switch between
[Unlock] and [Lock].
C
[
Save]/[Cancel]
Tap (click) [Save] to save the settings.
Tap (click) [Cancel] to stop setting and return to
the main [Settings] screen.
Changing Connection Setup
You can change the settings for each of the preset
items on the
[Wizard] screen of the camera
recorder.
0
If all the items cannot be displayed in a single
page, scroll down to display the remaining
items.
0
Items that cannot be changed are grayed out
according
to the type of adapter connected and
the mode of connection.
.
A
D
C
B
A
Type of Adapter Connected
B
Mode of Wireless LAN Connection
C
[Search Access Point] Button
Tap (click) to display a list of the detected
access points.
The
currently selected access point is indicated
by a dot mark ( 0 ).
.
HM660
HM660
171
Connecting to the Network
a
D
Settings on the [Select Setup Type
] Screen
.
E
E
Settings on the [IP Address Configuration]
Screen
When “DHCP
” is selected, all items will be
grayed out.
.
F
G
H
F
Settings when using cellular adapter
G
Settings on the [Select FTP Proxy
] Screen
H
[OK]/[Cancel] Button
After changing of settings is complete, tap
(click) the [OK] button.
On the confirmation screen, tap (click)
[Execute] to change the settings on the camera
recorder and restart the network.
Changing Metadata Server Settings
You can make direct changes to the FTP server for
importing the metadata set in
[Main Menu] B
[System] B [Network]/[Settings] B [Metadata
Server], as well as the path of the file to import.
(A P125 [ Metadata Server ] )
Changing Clip Server Settings
You can make direct changes to the server and
directory settings that are specified in [Main
Menu] B [System] B [Network]
/[Settings] B [Clip
Server] for uploading recorded clips in the SD card
to the FTP server.
(A P126 [ Clip Server ] )
Changing Streaming Settings
You can make direct changes to settings that are
specified in
[Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set], such as
information on the destination of distribution.
(A P122 [ Live Streaming Set ] )
Managing the Network
Connection Settings File
a
This camera recorder allows you to save the
network
connection settings on the Wizard screen
to the camera recorder unit.
Loading a saved connecting settings file enables
you to reproduce the appropriate network
connection state speedily.
Memo :
0
To save or load the connection settings, go to
[Main Menu
] B [System] B [Network]/[Settings]
B [Connection Setup].
0
The following operations can be performed on
the [Connection Setup] menu.
0
[Saving the Connection Settings File]
(A P
173)
0
[Reading the Connection Settings File]
(A P 174)
0
[Deleting Connection Settings] (A P 174)
Number of Storable Setup Files
Camera recorder : [CAM1] to [CAM4]
172
Connecting to the Network
a
Saving the Connection Settings File
1
Select [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Network]/[
Settings] B [Connection Setup]
and press the Set button (R).
2
Select [
Store] and press the Set button (R).
.
2
3
Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross-shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
.
3
4
Name the file.
Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
(A P
96 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
Memo :
0
When overwriting an existing file, the subname
of the existing file is displayed.
0
Select
[Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the
previous screen.
5
Select [Store]
and press the Set button (R).
.
5
4
6
Save the file.
0
A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
Select [Overwrite]
on the confirmation
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen.
.
6
0
Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen when the file is newly saved.
.
7
Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
173
Connecting to the Network
a
Reading the Connection Settings File
1
Select [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Network]
/[Settings] B [Connection Setup]
and press the Set button (R).
2
Select [Load] and
press the Set button (R).
.
2
3
Select the file to read using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
3
4
Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears
on the
screen.
.
4
5
Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete
”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
Deleting Connection Settings
1
Select [Main Menu] B [
System] B
[Network]/[Settings] B [Connection Setup]
and press the Set button (R).
2
Select [Delete] and press the Set button
(R).
.
2
3
Select the file to delete using the cross-
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
.
3
4
Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...”
appears on the
screen.
.
4
5
Deletion is complete.
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
174
Connecting to the Network
a
Performing Live
Streaming a
By combining with the set top box decoder or PC
application that supports live streaming, you can
perform
audio and video streaming via the network.
Supported Formats
Video
No. of Frames for
W
Frame & Bit
Rate
Resolution
Setting values
(R: default value)
60p, 60i, 30p 1920x1080 60i (12.0 M),
R 60i (8.0 M) (*1),
60i (5.0 M),
60i (3.0 M)
1280x720 30p (8.0 M),
30p (5.0 M),
30p (3.0 M),
30p (1.5 M)
720x480 60i (8.0 M),
60i (5.0 M),
60i (3.0 M),
60i (1.5 M),
60i (0.8 M),
60i (0.3 M)
640x360 30p (3.0 M),
30p (1.5 M),
30p (0.8 M),
30p (0.3 M)
50p, 50i, 25p 1920x1080 50i (12.0 M),
R 50i (8.0 M) (*2),
50i (5.0 M),
50i (3.0 M)
1280x720 25p (8.0 M),
25p (5.0 M),
25p (3.0 M),
25p (1.5 M)
720x576 50i (8.0 M),
50i (5.0 M),
50i (3.0 M),
50i (1.5 M),
50i (0.8 M),
50i (0.3 M)
640x360 25p (3.0 M),
25p (1.5 M),
25p (0.8 M),
25p (0.3 M)
*1 Default value for U model
*2
Default value for E model
Memo :
0
The settings cannot be changed during live
streaming.
0
The following constraints apply depending on
the setting of [Main Menu] B [System] B
[Network]/
[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set] B
[Type].
0
An encoding bit rate exceeding 5.0 Mbps
cannot be selected when [Type
] is set to
“MPEG2-TS/RTP” or “RTSP/RTP”.
0
An encoding bit rate exceeding 5.0 Mbps
cannot be selected when [Type] is set to
“ZIXI
” and [Latency] is set to other than
“Low”.
0
An encoding bit rate exceeding 3.0 Mbps
cannot be selected when [Type
] is set to
“ZIXI” and [Latency] is set to “Low”, or when
[Type] is set to “RTMP”.
(A P
123 [ Type ] )
0
Depending on the type of network adapter used
and the connection, the images and audio
sound during live streaming can be choppy.
Audio
AAC
Supported Protocols
MPEG2-TS/UDP
MPEG2-TS/TCP
MPEG2-TS/RTP
RTSP/RTP
ZIXI
RTMP
175
Connecting to the Network
a
Setting Distribution
1
Set the [Record Format] according to the
resolution
and frame rate of the video to be
distributed.
.
640x360
30p
25p
30p
30p
25p
720x
480*¹
720x
576*²
30p
25p
25p
Record Format
Resolution/No. of Frames
1280x720
720x480
720x576
1920x
1080
60i,30p
60i
50i,25p
50i
1440x
1080
60i
60i
50i
1280x
720
60p,30p
60i
50p,25p
50i
60i
60i
50i
50i
1920x1080
50i
60i
50i
60i
50i
30p
25p
30p
30p
25p
25p
Settable Resolution during
Streaming/No. of Frames
*1 For U model
*2
For E model
Memo :
0
Live streaming cannot be performed in the
following cases.
0
When [Main Menu
] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is set to
“HD+SD” or “HD+Web”
0
When [Main Menu] B [System] B [Record
Set] B [Record Format
] B [WFrame & Bit
Rate] is set to “24p”, “50p” or “60p”
(*“50p” and “60p” are for 1920x1080
resolution)
2
Set the Resolution and Frame & Bit Rate for
the video to be distributed.
Specify the settings in [
Main Menu] B [System]
B [Network]/[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set].
(A P122 [ Live Streaming Set ] )
3
Specify the distribution protocol and
related items.
Specify the distribution protocol and related
items in [Main Menu
] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set] B [Streaming
Server].
(A P123 [ Streaming Server ] )
4
Select the server for live streaming.
Select the transmission server in [Main Menu]
B [System] B [Network]/[Settings] B [Live
Streaming Set
] B [Server].
Starting Distribution
1
Perform the necessary setting for the
decoder and PC application.
For details on the settings, please refer to the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the respective devices
and applications.
Memo :
0
If there is an NAT router within the
communication path between the camera and
the decoder, port forwarding setup is required.
For details on the settings, please refer to the
“INSTRUCTIONS” of the router in use.
0
The following parameters are required when
connecting to this camera recorder using the
RTSP/RTP.
Port number: 554
Stream ID: stream
0
Use the following to access via URL.
rtsp://<IP
address of the camera recorder>:554/
stream
2
With the network connection established,
set
[Live Streaming] to “On”.
(A P
149 [Preparing Network Connection a] )
0
Set [Main Menu] B [System] B [Network]/
[Settings] B [Live Streaming Set] B [Live
Streaming] to “On”.
0
The network connection mark appears on
the display screen when a network
connection is established.
.
100min
50min
282min
P13000K
1/100
F1. 6
0
dB
AE+6
ND 1 /64
5 . 6 f t
12 :34 :56
Jan 12, 2016
00: 00:00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20 10 0
176
Connecting to the Network
a
Memo :
0
You can also assign
“Live Streaming” to a user
button.
(A P
38 [Assignment of Functions to User
Buttons] )
0
You can view the status of distribution on the
LCD monitor.
(A P135 [Live streaming mark a] )
Icon Status
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (good
connection quality)
Blinks when distribution starts or
stops
.
(Red)
Distribution in progress (poor
connection quality)
.
(Yellow)
Waiting for connection (during
RTSP/RTP) or connection failed
0
When the 5 icon is displayed, you can view the
details of the error on the [Network] screen of the
status screen.
.
Cause of Error
(A P
181 [List of Live Streaming Error Displays
a] )
Caution :
0
Streaming may be interrupted temporarily 24
hours after the process started.
Setting the FEC Matrix
Set the amount of FEC (Forward Error Correction)
overhead for configuring SMPTE2022-1.
1
Select [Main Menu] B [
System] B
[Network]/[Settings] B [Live Streaming
Set] B [Streaming Server] B [Server1] to
[Server4] B [FEC Matrix] and press the Set
button.
The FEC adjustment screen appears.
.
2
Adjust the L and D values.
Use the H/I buttons to adjust the L value, and
the J/K buttons to adjust the D value.
The amount of FEC overhead changes when
the L and D values are changed.
To restore the L and D values to their default
values, press the
[OIS/2] button.
Memo :
0
Setting range
0
4 ≦ L ≦ 20 (Default value: L = 10)
0
4 ≦ D ≦ 20 (Default value: D = 10)
0
L × D ≦ 100 (Default value: L×D = 10×10)
3
Press the Set button (R).
The screen returns to the streaming server
setting screen.
.
Memo :
0
Increasing the amount of FEC overhead
increases the packet loss resilience but more
network bandwidth is used.
0
Even with the same amount of overhead,
increasing the L value will increase the packet
loss (continuous packet loss) resilience.
177
Connecting to the Network
a
Error Messages and Actions
Warning
display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen, tally lamp indication and warning tone are as
follows according to the error status.
Memo :
0
This camera recorder makes use of a microcomputer. Noise interference from external sources may
prevent
it from functioning properly. When this occurs, turn off and on the power of the camera recorder
again.
Error Message Status Action
Turn Power Off Turn Back On
Later
System error.
*
The warning tone sounds and the
tally lamp blinks twice every
second.
Turn off the power, and turn it on
again.
If the error persists, please contact
the local dealers in your area.
Fan Stop Detected Please
Turn P.Off
0
The fan stopped running.
0
The power turns off
automatically after about 1
second.
Please contact the local dealers in
your area.
Fan Maintenance Required Usage time of the fan has exceeded
9000 hours.
Check the fan and replace
accordingly. For more details,
please contact the local dealers in
your area.
Memo :
0
You
can check the usage time of
the fan in [System] B [System
Information] B [Fan Hour].
(A P117
[ Fan Hour ] )
Getting Overheated.　 Please
Turn Power Off.
0
The battery has exceeded the
specified temperature.
0
The power turns off
automatically after about 15
second.
0
Wait until the temperature drops
or replace the battery.
0
If the error persists, please
contact the local dealers in your
area.
Rec Inhibited [REC] button is pressed when the
write-protect switch of the SD card
is set.
Turn off the write-protect switch of
the SD card, or insert a recordable
SD card.
(A P39
[SD Card] )
Lost Media Info *
0
Card
is removed while recording
is in progress.
0
Card is removed while
formatting is in progress.
0
Card is removed while restoring
is in progress.
0
Card is removed while adding
the OK mark.
0
Card is removed while writing a
setup file.
0
Card is removed while deleting a
clip.
(*: A, B)
Restore the card using this camera
recorder.
(A P42 [Restoring the SD Card] )
178
Others
Error Message Status Action
Record Format Incorrect
0
Video format of the file for Clip
Review is different from the
current [WResolution] and
[WFrame & Bit Rate] setting.
Set [WResolution] and [WFrame &
Bit Rate] correctly.
(A
P118 [WResolution a,
Resolution b] )
(A P118 [WFrame & Bit Rate
a, Frame & Bit Rate b] )
Media Full
0
[REC] button is pressed when
the media in use has no
remaining space.
0
Remaining
space ran out during
recording.
Replace the SD card with a new
one.
No Clips No viewable clips are found on the
card for Clip Review.
Insert an SD card that contains clips
that can be reviewed.
(A P
39 [SD Card] )
(A P74 [Viewing Recorded
Videos Immediately (Clip
Review)] )
No Media [REC]
button is pressed when an SD
card is not inserted.
Insert an SD card.
(A P39 [SD Card] )
No Media No SD card is found in Media mode
or when the thumbnail screen is
displayed.
Insert an SD card.
(A P39
[SD Card] )
No Clips No clips are found on the inserted
SD
card in Media mode or when the
thumbnail screen is displayed.
Insert an SD card that contains
playable clips.
(A P39 [SD Card] )
(A P85 [Playing Recorded
Clips] )
12h Continuation Record The continuous recording time in
AVCHD mode exceeds 12 hours
and recording stops automatically.
To continue recording, press the
[REC] button again.
List of FTP Transfer Errors a
If the upload of a recorded clip or download of the metadata setup file (XML format) is not successfully
completed, the following errors are displayed.
Error message Status Action
Timeout. Transfer was discontinued due to
timeout caused by network
transmission or server failure.
0
Execute again.
0
Use a different server.
Media Was Removed. SD card is removed while FTP
transfer is in progress.
Insert the SD card and execute FTP
transfer again.
Adapter Was Removed. The USB network device is
removed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Connect the USB network device.
Cannot Connect to Server. Unable to connect to the FTP server. Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [
Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
(A P125 [ Metadata Server ] )
(A P126 [ Clip Server ] )
179
Others
Error message Status Action
Access Denied. Access is denied. Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [Metadata Server
] or [Clip
Server].
(A P125 [ Metadata Server ] )
(A P126 [ Clip Server ] )
Invalid Username or
Password.
Authentication for login to the FTP
server failed.
Adjust the Username and Password
settings for [Metadata Server
] or
[Clip Server].
(A P125 [ Metadata Server ] )
(A P126 [ Clip Server ] )
Invalid Path Was Requested. The path specified for the FTP
server is incorrect.
Adjust the [Clip Server] and [Dir.
Path
] settings for [Metadata
Server] or [File Path].
(A P125 [ Metadata Server ] )
(A P126 [ Clip Server ] )
Server Error. There was an unintended operation
of the FTP server.
Execute again.
Use a different server.
Invalid Request. A bad request is executed for the
FTP server.
Execute again.
Invalid Data Size. Invalid data size, such as a planning
metadata size that exceeds 4 KB.
Adjust the planning metadata saved
in the [Metadata Server
].
(A P159 [ Planning Metadata ] )
Invalid Data Format. The XML format of the planning
metadata is invalid.
Adjust the planning metadata saved
in the [Metadata Server
].
(A P159 [ Planning Metadata ] )
Transfer Error. Transfer failed due to
communication failure.
Execute again.
Invalid URL. The path was deemed invalid by the
FTP server.
Adjust the Server and Port settings
for
[Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
(A P125 [ Metadata Server ] )
(A P126 [ Clip Server ] )
Media Access Error. Reading/writing of the SD card
failed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Insert a different SD card.
Internal Error. An internal error has occurred while
FTP transfer is in progress.
Adjust the settings and execute
again.
Other Error. An unknown error or other errors
have occurred while FTP transfer is
in progress.
Adjust the settings and execute
again.
Media Read Error. Reading of the SD card failed while
FTP transfer is in progress.
Insert a different SD card.
180
Others
List of Live Streaming Error Displays a
The following error messages are displayed when the live streaming setting is incorrect, or when the
connection is lost during live streaming.
Error message Status Action
Invalid Address
0
The IP address format is
incorrect.
0
The domain name cannot be
converted into the IP address.
0
Enter the IP address or host
name of the destination
correctly.
(A P176
[Setting Distribution] )
Multicast Is Not Supported An IP multicast address was set. Use an IP address that is not a
multicast address.
Cannot Connect to Receiver Establishment of connection with
TCP failed.
0
Ensure that the recipient’s
device is set to TCP.
0
Set Type to
“MPEG2-TS/UDP”.
(A
P176 [Setting Distribution] )
TCP Disconnected TCP connection is lost. Check to ensure that there is no
abnormality in the decoder, or
network connection device and
cables,
followed by establishing the
connection again.
Not Enough Bandwidth
0
The communication bandwidth
is narrower than the average bit
rate.
0
The network bandwidth is
insufficient, and packets are
discarded.
0
Lower the resolution/picture
quality of the video to be
distributed.
0
Consider
switching to the use of
a stable network, such as wired
LAN.
Connection Timeout Timeout for connection via ZIXI. Set [Destination Address] and
[Destination Port
] correctly.
(A P176 [Setting Distribution] )
Authorization Failed Authentication of connection via
ZIXI failed.
Set [Stream ID] and [Password]
correctly.
(A P
176 [Setting Distribution] )
Connection Error Connection via “ZIXI” or “RTMP”
failed.
Check whether a different camera
with an identical stream ID is
connected.
0
Set [Destination URL] and
[Stream Key] correctly.
(A P123
[ Destination URL ] )
(A P123 [ Stream Key ] )
Disconnected “ZIXI” or “RTMP” connection is lost. Check whether there is abnormality
with
the network connection device,
cables, etc., and try to re-establish
the connection.
Blinking of the Tally Lamp
The tally lamp start blinking when the remaining space on the SD card is running out during recording, or
when the battery power is running low.
Blinking Mode Remaining Battery Power/SD Card Space
Blinks slowly
(once every second)
0
Battery power is low
0
Remaining recording time on SD card is less than 3 minutes (during
recording)
0
When a malfunction occurred during live streaming a
Blinks quickly
(2 times per second)
0
Remaining battery power is almost zero
0
Remaining recording time on SD card is zero (during recording)
0
Error on the camera recorder
181
Others
Warning Tone
0
Warning tone is output from the monitor speaker and [x] terminal when the battery level is low.
0
Warning tone is also output when an error occurs in the camera recorder.
Memo :
0
You
can specify whether to turn on the warning tone as well as setting the volume in [A/V Set] B [Audio
Set] B [Alarm Level].
(A P115
[ Alarm Level ] )
Troubleshooting
Symptom Action
Power does not turn on.
0
Is the AC adapter properly connected?
0
Is the battery charged?
0
Is the power turned on immediately after it is turned off?
Make sure to wait for an interval of at least 5 seconds before turning
on the power again.
Unable to start recording.
0
Is the record trigger button/lock switch on the handle turned on?
0
Is the write-protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write-protect switch is turned off.
(A P39 [Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card] )
0
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
(A P18
[Operation Modes] )
0
Is the SD card inserted compatible with the recording format?
(A P46 [Selecting a Video Format] )
(A P121 [ 4GB File Spanning(SDXC) ] )
Camera image is not output on
the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
0
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
(A P
18 [Operation Modes] )
Playback does not start after
selecting a clip thumbnail and
pressing the Set button (R).
0
Is the selected clip a playable clip?
Playback
is not possible if the clip has a different video format setting.
No sound during playback.
0
Is
the currently played clip recorded in the Variable Frame Rec mode?
(A P84 [Variable Frame Rec] )
Images on the LCD monitor
and viewfinder screen appear
dark or blurred.
0
Readjust the brightness of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
0
Is the [
ND FILTER] switch set to “1/64”?
0
Is the iris closed?
0
Is the shutter speed setting too high?
0
Is the amount of peaking too little? Use the
[PEAKING +/-] button to
adjust the contour for the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen.
(A P36
[Adjusting the LCD Monitor] )
(A P37 [Adjusting the Viewfinder] )
The [CH1/CH2]
recording level
adjustment knob does not
work.
0
Is the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch set to “AUTO”?
0
Is the [FULL AUTO]
switch set to “ON”?
Is the [FULL AUTO] switch set to “ON”, and [A/V Set] B [Audio
Set] B [Audio On FULL AUTO] set to “Auto”?
(A P115
[ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )
SD card cannot be initialized
(formatted).
0
Is the write-protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write-protect switch is turned off.
(A
P39 [Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card] )
Battery alarm appears even
after loading a charged
battery.
0
Is the battery too old?
182
Others
Symptom Action
The time code and user’s bit
are not displayed.
0
Even in Camera mode or Media mode, the time code and user’s bit
may not be displayed depending to the type of display.
0
Is [LCD/VF] B [Display Settings
] B [TC/UB] set to “Off”? To display
the time code or user’s bit, set it to “TC” or “UB”.
(A P
111 [ TC/UB ] )
The date and time are not
displayed.
0
The date and time are only displayed on the Display 1 and Display 2
screens in the Camera mode (during shooting).
(A P131
[Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
0
Is [System] B [Record Set] B [Time Stamp] set to “On”? To display
the date and time, set it to “Off”.
(A P121
[ Time Stamp ] )
Incorrect display on the
viewfinder.
0
Is the LCD monitor used with [LCD/VF]
B
[LCD + VF] set to “Off”?
(A P108 [ LCD + VF ] )
The actual recording time is
shorter than the estimated
time.
0
The recordable time may be shorter depending on the shooting
conditions or the subject.
The two camera recorders are
not synchronized even though
the time codes have been
synchronized. (Z on the Slave
device is not displayed.)
0
Is the [
TC IN/OUT] switch correctly set?
(A P70
[Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera] )
0
Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B [WFrame & Bit
Rate] such that the two camera recorders have the same frame rate.
(A P
118 [WFrame & Bit Rate a, Frame & Bit Rate b] )
Cannot connect to wireless
LAN. a
0
Check the mode of connection and method of setting (
[SSID] and
[Passphrase] in cases other than WPS).
(A P150
[Connecting via Wireless LAN] )
0
Even if the Passphrase is wrong, “Completed the Setup Wizard.
Please Input the Passphrase into Your Device.” may appear at the
browser setting depending on the type of encryption.
Adjust [Passphrase] again.
The View Remote screen turns
black.
The screen flickers.
The screen freezes.
Cannot perform remote
operation.
a
0
The network path is congested.
Wait a while before refreshing (reloading) the web browser.
The clips cannot be uploaded
to the FTP server. a
0
Adjust the [Clip Server] settings.
(A P
126 [ Clip Server ] )
0
The maximum size of the recorded clip is 64 GB.
If a file size limit is set in the FTP server settings, set the size limit to
more than 64 GB.
0
Take necessary action as described in “[List of FTP Transfer
Errorsa] (A P 179)”.
The wireless LAN is
disconnected. a
0
The wireless LAN may be disconnected depending on the
environment. Change the usage environment.
0
Connect via wired LAN.
(A P
152 [Connecting via Wired LAN] )
GPS signal cannot be
received. a
0
Signal reception from GPS satellites may be affected by buildings or
trees.
Perform
positioning preferably at an unobstructed location with a clear
view.
The position is not accurate.
a
0
The
precision error may be up to hundreds of meters if the GPS signal
is weak or reflected off surrounding buildings.
The images and audio sound
during live streaming are
choppy. a
0
Depending on the type of network adapter used and the connection,
streaming may not be possible with the encoding bit rate specified.
Please reduce the encoding bit rate.
183
Others
Specifications
General
Item Description
Power DC 12 V
Power
consumption
Approx. 12 W
a
Approx. 11 W
b
(When recording in the factory default
settings using the viewfinder.)
Mass
Approx. 2.5 k
g
(with battery)
a
Approx. 2.4 k
g
(with battery)
b
Allowable
operating
temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Allowable
operating
humidity
30 %RH to 80 %RH
Allowable
storage
temperature
-20 °C to 50 °C (-4 °F to 122 °F)
Dimensions (W
× H × D)
177.5 mm × 197 mm × 415.5 mm
Terminal Section
Item Description
[HD/SD SDI] output terminal (480i or 576i:
Downconverted; 720p/1080i: embedded audio),
BNC (unbalanced)
HD-SDI
Compliant with SMPTE ST292
SD-SDI
Compliant with SMPTE ST259
[HDMI] Output
Terminal (Type A)
V1.4-compliant
[INPUT1/INPUT2] terminal
[MIC] -50 dBu, 3 kK, XLR (balanced),
+48 V output (phantom power
supply)
[LINE] +4 dBu, 10 kK, XLR (balanced)
[AUX] terminal -22 dBu, 10 kK, 3.5 mm stereo
mini jack (unbalanced)
[AV] terminal 4-pin 3.5 mm mini jack
Video signal 1.0 V (p-p)
Audio signal -8 dBu (during reference level
input), 1 kK (unbalanced)
[x] terminal 3.5 mm mini jack (stereo)
[REMOTE]
terminal
2.5 mm mini jack (stereo)
[U] terminal
[DEVICE] Mini USB-B type, USB 2.0,
slave function (mass storage
class) only
[HOST] a USB-A type, USB2.0, network
connection function only
Item Description
[TC] terminal
[IN] 1.0 V (p-p) to 4.0 V (p-p) high
impedance
[OUT] 2.0 ± 1.0 V (p-p) low impedance
Lens Section
Item Description
Lens Fujinon F1.6, 23x, f=4.1 mm to
94.3 mm
(35 mm conversion: 29 mm to
667 mm)
Filter diameter Φ72 mm
Camera Section
Item Description
Image pickup
device
1/3-inch Progressive CMOS
Color separation
prism
F1.6, 3-color separation prism
Sync system Internal sync (built-in SSG)
Optical filter OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64
Gain -6dB, -3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB,
9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, 21dB,
24dB,
Lolux (30dB, 36dB), AGC
Electronic
shutter
1/4 to 1/10000, EEI
Variable Frame
Rate
2/30-60/30fps, 2/25-50/25fps,
2/24-60/24fps
LCD monitor 3.5-inch LCD, 16:9 920K pixels
Viewfinder 0.45-inch LCOS, 1.22M pixels
(852 x 480 x 3)
Storage Section
Item Description
Supported
media
SDHC/SDXC
Slots x 2
184
Others
Video/Audio
Item Description
Recording time Approx. 25 minutes (8 GB SD
card, 35 Mbps, VBR mode)
HD mode
(MOV/MP4/MXF: MPEG-2) a
(MOV/MP4: MPEG-2) b
Video
recording file
format
QuickTime File Format (For
Final
Cut Pro)/MP4 File Format/
MXF File Format a
QuickTime File Format (For
Final Cut Pro)/MP4 File Format
b
Video
HQ mode MPEG-2 Long GOP VBR, 35
Mbps (Max) MP@HL,
1920x1080/59.94i, 29.97p,
23.98p, 50i, 25p
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
1280x720/59.94p, 29.97p,
23.98p, 50p, 25p
SP mode MPEG-2 Long GOP CBR, 18.3
Mbps MP@HL (720p)/25 Mbps
MP@H14 (1080i)
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
1280x720/59.94p, 50p
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
HD mode (AVCHD)
Video
recording file
format
AVCHD File Format
Video
HQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 28 Mbps
(Max)
1920x1080/59.94p, 50p
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 24 Mbps
(Max)
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i
SP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 18 Mbps
(Max)
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i
LP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 9 Mbps
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
EP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 5 Mbps
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
Audio Dolby Digital 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit,
256 kbps
Item Description
HD mode (MOV: H.264)
Video
recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video
XHQ Mode
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 50 Mbps (Max)
1920x1080/59.94p, 59.94i, 29.97p,
23.98p, 50p, 50i, 25p
UHQ Mode
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 35 Mbps (Max)
1920x1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 23.98p,
50i, 25p
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
SD mode (MOV: H.264)
Video
recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps
720x480/59.94i (U model only),
720x576/50i (E model only)
Audio LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
Web mode (MOV: H.264) a
Video
recording file
format
QuickTime File Format
Video
HQ mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 3 Mbps
960x540/29.97p, 23.98p, 25p
LP mode MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, 1.2 Mbps
480x270/29.97p, 23.98p, 25p
Audio μ-law 2ch, 16 kHz
Streaming mode
a
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i Audio
AAC 128 k 12/8/5/3 Mbps
1280x720/29.97p, 25p Audio
AAC 128 k 8/5/3/1.5 Mbps
720x480/59.94i 720x576/50i
Audio AAC 128 k/64 k/32 k
8/5/3/1.5/0.8/0.3 Mbps
640x360/29.97p, 25p Audio
AAC 32 k 3/1.5/0.8/0.3 Mbps
185
Others
Accessories
Accessories
Warranty Card (U model only) 1
INSTRUCTIONS (BASIC) 1
Document and Software Disc 1
AC Adapter 1
Power Cord (U model: 1, E model: 2)
Battery 1
Large Eyecup 1
Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)
.
269.5
57
345.5
402.5
415.5
178
197
140
156.5
177.5
148.5
(HOOD)
* The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement without
prior notice.
186
Others
Index
A
AC adapter .......................................... 29, 30
Access point
............................................ 150
Action ........................................................ 87
Aspect ratio ................................................ 47
Auto power off ........................................... 31
B
Backup rec ................................................ 78
Battery ................................................. 15, 28
Brightness adjustment ............................... 53
C
Camera mode .............................. 19, 34, 131
Cellular adapter ....................................... 152
Charging time ............................................ 29
Clip continuous rec .................................... 80
Clip cutter trig (splitting clips) ..................... 75
Clip name ............................................. 43, 86
Clip review ................................................. 74
Color bar .................................................. 140
Color matrix ............................................. 141
Computer ................................................. 145
Connection settings file ............................ 172
Continuous operating time ......................... 29
D
Deleting clips ............................................. 89
Display screen ........................... 34, 131, 136
Dual rec ..................................................... 76
E
Error message ................................... 60, 178
Expanded focus ......................................... 51
External monitor ....................................... 146
Eyecup ...................................................... 27
F
Face detection ........................................... 52
Favorites menu ........................................ 127
FEC matrix ....................................... 124, 177
File format .................................................. 46
Focus ......................................................... 49
Focus assist ............................................... 51
Formatting (initializing) SD cards ............... 41
Frame rec .................................................. 82
FTP server ................................. 87, 153, 155
G
Gain adjustment ........................................ 55
GPS ............................................. 16, 74, 132
H
Headphone ........................................ 65, 148
I
Image stabilizer .......................................... 63
Initial settings ............................................. 32
Interval rec ................................................. 83
Iris adjustment ........................................... 54
L
LCD monitor ............................. 17, 30, 34, 36
Lens cover ................................................. 28
Live streaming ......................................... 175
M
Marker display ......................................... 140
Media mode ................................. 19, 34, 136
Menu .............................................. 94, 95, 97
Metadata .......................................... 153, 159
N
ND filter ...................................................... 58
Network ........................................... 134, 149
Network operating environment ............... 149
O
OK mark .................................................... 90
One push auto focus .................................. 50
P
P2P .......................................................... 151
Picture file ................................................ 142
Picture quality setting ................................. 62
Power .................................................. 30, 31
Pre rec ....................................................... 80
Preset zoom (browser) ............................ 167
Preset zoom (camera) ............................... 49
Push auto focus ......................................... 50
R
Recordable time ........................................ 39
Remote edit mode ............................... 19, 35
Resolution .................................................. 46
Restoring SD card ..................................... 42
S
Safety zone display .................................. 140
SD/SDHC/SDXC card ......................... 16, 39
SDI ................................................... 112, 146
Selecting multiple clips .............................. 91
Setting the date/time .................................. 33
Setup file .................................................. 142
Shooting .................................................... 45
Skin detail function ................................... 140
Software keyboard ..................................... 96
Spot meter ................................................. 72
Status screen ..................................... 35, 139
Switching shutter mode ............................. 56
Switching shutter speed ............................ 56
T
Tally lamp .......................................... 38, 181
Thumbnail (detailed screen) ...................... 87
Thumbnail (standard screen) ..................... 85
Thumbnail screen ...................................... 85
Time code ...................................... 66, 67, 70
Time code generator ................................. 67
Time code playback ................................... 88
187
Others
Trimming .................................................... 93
U
USB mode ................................... 19, 35, 145
User button
................................................ 38
User’s bit .................................................... 66
V
Variable frame rec ..................................... 84
Video format .............................................. 46
View remote ............................................. 166
Viewfinder ................................ 17, 30, 34, 37
W
Warning ............................................. 35, 182
Web browser ............................ 158, 162, 170
White balance adjustment ......................... 59
White paint ................................................. 61
Wired LAN ............................................... 152
Wired remote control ............................... 148
Wireless LAN ........................................... 150
Z
Zebra pattern ............................................. 71
Zoom ......................................................... 48
188
Others
Software License
Agreement
The software embedded in the Product (hereinafter
the “Licensed Software”) provided by
JVC KENWOOD Corporation (hereinafter the
“Licensor”) is copyrighted to or sublicensable by the
Licensor, and this Agreement provides for the terms
and conditions which Users shall follow in order to
use the Licensed Software. The User shall use the
Licensed Software by agreeing with the terms of this
Software License Agreement. This Agreement shall
be deemed completed at the time the User
(hereinafter the “User”) initially used the Product in
which the “Licensed Software” is embedded.
The Licensed Software may include the software
which has been licensed to the Licensor directly or
indirectly from any third party. In such case, some
third parties require the Users to follow their
conditions for use separately from this Software
License Agreement. Such software shall not be
subject to this Agreement, and the Users are urged
to read the “[Important Notice concerning the
Software] (A P 190)” to be provided separately.
Article 1 General Provision
The Licensor shall grant to the User a non-exclusive
and non-transferable (other than the exceptional
case referred to in Article 3, Paragraph 1) licensed
to use the Licensed Software within the country of
the User (the country where the User bought the
Product (hereinafter the “Country”)).
Article 2 License
1. The license granted under this Agreement shall be
the right to use the Licensed Software in the Product.
2. The User shall not duplicate, copy, modify, add,
translate or otherwise alter, or lease the Licensed
Software and any related documents, whether in
whole or in part.
3. The use of the Licensed Software shall be limited
to personal purpose, and the Licensed Software
shall not be distributed, licensed or sub-licensed
whether it is for commercial purpose or not.
4. The User shall use the Licensed Software
according to the directions described in the
operation manual or help file, and is prohibited to use
or duplicate any data in a manner violating the
Copyright Law or any other laws and regulations by
applying whole or a part of the Licensed Software.
Article 3 Conditions for Grant of License
1. When the User transfers the Product, it may also
transfer the license to use the Licensed Software
embedded in the Product (including any related
materials, updates and upgrades) on condition that
no original, copies or related materials continue in
the possession of the User, and that the User shall
cause the transferee to comply with this Software
License Agreement.
2. The User shall not carry out reverse engineering,
disassembling, decompiling or any other code
analysis works in connection with the Licensed
Software.
Article 4 Right pertaining to the Licensed
Software
1. Any and all copyrights and other rights pertaining
to the Licensed Software and related documents
shall belong to the Licensor or the original holder of
the right who granted to the Licensor the license or
sublicense for the Licensed Software (hereinafter
the “Original Rightholder”), and the User shall not be
entitled to any right other than the license granted
hereunder, in respect of the Licensed Software and
any related documents.
2. The User shall, whenever the User uses the
Licensed Software, comply with any laws relating to
the copyright and other intellectual property rights.
Article 5 Indemnification of Licensor
1. Neither the Licensor nor the Original Rightholder
shall be liable for any damage incurred by the User
or any third party due to the exercise of the license
granted to the User under this Agreement, unless
otherwise restricted by law.
2. The Licensor will offer no guarantee for the
merchantability, convertibility and consistency with
certain objective of the Licensed Software.
Article 6 Liability to Third Party
If any dispute has arisen with any third party due to
an infringement upon a copyright, patent or any other
intellectual property right that was caused by the
User’s use of the Licensed Software, the User shall
settle such dispute at the User’s own cost and hold
the Licensor and the Original Rightholder harmless
from any inconvenience it may cause.
Article 7 Confidentiality
The User shall keep the confidentiality of such
portion of the Licensed Software, related documents
thereof or any other information to be granted under
this Agreement, as well as the conditions of this
Agreement as has not yet entered the public domain,
and shall not disclose or divulge the same to any third
party without approval of the Licensor.
Article 8 Termination
In case the User falls under any of the events
described in the following items, the Licensor may
immediately terminate this Agreement or claim that
the User compensates for the damage incurred by
the Licensor due to such event:
(1) when the User violated any provision of this
Agreement; or
(2) when a petition has been filed against the User
for an attachment, provisional attachment,
provisional disposition or any other compulsory
execution.
189
Others
Article 9 Destruction of the Licensed Software
If this Agreement is terminated pursuant to the
provision of Article 8, the User shall destroy the
Licensed Software, any related documents and
copies thereof within two (2) weeks from such date
of termination.
Article 10 Export Restriction
1. The User shall understand that the Licensed
Software shall be subject to the export restrictions
adopted by the country of User and any other
countries.
2. The User shall agree that the software will be
subject to any and all applicable international and
domestic laws including the export control regulation
of the country of User and any other countries, and
any restrictions concerning the end-users, the use
by end-users and importing countries to be provided
by the country of User and any other countries, and
any other governmental authorities.
3. If the User is an agency of the United States of
America (the “Government”), the User acknowledge
Licensor’s representation that the Licensed
Software is a “Commercial Item” as defined in
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) part 2.101(g)
consisting unpublished “Commercial Computer
Software” as those items are used at FAR part
12.212 and is only license the User with the same
use right Licensor grants all commercial end users
pursuant to the terms of this Agreement.
Article 11 Miscellaneous
1. In the event any part of this Agreement is
invalidated by operation of law, the residual
provisions shall continue in force.
2. Matters not stipulated in this Agreement or any
ambiguity or question raised in the construction of
this Agreement shall be provided or settled upon
good-faith consultation between the Licensor and
the User.
3. The Licensor and the User hereby agree that this
Agreement is governed by the laws of Japan, and
any dispute arising from, and relating to the rights
and obligations under, this Agreement shall be
submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Tokyo
District Court for its first instance.
Important Notice
concerning the Software
Software License Attached to the Product :
The Software embedded in the Product is composed
of several independent software components, and in
each of such individual components (hereinafter the
“Licensed Software”), a copyright of either
JVC KENWOOD Corporation (hereinafter “JKC”) or
a third party subsists.
The Product uses the software component
designated in the End-User License Agreement that
was executed between JKC and a third party
(hereinafter “EULA”).
The Licensed Software covers those corresponding
to free software, and, as a condition of distribution of
the software component in executable format which
is based on the license granted under the GNU
General Public License or Lesser General Public
License (hereinafter “GPL/LGPL”), it requires an
availability of the source code for the relevant
component. Please refer to the following URL
concerning the distribution of the source code;
http://www3.jvckenwood.com/english/
download/gpl/index.html
Please note that we are unable to answer any inquiry
relating to the contents, etc. of the source code. In
addition, the Licensed Software includes the
software developed or created independently by
JKC and there exists an ownership of JKC in such
software and any accompanying documents, which
is protected by the Copyright Law, any international
treaties and other applicable laws. As to matters
concerning the handling by JKC of the software
components, please refer to the “Software License
Agreement” attached hereto. Please note that any
software component licensed under “EULA” which
is not subject to “GPL/LGPL”, and those developed
or created independently by JKC shall not be subject
to the requirement for provision of the source code.
The software component distributed under “GPL/
LGPL” shall be licensed to users without charge,
and, therefore, no warranty is given for such software
component, either express or implied, within the
scope of the applicable laws and regulations. Unless
otherwise permitted by applicable laws and
regulations or agreed in written form, none of the
owners of the copyright or persons entitled to alter or
redistribute the software component under the said
license shall have any liability for any type of damage
or loss resulting from the use of or inability to use
such software component. For further details of the
conditions of use of such software component or
matters required to be complied with, please refer to
the relevant “GPL/LGPL”.
Users are urged to read the details for the relevant
license carefully before using the software
component covered by “GPL/LGPL” and embedded
in the Product. Since the terms and conditions of
individual licenses are provided by parties other than
JKC, the original English version will be displayed by
the Product.
A
Turn on the power.
B
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.
C
Select [Main Menu]
B
[System]
B
[System
Information]
B
[Open Source License].
190
Others
191
.
GY-HM660U/GY-HM660E / GY-HM620U/GY-HM620E
HD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
© 2016 JVC KENWOOD Corporation
B5A-1277-00
… 182 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for JVC GY-HM660E at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of JVC GY-HM660E in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 11,36 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of JVC GY-HM660E

JVC GY-HM660E User Manual - German - 188 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info